Tellabs 7100 Installation

Revision C, 8/10
Copyright 2010 Tellabs. All rights reserved.
Installation
76.7144FP60/7
Tellabs
7100 Optical Transport System

SONET/SDH Systems
FCC Notification
Statement
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules require that you be notified of
the following:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tellabs Operations, Inc., in
writing can void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Industry Canada
Notification Statement
Industry Canada interference-causing equipment regulations require that you be
notified of the following:
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Copyright Statement This Tellabs manual is owned by Tellabs or its licensors and protected by U.S. and
international copyright laws, conventions, and treaties. Your right to use this manual
is subject to limitations and restrictions imposed by applicable licenses and
copyright laws. Unauthorized reproduction, modification, distribution, display or
other use of this manual may result in criminal and civil penalties.
Trademark Notice The following trademarks and service marks are owned by Tellabs Operations,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries: ACCESSMAX
,
CABLESPAN
,

CEC-128
, DXX
, DYNAMIC SIGNAL
TRANSFER
, EC DUO
, ENHANCED AUDIO PLUS
, EXPRESS/PATH
,
FOCUS
, INTELLIGENT SERVICE EDGE
, MARTIS
,
MARTISDXX
, METROCARE , METROVANTAGE
,
MetroWatch
, NETREACH
, NETWISE
, SCULPTURED SOUND
,
TECHNOLOGY THAT TRANSFORMS THE WAY THE WORLD
COMMUNICATES
, TELLABS
, TELLABS
PROPARTNER
, Tellabs
ServiceAssured
Upgrade, TELLABS. THE

FUTURE OF YOUR BUSINESS. STARTING NOW
, TEL/MOR
, THE WORLD
COMMUNICATES THROUGH TELLABS
, TITAN
, VERITY
, YOUR
NETWORKING PARTNER
Any other company or product names may be trademarks of their respective

companies.
Contact Information In an effort to improve the quality of this document, please notify Tellabs Technical
Assistance at 1.800.443.5555 in North America or 1.630.798.7070 outside North
America if any anomalous conditions are observed.
SM
Installation Contents
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-i
Contents Page
Section 1 Introduction 7-1
System SBOADM Configurations.......................................................... 7-1
System OAL Configurations.................................................................. 7-2
Reason for Reissue............................................................................... 7-3
Section 2 Equipment Overview 7-5
Equipment Measurements ................................................................................. 7-5
Relay Rack Measurements.......................................................................... 7-5
Relay Rack Spacer Measurements ............................................................. 7-6
6-Inch Rack Spacer Measurement........................................................ 7-8
10-Inch Rack Spacer Measurement...................................................... 7-8
Spacer and Fiber Duct Overview................................................................. 7-8
6-Inch Spacers ...................................................................................... 7-9
10-Inch Spacers .................................................................................. 7-10
Horizontal Fiber Duct........................................................................... 7-11
Vertical Fiber Duct............................................................................... 7-11
82.07100A/C-60 Main Shelf and 82.07100B/D-60 Port Shelf Space
Requirements ............................................................................... 7-12
Shelf Measurements .......................................................................... 7-12
Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (BFAP) Measurements ......................... 7-12
Generic Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (BFAP) Measurements ............ 7-13
Alarm Interface Panel (AIP) Measurements ....................................... 7-13
Fan Assembly/Chassis Measurements .............................................. 7-13
Fan Filter and Plenum Measurements ................................................ 7-14
NEBS 23-Inch Rack Air Baffle Measurements.................................... 7-14
ETSI Rack Air Baffle Measurements................................................... 7-14
83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) Space Requirements ...... 7-15
83.07100B-60 HCSS Measurements.................................................. 7-15
Optional HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Measurements........... 7-15
Equipment Shelf Layout Rules......................................................................... 7-16
NEBS 82.07100A/B-60 Shelves.......................................................... 7-16
ETSI 82.07100C/D-60 Shelves ........................................................... 7-17
NEBS/ETSI 83.07100B-60 HCSS....................................................... 7-17
82.07100A/C-60 Main Shelf and 82.07100B/D-60 Port Shelf Racks .. 7-17
NEBS 83.07100B-60 HCSS Racks..................................................... 7-18
ETSI 83.07100B-60 HCSS Racks....................................................... 7-18
Torquing Force Tables ..................................................................................... 7-22
Section 3 Unpacking and Installing NEBS Equipment Relay Racks 7-23
Unpacking System Equipment ......................................................................... 7-23
Unpacking the Equipment.......................................................................... 7-25
Unpacking Crated Shipments.................................................................... 7-27
Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting .................................................. 7-28
Floor Load.................................................................................................. 7-28
Floor Layout............................................................................................... 7-28
Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for Site Installations ....................... 7-32
Preparing for the Relay Rack Installation .................................................. 7-42
Installing the Relay Rack Framework............................................................... 7-46
Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support ................................... 7-51
Installing Fiber Management Solutions...................................................... 7-57
Contents Installation
Page 7-ii 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Contents Page
Configurations for Patch Panels and DCM Chassis............................ 7-58
Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in a NEBS Environment..... 7-61
Installing NEBS HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender and Transition
Pieces (Required) ......................................................................... 7-62
Installing HCSS Rear Rack Spacer Base Bump Out Transition
Pieces..................................................................................... 7-66
Installing the HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender Cover ........................ 7-71
Installing the HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) ................................... 7-73
Installing the HCSS in the Rack................................................................. 7-75
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (NEBS) ..................................... 7-80
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases.......................................... 7-80
Attaching ESI Cable Block Bases ....................................................... 7-84
Attaching NEBS Mounting Z-Brackets ................................................ 7-85
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables ........................................................... 7-93
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers ........................................ 7-97
Installing Vertical Fiber Ducts in 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRSs) ... 7-106
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks ................................................ 7-109
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Below Relay Racks ...................................... 7-110
Installing the 1-Inch (25.4 mm) Gray Steel Pipe Support ........................ 7-114
Installing the Lacing Bracket .................................................................... 7-116
Installing the 1-Inch Gray Steel Pipe Clamp on the RRS ........................ 7-117
Installing the End Shield .......................................................................... 7-118
Supporting the Top of the End Shield...................................................... 7-121
Installing the Wire Shield................................................................................ 7-124
Installing the Wire Shield Next to Third Party Equipment ........................ 7-126
Installing the Wire Shield Between Two Rack Spacers........................... 7-128
Installing the Wire Shield Extension............................................................... 7-130
Installing the Wire Shield Extension Next to Third Party NE ................... 7-133
Installing the Wire Shield Extension Between Two Rack Spacers .......... 7-135
Finalizing the Relay Rack Framework Installation................................... 7-137
Installing the Rear Cover Panel Assembly..................................................... 7-139
Rack End Aisle Rear Cover Panel Kits.................................................... 7-140
Growing NEs at End of Aisle or Wire Shield ..................................... 7-142
Installing the End Shield Adapters........................................................... 7-150
Attaching the Bottom End Shield Adapter ......................................... 7-151
Attaching the Middle End Shield Adapter.......................................... 7-154
Attaching the Top End Shield Adapter, With/Without PEM Nuts....... 7-157
Installing the Radius Control Plates......................................................... 7-160
Attaching the Edge Guards (Optional)..................................................... 7-161
Installing the Top Box .............................................................................. 7-162
Installing the Rack Top Fiber Guide (Diverter) ........................................ 7-163
Installing the Fiber Spools ....................................................................... 7-164
Installing the Door Cover Screws ............................................................ 7-166
Installing the Fiber Extension................................................................... 7-168
Installing the Rack Spacer Duct Mounting Bracket.................................. 7-169
Materials............................................................................................ 7-169
Installing the Fiber Cables ....................................................................... 7-171
Installing the Rear Cover Plate on the Top Box....................................... 7-172
Installing the Front Cover Plate on the Top Box...................................... 7-173
Installing the Front Edge Guard to the Wire Shield (Optional)................. 7-175
Installing the Rear Door Panels............................................................... 7-175
Tightening All Screws .............................................................................. 7-177
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-iii
Contents Page
Section 4 Unpacking and Installing ETSI Equipment Relay Racks 7-178
Unpacking System Equipment ....................................................................... 7-178
Unpacking the Equipment........................................................................ 7-179
Unpacking Crated Shipments.................................................................. 7-181
Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting ................................................ 7-183
Floor Load................................................................................................ 7-183
Floor Layout............................................................................................. 7-183
Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for Site Installations ..................... 7-184
ETSI Accessory Equipment ..................................................................... 7-186
Preparing for the Relay Rack Installation ................................................ 7-189
Installing the Relay Rack Framework............................................................. 7-192
Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support ................................. 7-197
Installing the End Spacer Panel Kit ......................................................... 7-203
Finalizing the Relay Rack Framework Installation................................... 7-205
Tightening All Screws..................................................................................... 7-207
Installing Fiber Management Solutions.................................................... 7-207
Configurations for Patch Panels and DCM Chassis.......................... 7-209
Installing Vertical Fiber Ducts in 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers
(RRSs) ........................................................................................ 7-212
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks ................................................ 7-215
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Below Relay Racks ...................................... 7-216
Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in an ETSI Environment .. 7-220
Installing the Optional HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) in
ETSI Environment....................................................................... 7-222
Installing the HCSS in the ETSI Rack...................................................... 7-224
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (ETSI) ..................................... 7-228
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases........................................ 7-228
ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit.................................... 7-232
Attaching ESI Cable Block Bases ..................................................... 7-234
Attaching ETSI Mounting Brackets.................................................... 7-235
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables ......................................................... 7-243
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers ...................................... 7-247
Section 5 Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks 7-256
Mounting the DCM Horizontally in a Rack ..................................................... 7-257
Installing the DCM Chassis, Patch Panels, and Fiber Management in
Relay Rack Spacer Panels (RRSs)................................................... 7-259
Labeling for Patch Panels and DCM Chassis in RRSs............................ 7-260
Suggested Installation Locations in RRSs............................................... 7-260
Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RRS.......................................... 7-270
Installing the 88-Channel OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RRS.................. 7-271
Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RRS .......................................... 7-273
Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS..................................... 7-275
Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS ....... 7-277
Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP) in
the RRS ...................................................................................... 7-282
Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RRS ........................................ 7-285
Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel................................................................. 7-287
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RRS.............................................. 7-289
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in a 19-Inch or 23-Inch Rack .................. 7-290
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in a Wall Mount Cabinet ......................... 7-291
Page 7-iv 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Contents Page
Installing the DCM Chassis in the RRS ................................................... 7-291
Mounting the DCM Chassis Horizontally........................................... 7-293
Installing the Relay Rack Spacer (RRS) Spool Covers ........................... 7-295
Installing the Patch Panel Top Cover ...................................................... 7-296
Installing the DCM Chassis, Patch Panels, and Fiber Management in an
Auxiliary Rack Using a Rack Within a Rack (RWR) .......................... 7-299
Installing a Rack Within a Rack (RWR) Kit .............................................. 7-300
Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RWR......................................... 7-306
Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR.................................... 7-307
Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR...... 7-308
Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP)
in the RRS .................................................................................. 7-310
Installing the OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RWR .................................... 7-312
Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RWR ....................................... 7-313
Installing DCM Chassis in the RWR........................................................ 7-315
Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RWR......................................... 7-318
Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RWR....................................... 7-320
Installing the Fiber Cables ....................................................................... 7-322
Section 6 Installing Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment 7-323
Installing Optional External Amplifier Fuse Panel .......................................... 7-326
Installing Optional External Amplifier Modules (NIR, CRA, and BAMP) ........ 7-328
Generic BFAP.......................................................................................... 7-332
Section 7 Connecting the System Wiring 7-334
Guidelines for Systems Using 7100A/B/C/D-60 Shelves ............................... 7-335
Guidelines for Using an H-tap for Shelves............................................... 7-335
Connecting the Relay Rack Frame to the Office Ground............................... 7-336
Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the BFAP.......................... 7-339
Connecting the HCSS to the Optional PDU or Equivalent Power Source ..... 7-347
Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the HCSS PDU ................ 7-355
Connecting External Alarm Systems.............................................................. 7-362
Connecting the Alarm Interface Panel to Central Office Alarm ..................... 7-363
Wiring the BFAP to the Central Office Alarm Connections...................... 7-367
Connecting the AC Power Outlet (Optional) .................................................. 7-369
Cabling Between Shelves........................................................................ 7-373
Installing Horizontal Distribution Panel RT-1 to RT-2 Looping Cable...... 7-375
Bay Communication LAN Cables From 82.07100A/C-60 Main
Shelves to 82.07100B/D-60 Port Shelves .................................. 7-375
LAN Cables for Connecting A-side and B-side of Port Shelf and
Main in Same Rack..................................................................... 7-380
Inter-shelf LAN Cabling for Port Shelves or HCSSs in Separate
Rack than Main Shelf.................................................................. 7-385
Routing Cabling from First Main Shelf to Second Main Shelf .................. 7-392
Connecting the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Power Cables to the Fuse Panel ......... 7-396
Power Cables to a NIR or CRA......................................................... 7-396
Power Cables to a BAMP.................................................................. 7-396
Available Fuse Panel Fuses.............................................................. 7-396
NIR/CRA Power Cable Pin Out ......................................................... 7-397
BAMP Power Cable Pin Out.............................................................. 7-397
Power A Cable .................................................................................. 7-398
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-v
Contents Page
Power B Cable .................................................................................. 7-398
Connecting the Fuse Panel to the BDFB ....................................................... 7-400
Wiring the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Maintenance Port to the AIP ................. 7-401
Section 8 Installing Optical Cabling 7-408
Requirements and Safety Information............................................................ 7-408
Tools........................................................................................................ 7-409
Precautions.............................................................................................. 7-409
Bend Radius Constraints......................................................................... 7-409
Cable Connector Types ................................................................................. 7-410
SFP/XFP Cable Connector Types........................................................... 7-411
Cabling Methodology ..................................................................................... 7-412
Transmit (Out) and Receive (In) Methodology......................................... 7-414
Guidelines for Routing Cables................................................................. 7-414
Fiber Trough and Fiber Guides ......................................................... 7-414
Cable Routing Examples................................................................................ 7-415
Routing Cables from Transponders in Port Shelves to 2RU HD PPPs ... 7-417
Routing Cables from Transponders in HCSSs to 3RU High Density
Port Shelf Patch Panels (88CHPPs)........................................... 7-418
Routing Cables for Directionless Add/Drop Terminal Configuration
(OMD88) ..................................................................................... 7-419
Routing Cables from 82-Issue OPSM to 2RU HD PPP........................... 7-420
Routing Cables from 81-Issue OPSM to OPSM Patch Panel.................. 7-422
Routing Cables from Transponder to Y-Cable Patch Panel .................... 7-423
Routing Y-Cable Assembly from Transponder to Facility Patch Panel.... 7-424
Routing Cables from RCMM PP to Transponder in Another Rack .......... 7-425
Routing Cables from Transponders in Main Shelf to HD PPP................. 7-429
Routing Cables from RCMMs to the DCM Shelf...................................... 7-430
Routing Cables from OADM88 to DCMs ................................................. 7-431
Routing Cables from RCMM PP to RCMM PP in Another Rack ............. 7-432
Routing Cables from LGX Panel to Transponders .................................. 7-433
Routing Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to RCMM-8D88s................. 7-435
Routing Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to OADM88-xR Modules .... 7-436
Routing 2 mm and 3 mm Jacketed Fiber Cables in Fiber Troughs ......... 7-438
Routing Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and Cross-Connects ........ 7-439
Routing Cables From the Customer Termination to the Transponder
Modules............................................................................................. 7-442
Dressing the Cables ................................................................................ 7-445
Routing Pass-through Cables Between Two Peer Transponder Modules..... 7-447
Routing Optical Cables for Optional External Amplifiers
(NIR, CRA, BAMP) ............................................................................ 7-449
Routing Optical Cables Between Input Amplifier or OADM88 and
Optional NIR Amplifier ................................................................ 7-451
Optional CRA Amplifier ............................................................... 7-452
Optional BAMP ........................................................................... 7-454
Routing OMD88 Patch Panel Cables for Directionless Add/Drop
Terminals .......................................................................................... 7-455
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the LOAM-E88..................... 7-460
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the DX RCMM...................... 7-460
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the Transponder .................. 7-461
Page 7-vi 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Contents Page
Routing Cabling Between the DX RCMM and the LOAM-E88 ................ 7-461
Installing Customer Terminal Cabling ............................................................ 7-462
Applying Identification Labels......................................................................... 7-464
Section 9 Installing Timing Cabling 7-467
Connecting a Bits Clock to the Main Shelf ..................................................... 7-467
Section 10 Cabling LAN and Communication Connections 7-470
Cable Overview.............................................................................................. 7-470
Routing DCN-to-GNE LAN Connections........................................................ 7-471
Routing Spur-to-NE LAN Connections........................................................... 7-473
Routing Managed NE-to-Tellabs 7100 NE Connections................................ 7-476
Routing SW-3 LAN Connection...................................................................... 7-478
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD44 COMM Ports to RCMM-8D88s............ 7-480
Routing LAN Cables from DCM COMM Ports to Input Amplifiers.................. 7-483
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD44 COMM Ports to OADM88s.................. 7-485
Routing LAN Cables from DCM COMM Ports to OADM88s.......................... 7-488
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD88 COMM Port to DX RCMM................... 7-491
Section 11 Installing Optional Door Assemblies 7-494
Appendix A Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Services 7-499
Service Overview........................................................................................... 7-499
Site Preparation Services ........................................................................ 7-499
Engineering Services............................................................................... 7-499
Installation Services................................................................................ 7-500
Supervised Installation............................................................................. 7-500
Support Services Pricing Information............................................................. 7-500
Maintenance Services ............................................................................. 7-501
Index 7-503
Installation 1. Introduction
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-1
1. Introduction
1.01 This document contains procedures that explain how to install the Tellabs
7100 Optical Transport System (OTS) and how to enable all electrical, alarm,
communication and optical connections.
1.02 Refer to Tellabs 7100/7100N System Specifications for specification
information.
1.03 Refer to Tellabs 7100N Installation for Tellabs 7100N Optical Transport
System (OTS) installation information.
1.04 The 83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) is introduced with
FP6.0. It is a high-capacity shelf with terabit switching capability. The switch fabric
provides the ability to support SONET, SDH, Packet, and OTN switching between
modules on a single 83.07100B-60 HCSS or between modules on two paired
HCSSs. The paired HCSS configuration consists of two HCSSs in one rack which
are connected together using Electrical Shelf Interconnect (ESI) cables. The paired
HCSS feature is not supported in ETSI installations.
1.05 The 83.07100B-60 HCSS provides 19 module slots. System Processor
Modules (SPM-H) control shelf operations and populate slots 1 and 19. Unified
Fabric (UFAB) modules provide the redundant switch fabric and populate slots 9,
10, and 11. The remaining module slots support transponders/line cards or filler
modules. Each HCSS is equipped with a fan tray, fiber trough, and passive
distribution panel (PDP). The shelf utilizes high-speed and low-speed backplanes
for compatibility with existing modules.
System SBOADM
Configurations
1.06 Refer to Table 1.1, page 7-1 which lists the system SBOADM
configurations and the combinations of 82.07100A/C-60 USS main shelves,
82.07100B/D-60 USS port shelves, and 83.07100B-60 HCSSs supported in each
configuration.
Table 1.1 Supported SBOADM Hardware Configurations
Software
Configuration
Number of
Degrees Shelves Suppported
88-Channel Configurations
32 1 to 8 1 - 2 USS main shelves,
1 - 8 USS and HCSS port shelves
33 1 to 3 1 USS main shelf
44-Channel Configurations
39 1 to 4 1 USS main shelf,
1 - 12 USS port shelves
40 1 to 2 1 USS main shelf,
1. Introduction Installation
Page 7-2 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
System OAL Configurations 1.07 The system OLA configurations consist of one 82.07100A/C-60 main
shelf:
The 88-channel OLA is configuration #31.
The 44-channel OLA is configuration #41.
1.08 Refer to Tellabs 7100 System Engineering for more detailed descriptions
of SBOADM configurations.
1.09 This manual includes detailed procedures regarding how to unpack
equipment and install the following hardware:
NEBS and ETSI equipment relay racks
Tellabs 7100 OTS shelves
relay rack spacers with fiber management system
end shield
optical interface cabling
wire shield and extension
rear cover panel and fiber routing for rack spacer
fiber identification labels
1.10 This manual also includes detailed procedures regarding how to enable
the following electrical and optical cable connections:
relay rack frame to the office ground
48 Vdc office battery supply
intra-system cross-connect cabling
customer termination cabling
external alarms
alternating current (AC) power for use with optional electrical service
outlets
1.11 Before beginning any installation procedure, the installers should verify
that the materials and tools required to perform the procedure are on hand. If any
of the required materials are missing, Tellabs recommends postponing until all
materials are available and the installer has the appropriate tools on hand.
Note 1: For a list of parts and cable part numbers, refer to Tellabs 7100 System
Engineering.
Note 2: Although the Install Vendor/Installer may route the optic fiber cables, all
fiber terminations should be completed by qualified technicians
authorized to perform system testing procedures.
Installation 1. Introduction
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-3
1.12 Read the entire procedure before beginning the installation. Tellabs
recommends that a Tellabs Customer Service Representative be present when
performing the procedures outlined in this manual. Follow your company's
prescribed procedures for obtaining technical assistance or call Tellabs Technical
Assistance at 1.800.443.5555 (North America) or 1.630.798.7070 (outside North
America).
Reason for Reissue 1.13 Tellabs reissues this manual from Revision B to Revision C to include the
changes in Table 1.2, page 7-3. Change bars indicate the changes Tellabs made
from the previous to latest revision.
Table 1.2 Tellabs 7100 OTS Installation Manual Revision History
Revision Change History Release Date
A Initial release for the Tellabs 7100 Optical Transport System FP6.0.x. 1/09
B
updated High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) shelf graphics and procedures to
reflect updated shelf design
added the HCSS paired shelf configuration
removed the 82.71020C Revision A Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (BFAP)
removed the 6-inch spacer panel two cover panel kit, Tellabs part number
180.0508
updated all figures containing a 82.71020C Revision A BFAP
added the 3RU High Density Patch Panel (HD PPP), Tellabs part number
81.71S-88CHPP
added the 81.71424-NX High Density 10G Transponder (HDTG) module
added the reconfigurable, directionless add/drop terminal feature
- added the 81.71S-OMD88, Optical Mux/Demux 88 Channel Patch Panel
(OMD88)
- added the C7100RDXM_KIT, RDXM Directionless Kit which contains
the following piece parts:
- 81.71S-OMD88, Optical Mux/Demux 88 Channel Patch Panel
(OMD88)
- 81.71T-DXRCMM Directionless Reconfigurable Channel
Multiplexer Module - 88 Channel (DX RCMM)
- 81.71123C, Line Output Amplifier Module - Enhanced 88
Channel (LOAM-E88)
6/10
1. Introduction Installation
Page 7-4 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
B (cont.)
renamed the 81.71328O-M, Optical Transport Network Module Mux - 8 SFP,
1 XFP, 1 MSA (OTNM-D) to 81.71328O-M, Optical Transport Network Module
Mux - 8 SFP, 1 XFP, 1 MSA (With Line Side Protection) (OTNM-D)
added the 81.71328O-U Optical Transport Network Multiplexer 8 SFPs,
1 XFP, 1 MSA (OTNM-D)
added Vertical Fiber Duct, page 7-11
updated Table 2.13, page 7-15
updated Installing HCSS Rear Rack Spacer Base Bump Out Transition
Pieces, page 7-66
updated Figures 5.4, page 7-262 through 5.11, page 7-269
added Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-307
added Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR,
page 7-308
updated Cable Routing Examples, page 7-415
updated Figure 10.4, page 7-489
6/10
C
added new section 5
added cable, Tellabs part number 255-0076-Cxxxx
added cable, Tellabs part number 255-0077-Cxxxx
removed cable family, Tellabs part number 150.17XX
added ETSI HCSS Paired Configuration
updated maximum length to 50 meters for cable families: 155.0001-xxxx,
155.0175-xxxx, 155.0183-xxxx
added new section, Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks,
page 7-256
removed ETSI 150 mm Rack Spacer Kit, Tellabs part number 14.90382-0
removed Flush Mount End Panel Kit, Tellabs part number 14.9097-00-0
updated Installing the HCSS in the Rack, page 7-270
updated Installing the HCSS in the ETSI Rack, page 7-224
reorganized Routing Optical Cables for Optional External Amplifiers (NIR,
CRA, BAMP), page 7-449
added Table 8.4, page 7-449
8/10
Table 1.2 Tellabs 7100 OTS Installation Manual Revision History
Revision Change History Release Date
Installation 2. Equipment Overview
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-5
2. Equipment Overview
2.01 This section provides an overview of the system equipment, and includes
the following information:
Equipment Measurements, page 7-5
Equipment Shelf Layout Rules, page 7-16
Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22
Equipment Measurements
2.02 This section provides the measurements for the following equipment in a
Tellabs 7100 OTS installation environment. For system electrical information, refer
to Tellabs 7100 System Engineering.
Relay Rack Measurements, page 7-5
Relay Rack Spacer Measurements, page 7-6
Requirements, page 7-12
83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) Space
Requirements, page 7-15
Note: For Tellabs 7100 OTS part numbers, refer to Tellabs 7100 System
Engineering.
Relay Rack Measurements
2.03 The equipment relay rack space required by a Tellabs 7100 network
element (NE) is shown in Table 2.1, page 7-5.
Table 2.1 Relay Rack NE Space Requirements
Measurement
Network Equipment Building
Standards (NEBS)
Relay Rack
European Telecommunications
Standards Institute (ETSI)
Relay Rack
Rack Height 84 inches (7 feet)
1
2133.6 mm (2.1 meters)
2200 mm (86.6 inches)
Footprint 26 inches x 12 inches
(660.4 mm x 304.8 mm)
600 mm x 300 mm
(23.6 inches x 11.8 inches)
Base Height 4 inches (101.6 mm) 100 mm (3.5 inches)
NEBS HCSS Base Extender 3 inches (76.2 mm) Does not apply.
ETSI HCSS Footprint Does not apply. 600 mm x 600 mm
(23.6 inches x 23.6 inches)
1. There are 1.75 inch (44.45 mm) Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard mounting units, and the overall width of the relay
rack is 25.94 inches (658.876 mm) with mounting centers at 22.31 inches (566.674 mm).
2. Equipment Overview Installation
Page 7-6 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Relay Rack Spacer Measurements
2.04 Fiber management solutions are provided by relay rack spacers (RRSs)
with fiber management spools. Refer to Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for
Site Installations, page 7-184.
2.05 Two optional spacer panels are available. The spacer panels, or
combination of spacer panels, used in an application is determined by the
requirements of each application. A horizontal fiber duct is also available.
2.06 The 6-inch (152.4 mm), or 10-inch (254 mm) relay rack spacer are
designed to fulfill a number of purposes. The RRS contains three vertical
compartments, each measuring 3 rack units (RU) wide, and are capable of holding
a 19-inch (482.6 mm) rack-mounted, non-powered device.
2.07 The top-most of the three compartments in the 6-inch and 10-inch RRS are
equipped with a 1 RU and a 2 RU filler plates that are typically removed and
replaced with RCMM patch panels and a 1 RU fiber trough or a Port Shelf patch
panel. Alternatively, if desired, the two filler plates can be replaced with a dual fiber
spool for routing and managing fiber cables.
2.08 The rack spacers contain three fixed fiber spools used for managing and
supporting the fiber cable assemblies.
2.09 The three compartments can be used to support any one or combination
of the following types of modules:
The RCMM patch panel is used to manage the fibers and optical
interfaces between the RCMM and transponder modules.
The High Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (HD PPP) is used to manage
the fibers and optical interfaces between the transponder modules,
OPSM modules, and customer facility terminations. The HD PPP is
equipped with LC/UPC connectors. There is a 2RU version and a 3RU
version.
The Port Shelf patch panel is used to manage the fibers and optical
interfaces between the transponder modules, OPSM modules, and
customer facility terminations. The Port Shelf patch panel is equipped
with SC/UPC connectors.
The 81.714144, Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 1 to 44 (OMD44-1)
and 81.714188, Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 44 to 88 (OMD44-45)
modules provide patch panel functionality to manage the fibers and
optical interfaces between the RCMM-8D88 and transponder
modules.
The 82.714144, Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 1 to 44 (OMD44-1)
and 82.714188, Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 44 to 88 (OMD44-45)
modules provide patch panel functionality to manage the fibers and
optical interfaces between the OADM88-xRs and transponder
modules.
The OPSM patch panel is used with the 81.71329-1 OPSM.
The Y-Cable patch panel is used for transponder protection.
The DCM shelf is used to hold the DCMs, which are associated with
the input amplifier modules.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-7
The OMD88 patch panel is used in reconfigurable, directionless,
add/drop configurations.
The 1 RU fiber troughs are used to manage fiber cables.
For more information on the Relay Rack Spacer (RRS) solution, refer to
Figure 2.1, page 7-7.
Figure 2.1 Relay Rack Spacer with Fiber Management Spools
fiber
management
spool cover
primary rack
with main shelf
shown with 1 RU and
2 RU filler plates,
which may be
replaced with an
RCMM patch panel
or with fiber spools,
as shown
fiber management
spools, which may be
replaced with a patch
panel or DCM shelf
secondary rack
149.0342 wire shield (149.0408 not pictured)
fiber
management
spools
Page 7-8 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
6-Inch Rack Spacer
Measurement
2.10 The NEBs equipment relay rack space required by a 6-inch rack spacer
(Tellabs part number 149.0245) with fiber management is given in Table 2.2,
page 7-8.
10-Inch Rack Spacer
Measurement
2.11 The NEBs equipment relay rack space required by a 10-inch rack spacer
(Tellabs part number 249-0014) with fiber management is given in Table 2.3,
page 7-8.
Spacer and Fiber Duct Overview
2.12 Optional spacer panels and fiber ducts are available:
6-Inch Spacers, page 7-9
10-Inch Spacers, page 7-10
Horizontal Fiber Duct, page 7-11
Vertical Fiber Duct, page 7-11
Table 2.2 Relay Rack with 6-Inch Spacer and Fiber Management Measurements
Measurement
Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS)
Relay Rack
1
2133.6 mm (2.1 meters)
Footprint for 1 rack with two 6-inch (152.4 mm) RRSs 38 inches x 12 inches
(965.2 mm x 304.8 mm)
Table 2.3 Relay Rack with 10-Inch Spacer and Fiber Management Measurements
Measurement
Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS)
Relay Rack
1
2133.6 mm (2.1 meters)
Footprint for 1 rack with two 10-inch (152.4 mm) RRSs 46 inches x 12 inches
(1168.4 mm x 304.8 mm)
Footprint for 1 rack with two 10-inch (152.4 mm) RRSs
and HCSS base extender
46 inches x 15 inches
(1168.4 mm x 381 mm)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-9
6-Inch Spacers 2.13 The 6-inch spacer panel has three compartments with removable filler
panels. Each compartment is 3 RU wide and can support various accessories
(RCMM patch panels, High Density Port Shelf Patch Panels (HD PPP), Port Shelf
patch panels, OMD44-1 patch panels, OMD44-45 patch panels, OPSM patch
panels, OMD88 patch panels, DCM shelves, Y-Cable patch panels, or 1 RU fiber
troughs). The 6-inch spacer panel is used in 44-channel, 4-degree or 8-degree
SBOADM applications. Refer to Figure 2.2, page 7-9.
Figure 2.2 6-Inch Space Panel
1 RU blank
filler panel
2 RU blank
filler panel
1-inch
pipe bracket
fiber
lacing
bracket
fiber
pass-through
removable
fiber spools
removable
fiber spools
6-inch spacer panel
with fiber management spools
(Tellabs part number 149.0245)
removable
polycarbonate
plastic
cover
Page 7-10 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
10-Inch Spacers 2.14 The 10-inch (25.40 cm) spacer panel has three compartments with
removable filler panels. Each compartment is 3 RU wide and can support various
accessories (RCMM patch panels, High Density Port Shelf Patch Panels (HD
PPP), Port Shelf patch panels, OMD44-1 patch panels, OMD44-45 patch panels,
OPSM patch panels, OMD88 patch panels, DCM shelves, Y-Cable patch panels,
or 1 RU fiber troughs).
2.15 The 10-inch spacers provide the extra width to allow mounting up to two
(left side/right side) separately available 2-inch wide by 4-inch deep spacer cable
ducts. These ducts can be mounted on the front and the rear of the panel. The
10-inch spacer panel is used in 88-channel and HCSS applications. Refer to Figure
2.3, page 7-10.
Figure 2.3 10-Inch Spacer Panel
1-inch
pipe bracket
fiber
lacing
bracket
fiber
pass-through
removable
fiber spools
removable
fiber spools
2 RU blank
filler panel
1 RU blank
filler panel
10-inch spacer panel
with fiber management spools
(Tellabs part number 249-0012)
removable
polycarbonate
plastic
cover
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-11
Horizontal Fiber Duct 2.16 The horizontal fiber duct with cover is 4-inches wide by 4-inches deep and
comes in 6-foot increments. End caps and connection pieces are ordered
separately. The horizontal fiber duct is used as required. Refer to Figure 2.4,
page 7-11.
Vertical Fiber Duct 2.17 The vertical fiber ducts are installed vertically onto the spacer panels as
required. There are two sizes available:
2-inch x 4-inch, 6-feet long
4-inch x 4-inch, 6-feet long
2.18 Order vertical fiber duct covers and bend radius clips separately. Refer to
Figure 2.4 Horizontal and Vertical Fiber Ducts
4
x
4
in
c
h
h
o
riz
o
n
ta
l fib
e
r d
u
c
t
2 x 2 inch vertical fiber duct
bend radius clip
Page 7-12 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Requirements
2.19 The following tables provide equipment measurements and space
requirements for Tellabs 7100 OTS 82.07100A/C-60 Main Shelf and
82.07100B/D-60 Port Shelf installations:
Shelf Measurements, page 7-12
Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (BFAP) Measurements, page 7-12
Alarm Interface Panel (AIP) Measurements, page 7-13
Fan Assembly/Chassis Measurements, page 7-13
Fan Filter and Plenum Measurements, page 7-14
NEBS 23-Inch Rack Air Baffle Measurements, page 7-14
ETSI Rack Air Baffle Measurements, page 7-14
Shelf Measurements 2.20 The equipment relay rack space that is required by the
82.07100A/B/C/D-60 shelves is shown in Table 2.4, page 7-12.
Note: The 82.07100A/B/C/D-60 shelves include the horizontal distribution panel
(HDP), the lower fan tray and the fiber trough as part of the shelf.
Breaker Frame Alarm Panel
(BFAP) Measurements
2.21 The equipment relay rack space that is required by a 82.71020C BFAP is
shown in Table 2.5, page 7-12.
Table 2.4 Shelf Measurements
Measurement
Type of Equipment Relay Rack
NEBS ETSI
Shelf Height 22.6 inches 574 mm
Shelf Width
1

1. The shelf width refers to the distance between equipment relay rack mounting centers.
19.5 inches 495.3 mm
Shelf Depth with doors
attached
Table 2.5 BFAP Measurements
Measurement
NEBS ETSI
BFAP Height 3.5 inches 88.9 mm
BFAP Width
1
1. Does not include mounting brackets.
BFAP Depth
2
2. Includes all cabling loops, hardware, door panel and LEDs.
9.7 inches 246.4 mm
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-13
Generic Breaker Frame
Alarm Panel (BFAP)
Measurements
2.22 The equipment relay rack space that is required by a 83.71020 BFAP is
Alarm Interface Panel (AIP)
Measurements
2.23 The equipment relay rack space that is required by a 81.71010 AIP is
Fan Assembly/Chassis
Measurements
2.24 The equipment relay rack space that is required by a 82.71030A fan
assembly chassis in the 82.07100A/B/C/D-60 shelves is shown in Table 2.8,
page 7-13.
Note: The 82.07100A/B/C/D-60shelves include the lower fan tray as part of the
shelf. The dimensions in Table 2.8, page 7-13 are for the additional fan
assembly chassis is located above each 82.07100A/B/C/D-60 shelf.
Table 2.6 BFAP Measurements
1
1. Three Breaker Kits (5 Amp, 15 Amp, 30 Amp, 40 Amp, 50 Amp, or 60 Amp) and two fuses
per kit (2 Amp) must be ordered separately.
Measurement
NEBS ETSI
BFAP Height 3.5 inches 88.9 mm
BFAP Width
2
BFAP Depth
3
3. Includes all cabling loops, hardware, door panel and LEDs.
9.7 inches 246.4 mm
Table 2.7 AIP Measurements
Measurement
NEBS ETSI
AIP Height 1.6 inches 40.6 mm
AIP Width
1

19.5 inches 495 mm
AIP Depth 5.8 inches 147.3 mm
Table 2.8 Fan Assembly
Measurement
NEBS ETSI
Fan Assembly Height 3.0 inches 76.5 mm
Fan Assembly Width 19.5 inches 495.8 mm
Fan Assembly Depth 11.8 inches 298.6 mm
Page 7-14 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Fan Filter and Plenum
Measurements
2.25 The equipment relay rack space that is required by the 82.71030B fan filter
and plenum in the 82.07100A/B/C/D-60 shelves is shown in Table 2.9, page 7-14.
NEBS 23-Inch Rack Air Baffle
Measurements
2.26 The equipment relay rack space that is required by the 81.71070 air baffle
and located below the lower fan tray of each 7100A/B-60 shelf is shown in Table
2.10, page 7-14.
ETSI Rack Air Baffle
Measurements
2.27 The equipment relay rack space that is required by the 81.7170B top air
baffle, which is located above the rack upper fan tray, is shown in Table 2.11,
page 7-14.
2.28 The equipment relay rack space that is required by the two 81.7170A
middle air baffles located between shelves is shown in Table 2.12, page 7-14.
Table 2.9 Plenum Measures
Measurement
NEBS ETSI
Fan Plenum Height 1.2 inches 29.6 mm
Fan Plenum Width 19.5 inches 495 mm
Fan Plenum Depth 11.4 inches 289.4 mm
Table 2.10 NEBS Air Baffle Measurements
Measurement
NEBS
Air Baffle Height 3.4 inches (85.7 mm)
Air Baffle Width 19.5 inches (495.7 mm)
Air Baffle Depth 11.8 inches (299.7 mm)
Table 2.11 ETSI Top Air Baffle Measurements
Measurement
ETSI
Air Baffle Height 144.8 mm (5.7 inches)
Air Baffle Width 655.3 mm (25.8 inches)
Air Baffle Depth 299.7 mm (11.8 inches)
Table 2.12 ETSI Middle Air Baffle Measurements
Measurement
ETSI
Air Baffle Height 144.8 mm (5.7 inches)
Air Baffle Width 655.3 mm (25.8 inches)
Air Baffle Depth 299.7 mm (11.8 inches)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-15
83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) Space Requirements
2.29 The following tables provide equipment measurements and space
requirements for Tellabs 7100 OTS 83.07100B-60 HCSS installations:
83.07100B-60 HCSS Measurements, page 7-15
Optional HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Measurements,
page 7-15
83.07100B-60 HCSS
Measurements
2.30 The equipment relay rack space required by the 83.07100B-60 HCSS is

Optional HCSS Power
Distribution Unit (PDU)
Measurements
2.31 The equipment relay rack space required by an 82.71020H HCSS PDU in
an 83.07100B HCSS rack is shown in Table 2.14, page 7-15.
Table 2.13 83.07100B-60 HCSS Measurements
Measurement Type Shelf Type Measurement
Shelf Height 83.07100B-60 shelf
1
1. The 83.07100B-60 HCSS includes the top air baffle, shelf chassis with backplane, fiber
trough, Passive Distribution Panel (PDP), and a Fan Tray as part of the shelf.
26.1 inches (662.9 mm)
Shelf Width
2

83.07100B-60 shelf 19.5 inches (495.3 mm)
Shelf Depth
3
3. Includes the ESI backplane caps/ductwork. Does not include the optional door.
83.07100B-60 shelf 14.0 inches (355.6 mm)
Table 2.14 82.71020H Measurements
Measurement Type Measurement
PDU Height
1
5.7 inches (144.8 mm)
PDU Width
1
17.0 inches (432.0 mm)
PDU Depth 9.0 inches (228.6 mm)
Page 7-16 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Equipment Shelf Layout Rules
2.32 Tellabs 7100 OTS includes the following equipment and rules for layout
within the relay rack. For installations using NEBS relay racks, refer to Floor
Layout, page 7-28. For installations using ETSI relay racks, refer to Floor Layout,
page 7-183. Local conditions and requirements dictate actual configuration
layouts.
Note 1: For detailed information on Tellabs 7100 OTS modules, refer to the
applicable module practice.
Note 2: For information regarding the Tellabs 7100 OTS or network
configurations, refer to Tellabs 7100/7100N General Description and
Tellabs 7100 System Engineering.
2.33 Up to two shelves can be mounted into a telco equipment relay rack. The
Tellabs 7100 OTS system can be configured with:
one or two 82.07100A/C-60 main shelves
up to twelve 82.07100B/D-60 port shelves
a mix of up to eight 82.07100B/D-60 port shelves and 83.07100B-60
High Capacity Switch Shelves (HCSSs)
Note 1: For specific shelf configurations and quantities, refer to Table 1.1,
page 7-1.
Note 2: Local conditions and requirements will dictate actual configuration
layouts.
NEBS 82.07100A/B-60
Shelves
2.34 The Tellabs 7100 OTS NEBS 82.07100A-60 main shelf and 82.07100B-60
port shelf require:
82.07100A/B-60 shelf:
- shelf horizontal distribution panel (HDP), which contains the
passive and the control/timing HDP modules
- the lower fan tray
- fiber trough
- three fan modules
one breaker frame alarm panel (BFAP) per rack
one optional per system alarm interface panel (AIP) above the main
controlling shelf
one upper fan assembly is required for each shelf, in addition to the
lower fan assembly that is contained in the 82.07100A/B-60 shelves
one fan filter and plenum is required for each lower fan per shelf
one air baffle is required below each lower fan assembly
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-17
ETSI 82.07100C/D-60
Shelves
2.35 The Tellabs 7100 OTS ETSI 82.07100C-60 main shelf and 82.07100D-60
port shelf require:
82.07100C/D-60 shelf:
- the shelf horizontal distribution panel (HDP), which contains the
passive and the control/timing HDP modules
- the lower fan tray
- fiber trough
- three fan modules
one breaker frame alarm panel (BFAP) per rack
one optional per system alarm interface panel (AIP) above the main
controlling shelf
one upper fan assembly is required for each shelf, in addition to the
lower fan assembly that is contained in the 82.07100C/D-60 shelves
one fan filter and plenum is required for each lower fan per shelf
one air baffle is required below each lower fan assembly
NEBS/ETSI 83.07100B-60
HCSS
2.36 The Tellabs 7100 OTS 83.07100B-60 HCSS requires:
83.07100B-60 HCSS:
- one upper air baffle
- Passive Distribution Panel (PDP)
- fan tray
- fiber trough
one HCSS PDU or equivalent power source per rack
one fan filter per HCSS
four fan modules per HCSS
82.07100A/C-60 Main Shelf
and 82.07100B/D-60 Port
Shelf Racks
2.37 Following is a list of the rules for configuring an 82.07100A/C-60 main shelf
and 82.07100B/D-60 port shelf rack:
One BFAP is mounted at the top of each 82.7100A/C-60 main and
82.7100B/D-60 port shelf rack.
An optional AIP is mounted below the BFAP in the rack with the main
controlling shelf, with one AIP per system.
The 82.07100A/C-60 main shelves and 82.07100B/D-60 port shelves
physically include the chassis for the HDP modules, as well as the
integrated fan assembly, which is located below the module slots and
the integrated fiber trough.
The auxiliary fan assembly for the top shelf is mounted below the AIP.
The 82.07100A/C-60 main shelves and 82.07100B/D-60 port shelves
are mounted below the auxiliary fan assembly.
The fan plenum is below each 82.7100A/B/C/D-60 shelf.
The air baffle is below the fan plenum.
Page 7-18 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
An 8-degree SBOADM (Configuration #32 and # 42) with 8
RCMM-8Ds, RCMM-8D88s, or up to 7 DX RCMMs (#32 only) requires
two main shelves (called MS-1 and MS-15), which may be located
within the same rack, or in separate racks. The controlling main shelf
(MS-1) is located at the top shelf position.
Due to cabling specifications, the distance between two or more racks
containing the main shelf (or shelves) and the port shelves or HCSSs
must not exceed 100 meters.
NEBS 83.07100B-60 HCSS
Racks
2.38 Following is a list of the rules for configuring an 83.07100B-60 HCSS rack:
One HCSS PDU or equivalent power source is mounted at the top of
each HCSS rack.
The 83.07100B-60 HCSS includes the Top Air Baffle, Shelf Chassis
with Backplane, Fiber Trough, Passive Distribution Panel (PDP), and
Fan Tray as part of the shelf. The Fan Modules (4) and HCSS Fan
Filter (1) must be ordered separately.
The 10-inch spacers and a wire shield are typically installed on each
side of a rack equipped with the 83.07100B-60 HCSS.
NEBS racks equipped with HCSSs require a base extender.
1RU of empty space above each HCSS is required for proper air flow.
ETSI 83.07100B-60 HCSS
Racks
2.39 Following is a list of the rules for configuring an 83.07100B-60 HCSS rack:
Note: ETSI type installations that use HCSS shelves can order a Tellabs ETSI
rack (Tellabs part number 14.9621.0).
One HCSS PDU or equivalent power source is mounted at the top of
each HCSS rack.
The 83.07100B-60 HCSS includes the Top Air Baffle, Shelf Chassis
Fan Tray as part of the shelf. The Fan Modules (4) and HCSS Fan
Filter (1) must be ordered separately.
The 10-inch spacers and a wire shield are typically installed on each
side of a rack equipped with the 83.07100B-60 HCSS.
1RU of empty space above each HCSS is required for proper air flow.
Be aware that HCSSs vent to the rear of the shelf.
A customer supplied ETSI cabinet can be used for HCSS installations.
A 600 mm x 600 mm minimum is recommended. Do not mount any
equipment behind the HCSS if a cabinet is used.
2.40 Refer to the following configuration examples:
Figure 2.5, page 7-19 shows a system as it is installed in a 7 foot,
NEBS equipment relay rack.
Figure 2.6, page 7-20 shows an 83.07100B-60 HCSS as it is installed
in a 7 foot (2133.6 mm), NEBS/ETSI equipment relay rack.
Figure 2.7, page 7-21 shows a system as it is installed in a 7 foot
(2133.6 mm), ETSI equipment relay rack.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-19
Figure 2.5 NEBSTellabs 7100 OTS Main and Port Shelves Configured as an SBOADM
breaker frame alarm panel (BFAP)
alarm interface panel (AIP) - optional
auxiliary fan assembly
integrated fan tray
integrated horizontal distribution panel (HDP)
fiber trough
Fiber Trough
port shelf 2 (PS-2)
main shelf (MS-1)
slot number/ID label
filter and plenum
Critical Maj or Minor
ACO
Lamp Test
Power Active Enable Enable
integrated fan tray
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LOAM RCMM LIAM TGTM TGTM TGTM TGTM TGTM OPSM SPM LIAM SPM RCMM TGTM TGTM TGTM LOAM
kick plate
intake air baffle
exhaust air baffle
filter and plenum
location for horizontal fiber trough
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LIAM
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
Page 7-20 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 2.6 NEBS/ETSI SBOADM with 83.07100B-60 HCSSs (Configurations #32, #33, and 46)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
HCSS top air baffle
HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
HCSS (PS-4)
Passive Distribution Panel (PDP)
fiber trough
slot number/ID plate
fan tray with fans
kick plate
keep out bar
open for air flow
(82.71020H)
HCSS top air baffle
HCSS (PS-3)
Passive Distribution Panel (PDP)
fiber trough
slot number/ID plate
fan tray with fans
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
open for air flow
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-21
Figure 2.7 ETSITellabs 7100 OTS Main and Port Shelf Configured as an SBOADM
integrated fan tray
fiber trough
fiber trough
port shelf 2 (PS-2)
main Shelf (MS-1)
filter and plenum
kick plate
keep out bar
filter and plenum
exhaust air baffle
integrated fan tray
intake air baffle
exhaust air baffle
Critical Major Minor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LOAM-E RCMM LIAM-E TGTM-E TGTM-E TGTM-E TGTM-E TGTM-E OPSM SPM LIAM-E SPM RCMM TGTM-E TGTM-E TGTM-E LOAM-E
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
alarm interface panel (AIP) - optional
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-22 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Torquing Force Tables
2.41 While performing procedures in this manual, refer to the following torquing
force tables:
Table 2.15, page 7-22 for recommended torquing force in Imperial
standards
Table 2.16, page 7-22 for the recommended torquing force in metric
standards
Table 2.15 Recommended Torquing Force In Imperial Listed by Thread Size With
Equivalent Metric Torque
Thread Size Torque in Inch-Pounds
1
1. Use only for steel screws into steel nuts or threaded holes in steel.
Torque in kg-cm
440 5 .5 5.7 1.1
632 9 1 10.3 1.1
1024 20.8 3 23.8 3.4
1032 29.7 3 33.9 3.4
1224 32 3 36.9 4.2
5/1618 129 5 147.5 5.7
3/816 212 10 242.3 11.4
1/213 485 10 554.4 11.4
5/811 1000 20 1143.0 22.9
Table 2.16 Recommended Torquing Force in Metric Listed by Thread Size
Steel Screw Brass Screw
Normal Diameter
and Pitch
Standard
Torque
1
1. Torque is measured in kilogram-centimeters (kg-cm).
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Standard
Torque
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
M 2 x 0.4 2.2 2.8 1.6 1.3 1.7 0.9
M 2.3 x 0.4 3.6 4.6 2.6 2.1 2.7 1.5
M 2.6 x 0.45 5.3 6.7 3.9 3.1 3.9 2.3
M 3 x 0.5 9.3 11.8 6.8 5.4 6.9 3.9
M 3.5 x 0.6 13.2 16.8 9.6 7.7 9.8 5.6
M 4 x 0.7 14.5 18.4 10.6 12.7 16.1 9.3
M 4.5 x .75 19.2 24.4 14.0 16.8 21.3 12.3
M 5 x 0.8 29.2 37.1 21.3 25.5 32.4 18.6
M 6 x 1.0 45.2 57.4 33.0 39.6 50.3 28.9
M 8 x 1.25 110.0 140.0 80.0 96.7 122.8 70.6
Installation 3. Unpacking and Installing NEBS Equipment Relay Racks
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-23
3. Unpacking and Installing NEBS Equipment Relay Racks
3.01 This section contains the procedures for unpacking and installing the
Tellabs 7100 OTS equipment.
3.02 82.07100A-60 main shelves and 82.07100B-60 port shelves may reside in
the same rack and are powered by a BFAP.
3.03 83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelves (HCSSs) reside in an HCSS
rack which is a NEBS rack with a 3-inch rear extension and transition pieces.
HCSSs are powered by an HCSS PDU or equivalent power source.
3.04 The following procedures are provided in this section:
Unpacking System Equipment, page 7-23
Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-28
Installing the Relay Rack Framework, page 7-46
Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in a NEBS
Environment, page 7-61
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (NEBS), page 7-80
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks, page 7-109
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Below Relay Racks, page 7-110
Installing the Wire Shield, page 7-124
Installing the Wire Shield Extension, page 7-130
Installing the Rear Cover Panel Assembly, page 7-139
Unpacking System Equipment
3.05 This section contains the procedures for unpacking the relay racks.
3.06 Tellabs delivers equipment using two separate shipping methods: crated
and uncrated shipment.
Crated shipment: When shipped overseas, or at the specific request
of the customer, the Tellabs 7100 OTS is shipped crated and the
plug-in modules are packaged and shipped separately.
Uncrated shipment: When shipped domestically, all of the internal
electrical and alarm wiring is already completed. Depending upon
customer specifications, modules may be shipped in separate crates.
Note: If the Tellabs 7100 OTS is shipped domestically, then it is not shipped
crated unless otherwise specified.
3. Unpacking and Installing NEBS Equipment Relay Racks Installation
Page 7-24 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
3.07 Tellabs takes the precaution of ensuring that its equipment relay racks are
packaged in shipping crates with internal cushioning and shipped using reliable
transporters with efficient handling and tracking procedures.
3.08 If equipment is damaged during the delivery process, immediately report
discrepancies to your regional Tellabs office.
Requirements 3.09 To successfully perform this procedure, ensure that the following
requirements are met:
__ Do not begin a new procedure until you have completed all previous
procedures. Place a check mark on the line beside the step number of
the procedure as each step is completed.
__ Ensure that a clean, dry, and dust-free area is available before
unpacking the equipment. If required, use a sheet of masonite for floor
protection.
__ Ensure that the installation activities performed as a result of the
procedures outlined in this section conform to the mandates specified
in Telcordia specification GR-1275 and Tellabs 03.0317.
Tools 3.10 The following tools are required to perform this procedure:
__ gloves
__ safety goggles
__ metal shears and hammer (if steel metal banding is used to bind the
equipment packing material)
__ two equipment moving dollies (crated shipment)
__ appliance dolly (uncrated shipment)
__ hex head socket wrench set (7/16, 9/16 and 15/16 inch) or impact tool
Protective Materials 3.11 A masonite sheet is recommended to provide floor protection when
performing this procedure.
3.12 The following material is recommended for use during this procedure:
__ 4 foot x 8 foot x 1/8 inch sheet of Masonite (1220 m x 2440 mm x
3.175 mm)
This masonite sheet is intended to protect the floor from scrapes and
damage that may occur during the unpacking process. The Tellabs
7100 OTS relay rack assembly must be mounted on a concrete floor
or other non-combustible surface in accordance with Articles 110-18,
110-26, and 110-27 of the NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70.
Go to Unpacking the Equipment, page 7-25.
Warning:
Equipment shelves can be twisted and wire harnesses can be torn from
connectors by improper handling. Use care whenever handling or moving
equipment racks and whenever hoisting equipment using ropes, belts or cables.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-25
Unpacking the Equipment
3.13 The following requirements and procedures should be followed for both
crated and uncrated shipment.
__ 1. Verify that the equipment contents match the accompanying packing
list or shipping manifest. Immediately report any discrepancies
between the two documents to your regional Tellabs office.
Note: If Tellabs is performing the installation, the Tellabs representative who
performs the checklist informs Tellabs Customer Service of any
discrepancies found between the actual equipment contents and the
accompanying packing list or shipping manifest.
__ 2. Inspect the equipment (or shipping container) for evidence of any
transport damage that may have occurred.
Immediately report any evidence of damage to both Tellabs and to the
shipping carrier to initiate damage claims.
Note 1: Retain the packing material and cartons until all unpacking, installation
procedures, and acceptance testing are completed.
Note 2: Repack damaged equipment for return shipment in the original shipping
container with the original shipping and packing materials.
.
DANGER:
Relay rack equipment is heavy and difficult to handle. To avoid personal injury
or equipment damage, at least four installers are required to remove the relay
rack assembly from the shipping crate.
Warning:
The equipment is very sensitive and can be damaged if dropped or handled
improperly. When handling and moving uncrated equipment, avoid any
structural stress, excessive shock, or vibration, all of which may damage the
equipment.
Warning:
Twisting the crates or relay racks can warp equipment relay racks and damage
equipment shelves. Use care when handling, moving, and unpacking
equipment. Avoid excessive shock, strain, or vibration.
Page 7-26 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Remove the relay rack assembly (or shipping container) from the
delivery vehicle, and proceed according to one of the following
sub-procedures:
__ 3.1 For crated shipment, position the shipping container,
front side up between the two equipment moving dollies
so that the weight of the container is evenly distributed
between the two dollies.
or
__ 3.2 For uncrated shipment, securely position the relay rack
assembly in an upright position, front side forward, on
the appliance moving dolly so that the weight of the
relay rack assembly is evenly distributed on the
appliance dolly.
Note: When attaching a restraining belt, brace or strap, make sure that the
restraints do not squeeze or damage the equipment body.
__ 4. If restraining belts are required, then attach them at this time. Ensure
that the relay rack assembly is secured on the appliance dolly
according to all applicable safety guidelines.
Note: Whenever possible, leave the anti-static plastic wrap over the relay rack
until it has been moved to the final installation staging area.
__ 5. Move the relay rack assembly (or shipping container) close to its final
installation location for unpacking.
For uncrated shipments, skip the remaining portion of this procedure,
which applies exclusively to crated shipments and go to Preparing the
Floor for Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-28.
For crated shipments, go to Unpacking Crated Shipments, page 7-27
to safely unpack the Tellabs 7100 equipment relay rack.
Warning:
Electronic equipment can be damaged by moisture, dust, and electrostatic
discharge (ESD). Ensure that the unpacking and inspection area is dry and free
from dust and static.
DANGER:
To prevent physical injury, ensure that the relay rack assembly is secured by a
reliable restraining method, which respects all applicable safety guidelines,
whenever it is left unattended prior to the completion of the installation
procedure. If the relay rack assembly is not secured in this manner, physical
injury could result.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-27
Unpacking Crated Shipments
3.14 Use the following procedure to unpack the Tellabs 7100 OTS equipment
from the shipping crates.
__ 1. Place the shipping container, back side down, on a level floor that has
been protected, if required, by a Masonite sheet.
__ 2. If steel metal banding is used to bind the shipping container, then
carefully cut the metal banding straps using metal shears. Firmly
secure the top of the banding when cutting to prevent recoil and injury.
__ 3. Remove the bolts from the top and side panels of the crate.
Note: Because of the size and weight of the equipment, Tellabs recommends
using four installers to lift the equipment out of its shipping container.
__ 4. Immediately verify that all of the equipment listed on the shipping
manifest is present on the relay rack and that the additional shipping
containers include all of the modules and equipment specified on the
packing list or shipping manifest.
__ 5. Before proceeding to extract the rack from the crate, clear the area of
all shipping and packing materials. Save this material until the
installation and acceptance testing phases are complete, and the
equipment has proven to be in satisfactory operating condition.
__ 6. Using four installers, carefully lift the rack out of its shipping crate and
place it in an upright position on the protective masonite sheet.
Go to Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-28
.
DANGER:
Metal banding can recoil when it is cut or removed from the crate as the tension
on the banding is released. Place pressure on the top of the banding when
cutting to prevent recoil. Use safety goggles and gloves to avoid physical injury.
Warning:
Never place the relay rack on the floor in a horizontal position. This places weight
and pressure on the front mounting screws of the relay rack and can lead to
equipment damage.
Page 7-28 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting
3.15 Use the procedures in this section to plan the floor layout and prepare the
floor for relay rack equipment mounting.
Floor Load, page 7-28
Floor Layout, page 7-28
Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for Site Installations, page 7-32
Preparing for the Relay Rack Installation, page 7-42
Floor Load
3.16 A system with one fully configured relay rack with one completely
populated main shelf and one completely populated port shelf, has a maximum
floor load of 530 pounds (240.4 kilograms).
Floor Layout
3.17 A functional description of the equipment relay rack parts and their
corresponding part numbers is provided in Table 3.1, page 7-32. Local conditions
and requirements dictate actual configuration layouts. The equipment relay rack
framework consists of the following parts:
__ North American or International relay rack
__ (optional) relay rack pad isolation
__ (optional) wire shield
3.18 For alternative layouts, contact Tellabs Customer Service at
1.800.443.5555 or follow company procedures for obtaining technical assistance.
Note: Where a wire shield is used next to third-party equipment, you may need
to leave 1/4 inch of space between the wire shield and the third-party
equipment. This is to accommodate the head of the bolt located at the
base of the rack, which extends 1/4 inches past the wire shield. An
alternative option is not installing the bolt at the base of the rack.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-29
3.19 The Tellabs 7100 OTS allows for flexible layouts that meet most telco
central office (CO) specifications:
For a standard layout using 6-inch relay rack spacers with
82.07100A/B-60 main or port shelves, refer to Figure 3.1, page 7-29
For a standard floor layout using 6-inch relay rack spacers with
For a standard floor layout using 6-inch relay rack spacers with
For an alternate floor layout using 10-inch relay rack spacers with
For a standard 83.07100B-60 HCSS floor layout using 10-inch relay
rack spacers, refer to Figure 3.5, page 7-31
Figure 3.1 NEBS Floor Layout Suggestion for OLA or NE Without Future Conversion - Top View
equipment lineup
38 inches: includes
24 inch minimum
clearance required
in rear
Tellabs 7100
26-inch relay rack
Tellabs 7100
relay racks with right and left rack
spacers w/Fiber Management Spools
third party
equipment relay rack
equipment lineup
30 inch minimum
clearance required
in front
wire
shield
6-inch
rack
spacer
6-inch
rack
spacer
end of
aisle
panel
Page 7-30 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.2 Standard NEBS Floor Layout with 6-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRS) - Top View
Figure 3.3 NEBS Floor Layout with 6-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRS) - Top View
equipment lineup
38 inches: includes
24 inch minimum
clearance required
in rear
Tellabs 7100
Tellabs 7100
spacers with one wire shield
equipment lineup
30 inch minimum
clearance required
in front
26-inch relay rack
6-inch
rack
spacer
6-inch
rack
spacer
6-inch
rack
spacer
wire
shield
(optional)
continue with wire
shield or stop with
end of aisle panel
e
n
d

o
f

a
i
s
l
e
6-inch
rack
spacer
Tellabs 7100
26-inch relay rack
Tellabs 7100
26-inch relay rack
equipment lineup
24 inch minimum
clearance required
in rear
Tellabs 7100
equipment lineup
30 inch minimum
clearance required
in front
26-inch relay rack
6-inch
rack
spacer
6-inch
rack
spacer
6-inch
rack
spacer
flush wire
shield
(optional)
continue with wire
shield or stop with
end of aisle panel
e
n
d

o
f

a
i
s
l
e
6-inch
rack
spacer
6-inch
rack
spacer
flush wire
shield
(optional)
70 inches: includes two Tellabs 7100 relay racks with a 6-inch
rack spacer, two wire shields, two 6-inch rack spacers
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-31
Figure 3.4 Standard NEBS Floor Layout with 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRS) - Top View
Figure 3.5 HCSS NEBS Floor Layout with 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRS) - Top View
equipment lineup
46 inches: includes
24 inch minimum
clearance required
in rear
Tellabs 7100 Main
Tellabs 7100
spacers with one wire shield
equipment lineup
30 inch minimum
clearance required
in front
26-inch relay rack
10-inch
rack
spacer
10-inch
rack
spacer
10-inch
rack
spacer
flush
wire
shield
continue with wire
shield or stop with
end of aisle panel
e
n
d

o
f

a
i
s
l
e
10-inch
rack
spacer
Tellabs 7100 Secondary
Main 26-inch relay rack
46.30 inches: includes
Tellabs 7100 Main
Tellabs 7100
spacers and two wire shields
30 inch minimum
clearance required
in front
26-inch relay rack
10-inch
rack
spacer
10-inch
rack
spacer
10-inch
rack
spacer
e
n
d

o
f

a
i
s
l
e
10-inch
rack
spacer
Tellabs 7100 HCSS
26-inch relay rack
equipment lineup
equipment lineup
flush
wire shield
3-inch base
extender
flush
wire shield
12-inch to 15-inch transition pieces
21 inch minimum
clearance required
in rear
Page 7-32 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for Site Installations
3.20 All Tellabs 7100 relay racks are shipped complete with shelves and
cabling. Refer to Equipment Overview, page 7-5. Additional accessory items for
installing these systems in telco offices are provided in Table 3.1, page 7-32.
Table 3.1 Accessory Equipment for the Relay Rack Installations
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Number Functions and Requirements
6-inch Relay Rack Spacer (RRS)
with fiber management, spool
covers, and L-bracket
149.0245 Used as a spacer between NEs to guide optical
fiber within and to/from the NE. Houses the RCMM
patch panel, OPSM patch panel, High-Density port
shelf patch panel, Port Shelf patch panel, and
DCM chassis.
The kit contains the following items:
fiber lacing bracket
1-inch pipe bracket
2 RU 19-inch blank filler panel
1 RU 19-inch blank filler panel
fiber pass-through
removable polycarbonate cover
removable fiber spools
cover plate for rack base
4-inch rack base
149.0244
L-bracket for 6-inch RRS, used to support
end-of-aisle panel and wire shield kits.
Order 3 brackets separately for each
End-of-Aisle Panel (Tellabs part number
14.9097-X) or Wire Shield Kit (Tellabs part
number 149.0342 or 149.0408).
40.0253 Hex head rack screws with star washers,
5/16-inches. Order 4 screws for each L-bracket, for
a total of 12 per RRS. For mounting the L-brackets
at top, bottom, and mid-height on end shield kit.
Fiber Management Pad Isolation
(optional) for relay rack spacer
included with 6-inch
relay rack spacer
Used to provide isolated grounding for the spacer
with fiber management.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-33
Relay Rack 6-inch Spacer
Extension (optional)
149.025x
Where:
x = Length of
extension:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 20 inch
3 = 24inch
4 = 30 inch
5 = 36 inch
6 = 54 inch
7 = 56 inch
Extends the fiber management guides from the top
of the relay rack to the overhead cable rack.
Spacer extension in lengths from 6 inches to 56
inches.
The kit contains:
From 1 to 4 mounting brackets, depending on
the length of the spacer extension
A set of mounting hardware (bolts, hex nuts,
washers)
AC Outlet Kit for relay rack 149.0261 If required, install in relay rack base, in front or
rear.
Table 3.1 Accessory Equipment for the Relay Rack Installations (Continued)
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-34 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
2-Rack Cover Panel Kit
(also known as the Two Rack
Rear Cover Panel Kit)
180.0517 Used to strengthen the span between network
elements for 6-inch RRS that includes a wire shield
or an end-of-aisle panel. This kit contains:
rack spacer top box
fourrack fiber storage spools
rack top fiber guide
threerack radius control (diverter)
front rack spacer top box
bracket, rack spacer duct mounting
bracket, rack spacer extension mounting
bracket, end shield adaptertop
bracket, end shield adaptermiddle
bracket, end shield adapterbottom
rear rack end aisle top box plate
threebracket, rack end aisle cover panel
bracket (Tellabs part number 110.0588 without
PEMS)
one set of mounting hardware (bolts, hex nuts,
washers)
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-35
End-of-Aisle Kit for 6-inch rack
spacer (also known as End Shield
Kit)
14.9097-XX-X
Where:
XX-X = Height in
inches-Color code:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 20 inch
3 = 24 inch
4 = 30 inch
5 = 36 inch
6 = 54 inch
7 = 56 inch
no numeral = Gray
1 = Brown
2 = White
3 = TZ Blue
4 = NT Blue
Used at the end of a Tellabs 7100 OTS relay rack
lineup (between a Tellabs 7100 OTS NE and
another product) or at the end of a relay rack
equipment lineup allowing end of aisle LEDs and
switches to be installed in the cutouts provided.
Order three L-brackets (Tellabs part number
149.0244) separately for each End-of-Aisle Panel
Kit.
End Shield Pad Isolation included with end
shield
Used to provide isolated grounding for the end
shield.
10-inch Relay Rack Spacer (RRS)
with fiber management, spool
covers, and L-bracket
249-0012 For use between and on both sides of the Main
shelf, Secondary Main shelf, and HCSSs. NEBS
racks (optional).
Houses the RCMM patch panel, OPSM patch
panel, High-Density port shelf patch panel, Port
Shelf patch panel, and DCM chassis.
The kit contains the following items:
2-inch x 4-inch fiber duct (right and left)
fiber duct covers (right and left)
fiber lacing bracket
1-inch pipe bracket
2 RU 19 inch blank filler panel
1 RU 19 inch blank filler panel
fiber pass-through
removable polycarbonate cover
removable fiber spools
cover plate for rack base
4-inch rack base (ETSI-compatible)
10-inch RRS L-bracket 14.9893 Used to support end shield kit for NEBS
assemblies. Three brackets are required for each
end shield kit.
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-36 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
10-inch Fiber Management
Extension (optional)
14.9058X-0
Where:
x = Height of
extension:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 20 inch
3 = 24 inch
4 = 30 inch
5 = 36 inch
6 = 54 inch
7 = 56 inch
For NEBS racks for extending from 6 to 56 inches.
10-inch Rear Spacer Cover Kit 180.0757 10-inch Rear Spacer Cover Kit
*Not used with 83.07100B-60 HCSSs.
Wire Shield 149.0342 Spacer wire shield, 11.5 inches by 7 feet. Mounting
hardware is included.
Used to separate Tellabs 7100 equipment from
adjacent third-party equipment or to support two
rack spacers side-by-side between two Tellabs
7100 equipment racks.
149.0244) separately for each Wire Shield Kit.
Wire Shield 149.0408 Spacer Wire Shield, 7" by 7 feet (0.125 inches
wide).
The front edge of this panel is flush with the face of
the 7100 equipment frame and rack spacer. This
panel projects to the full depth of the rack for rear
cover assembly support and protection from adja-
cent equipment racks.
149.0244) separately for each Wire Shield Kit.
Wire Shield Extension Kit 149.035x
Where:
x = Length of
extension:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 20 inch
3 = 24 inch
4 = 30 inch
5 = 36 inch
6 = 54 inch
7 = 56 inch
Spacer wire shield extension. Extends the spacer
panel from the top of the relay rack to the overhead
cable rack.
Spacer Extension in lengths from 6 inches to 56
inches.
This kit comes with splice plate and mounting
hardware required to mount this panel above the
Tellabs 149.0342 Wire Shield Panel.
The kit contains:
Splice plate (3 inch x 4 inch)
washers)
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-37
Wire Shield Extension Kit 149.042x
Where:
x = Length of
extension:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 20 inch
3 = 24 inch
4 = 30 inch
5 = 36 inch
6 = 54 inch
7 = 56 inch
Extension Panel for use with Wire Shield Panel
Panel measures 7" deep by 0.125 inches wide l
This kit comes with splice plate and mounting hard-
ware required to mount this panel above the Tel-
labs 149.0408 Wire Shield Panel. This wire shield
extension does not project past the front edge of
the 7100 equipment rack or rack spacer assembly.
The kit contains:
Splice plate (3 inch x 4 inch)
washers)
Verify kit contents above.
Relay Rack Edging Material 14.9087 Use on the edges of the wire shield to protect fiber
cables from sharp edges. Apply to both front and
rear edges of the wire shield.
NEBS Relay Rack Pad Isolation 14.90427 Customers may require isolated grounding
techniques for the Tellabs 7100 OTS. The isolation
kit for the relay rack includes:
one25.88 inch (657 mm) by 11.40 inch (290
mm) relay rack isolation pad (.063 inch (1.6
mm) thick GP03 grade fiberglass)
fourisolating washers (.063 inch (1.6 mm)
thick GP03 grade fiberglass)
four5/8 inch (15.5 or 16.0 mm) flat washers
(steel)
four11/16 inch (17.46 mm) by 1 inch (25.4
mm) shoulder washers (nylon)
Relay Rack Extender (optional) 14.9049x-0
(NEBS sites)
Where:
x = Length of
extension:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 18 inch
3 = 20 inch
4 = 24 inch
5 = 30 inch
6 = 36 inch
7 = 42 inch
8 = 54 inch
9 = 56 inch
Extends the relay rack to the overhead cable rack.
Spacer Extension in lengths from 6 inches to 56
inches.
The kit contains a set of Mounting Hardware (bolts,
hex nuts, washers).
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-38 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
OPSM patch panel 81.7100PP-O-xM
Where:
xM = Cable length in
meters:
(1 m, 3 m, 5 m,
10 m, 15 m, or
20 m).
Required for using the Optical Protection and
Synchronization Module (OPSM). With 2
interconnect cables. Can be used to support
multiple OPSMs. Requires an OPSM/ECMM patch
panel shelf.
RCMM Fiber patch panel 81.7100PP-R-xM
Where:
xM = Cable length in
meters
(1 m, 3 m, 5 m,
10 m, 15 m, or
20 m).
RCMM fiber patch panel with 8 RCMM
interconnect (Express) cables.
2RU High Density Port Patch
Panel (HD PPP)
180.0611 This panel consists of 104 duplex LC/UPC
adapters that are segregated into Facility Port and
81.71329-1 OPSM Protection Groups.
Cabling from this patch panel to LGX requires
LC/UPC connectors at the patch panel and
typically SC/UPC connectors at the LGX, but may
vary depending on the customer site. The 2RU HD
PPP is typically used in 44-channel systems.
3RU High Density Port Patch
Panel (88CHPP)
81.71S-88CHPP This panel consists of 104 duplex LC/UPC
adapters that are segregated into Facility Port and
81.71329-1 OPSM Protection Groups.
Cabling from this patch panel to LGX requires
LC/UPC connectors at the patch panel and
typically SC/UPC connectors at the LGX, but may
vary depending on the customer site. The 88CHPP
is typically used in 88-channel systems.
Port Shelf patch panel 180.0132 Optional patch panel assembly with Duplex
SC/UPC connectors. Typically installed in a rack
spacer.
OPSM patch panel shelf 81.071PP-SHLF Holds up to four OPSM patch panels.
Patch Panel Blank Plate 81.7100PP-BLK Covers unused patch panel locations in the patch
panel shelf.
Patch Panel Top Cover 180.0430 Patch panel top cover, clear plastic. For use with
the RCMM patch panel, OPSM patch panel and
port shelf patch panel. Kit contains vinyl pockets
for printed panel guide to mark locations.
OMD44-1 Patch Panel 81.714144 Used with RCMM-8D88 for routing up to 44
channels to transponders.
Cables ordered separately (Tellabs part numbers
255-0070-Cxxxx or 155.06xx).
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-39
OMD44-45 Patch Panel 81.714188 Used with RCMM-8D88 when routing more than 44
255-0070-Cxxxx or 155.06xx).
OMD44-1 Patch Panel 82.714144 Used with OADM88-xR when routing up to 44
channels to transponders. Cables ordered
separately (Tellabs part numbers 255-0070-Cxxxx
or 155.06xx).
OMD44-45 Patch Panel 82.714188 Used with OADM88-xR when routing more than 44
255-0070-Cxxxx or 155.06xx).
OMD88 Patch Panel 81.71S-OMD88 Used with DX RCMM and LOAM-E88s for
reconfigurable, directionless add/drop terminals.
RDXM Directionless Kit C7100RDXM_KIT The RDXM Directionless Kit is used for
The kit includes the following piece parts:
81.71S-OMD88, Optical Mux/Demux 88
Channel Patch Panel (OMD88)
81.71T-DXRCMM Directionless
Reconfigurable Channel Multiplexer Module -
88 Channel (DX RCMM)
81.71123C, Line Output Amplifier Module -
Enhanced 88 Channel (LOAM-E88)
Y-Cable patch panel single mode 81.7100PP-Y-SM This is a passive device in a form of a patch panel.
It provides four independent Y-Cable assemblies
internal to the patch panel. It is a half height slot
patch panel. This version provides single mode
optical interfaces.
Y-Cable patch panel multi-mode 81.7100PP-Y-MM This is a passive device that provides four
independent Y-Cable assemblies internal to the
patch panel. It is a half height slot patch panel. This
version provides multi-mode optical interfaces.
Patch Panel Shelf 81.071PPSHLF Used to mount patch panel in spacer.
Y-Cable 5-meter single mode fiber
cable
81.71YCBL-SM-5M Provides a single optical splitter used instead of
the Y-Cable patch panel where one end connects
to the transponder s and the other to the facility
LGX panel/termination point. This version provides
single mode optical interfaces.
Y-Cable 5-meter multi-mode fiber
cable
81.71YCBL-MM-5M Provides a single optical splitter used instead of
the Y-Cable patch panel where one end connects
to the transponder s and the other to the facility
LGX panel/termination point. This version provides
multi-mode optical interfaces.
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-40 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Y-Cable patch panel wall mount
bracket
81.71YCBL-WMB Used to mount the Y-Cable patch panel.
Y-Cable patch panel rack mount
bracket 23-inch
81.71YCBL-RMB-23 Used to mount the Y-Cable patch panel in a
23-inch rack.
Y-Cable patch panel rack mount
bracket 19-inch
81.71YCBL-RMB-19 Used to mount the Y-Cable patch panel in a
19-inch rack.
Fiber Connection Tool 160.0492 Optional tool for use with RCMM or OMD44-x fiber
patch panels.
1 RU Fiber Trough 179.1398 For use with the patch panels.
1 RU Blank Filler Panel 149.0322 For use with the patch panels.
2-Inch x 4-Inch Gray Vertical Fiber
Duct
245-0044
2-inch x 4-inch Vertical Fiber Duct, 6 feet
2-Inch Gray Vertical Fiber Duct
Cover
245-0045
2-inch, Hinged Duct Cover, 6 feet
(used with 245-0044)
4-Inch x 4-Inch Gray Vertical Fiber
Duct
245-0046
4-inch x 4-inch Vertical Fiber Duct, 6 feet
Horizontal Gray Fiber Duct, 6-foot
long by 4-inches wide
245-0047 For use when fibers are routed below relay racks.
The Horizontal Fiber Ducts are cut to size onsite.
When implemented Horizontal Fiber Ducts the
following items are also used:
one per rackBottom of Rack Bracket Kit
(Tellabs part number 245-0040), containing two
L-brackets and two U-brackets
one per rackDuct Covers (Tellabs part number
245-0048)
two per rackEnd Caps (Tellabs part number
245-0049)
Duct Coupler (Tellabs part number 245-0050),
used to connect two fiber ducts
3.0-inch Bend Radius Control Clips (Tellabs
part number 245-0051), used were fibers route
into duct
4-Inch Gray Vertical Fiber Duct
Cover
245-0048
4-inch, Hinged Duct Cover, 6 feet
(used with 245-0046)
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-41
HCSS 3-Inch Base Extension kit 249-0051 HCSS racks require a 3-inch base extension which
is included in the HCSS rack kit (Tellabs part
number 82.71RACK-KIT-A).
The 3-inch Base Extension kit can be ordered
separately to use with existing Tellabs racks to
maintain rear alignment of Tellabs equipment.
HCSS 12-Inch to 15-Inch
Transition piece
249-0053 This kit is used with HCSS racks to transition from
the rear rack base extender to the end of the
10-inch spacers. Each HCSS rack requires two
transition pieces. Two kits are included in the
HCSS rack kits.
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-42 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Preparing for the Relay Rack Installation
3.21 To successfully perform this procedure, ensure that the following
requirements have been met:
__ For each relay rack, mark and drill the mounting holes first, before
installing the relay rack. Next, install the relay rack itself.
__ If installing 14.9092 earthquake bolts, the anchors require a concrete
floor that is at least 6 inches thick (152.4 mm).
__ electric drill with masonry bit, 5/8 inch or 3/8 inch, depending upon the
type of anchor bolt that is used
__ chalk line
__ HEPA vacuum cleaner
__ anchor setting tool
__ safety goggles
__ felt pen
__ measuring tape
Materials 3.23 Table 3.2, page 7-42 shows the anchor bolt kits available for the Tellabs
7100 OTS rack mounting procedure.
Table 3.2 Anchor Bolt Kits
Kit Type Part Number
Floor
Type
Quantity per
Relay Rack
Supplied
by
Earthquake anchor bolts
Rated for all seismic zones
142.0081 Concrete 2 bolt kits Tellabs
Zone-4 Earthquake bracing bolts 14.9092 Concrete 1 bolt kit Tellabs
Warning:
To be UL compliant, the Tellabs 7100 OTS must be mounted in a restricted area
such as a dedicated equipment room or equipment closet. Additionally, it must
be mounted on a concrete or other non-combustible floor in accordance with
articles 110-18, 110-26, and 110-27 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA
70.
DANGER:
The correct anchor bolt assemblies, as specified in Table 3.2, page 7-42, must
be ordered and on site before installation can commence. Before proceeding,
always ensure the anchor bolt assemblies are appropriate for use with the type
of floor material at the site. Installing incorrect anchor bolt assemblies causes
relay rack instability and can cause potential equipment damage or bodily harm.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-43
3.24 Follow these steps to prepare the floor for the relay rack mounting
procedure:
__ 1. Observe the requirements presented in Unpacking System
Equipment, page 7-23.
__ 2. Plan the Tellabs 7100 relay rack and relay rack spacer footprint and
anchor layout.
For NEBS relay rack floor layouts, refer to Figure 3.9, page 7-48 and
__ 3. Mount the equipment relay rack toward the front or rear of the
overhead cable rack. This allows vertical access to the cable run
between the equipment relay rack and the overhead cable rack.
__ 4. Verify that the dimension of the available floor space and the location
of the reference points correspond to the floor plan.
__ 5. Mark the front base line and aisle boundaries with a chalk line. Use the
floor reference points in a new area, or use the front of the existing
lineup where the relay racks extend or fill an existing line.
__ 6. Mark the location where the relay rack is going to be installed.
Note 1: If the relay rack completes an existing lineup of Tellabs 7100 OTS NEs,
allow sufficient space for the end shield. For end shield installation
procedures, refer to Installing the End Shield, page 7-118.
Note 2: Except on end relay rack installation scenarios or where the relay racks
are supported in the middle of the relay rack lineup, and only if permitted
by your standard office procedures, two anchor points in diagonal
corners may be used instead of four. For more information, consult your
Tellabs Customer Service Representative.
Warning:
If installing earthquake bolts (Tellabs part number 14.9092), the anchors require
at least a 6 inch (152.4 mm) thick concrete floor. Before proceeding, ensure that
the floor is at least 6 inches in depth. Validate this fact with the customer before
starting this installation procedure. Attempting to install the 14.9092 earthquake
bolts in a floor less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) thick results in improper installation
of the anchor bolts, causing relay rack instability.
Page 7-44 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Mark the four anchor points of the relay rack in the center of the 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) radius, 45-degree angled ovals, ensuring that the
location of each relay rack to be installed is properly marked.
__ 7.1 If spacers are being installed (NEBS requirement), mark
the location where the relay rack spacer (RRS) with
fiber management spools is going to be installed. Mark
two anchor points in the center of the front and back
anchor plates between the adjacent relay racks.
Select one of the following template illustrations to mark the location
of each rack and spacer:
For NEBS floor layout using 6-inch spacers, refer to Figure 3.6,
page 7-44
For NEBS floor layout using 10-inch spacers, refer to Figure 3.7,
page 7-45
For NEBS HCSS floor layout using 10-inch spacers, refer to Figure
3.8, page 7-45
Figure 3.6 NEBS Floor Layout Template Including 6-Inch Rack Spacer with Fiber Management Spools
mark anchor point here
17.56 in.
26 inch relay rack
2.95 in.
5 in.
2.5 in.
Front
6.90 in.
relay rack spacer
3 inch
6 inch
relay rack spacer
3 inch
6 inch
7 inch
3 inch
17.5 inch
3 inch
26-inch relay rack
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-45
Figure 3.7 NEBS Floor Layout Template Including 10-Inch Rack Spacer with Fiber Management Spools
Figure 3.8 NEBS HCSS Rack Floor Layout Template Including 10-Inch Rack Spacer with Fiber Management
Spools
17.56 in.
26 inch relay rack
2.95 in.
5 in.
2.5 in.
Front
6.90 in.
relay rack spacer
5 inch
10 inch
relay rack spacer
5 inch
10 inch
7 inch
3 inch
17.5 inch
3 inch
26-inch relay rack
17.56 in.
26 inch relay rack
2.95 in.
5 in.
2.5 in.
Front
6.90 in.
relay rack spacer
5 inch
10 inch
relay rack spacer
5 inch
10 inch
7 inch
3 inch
17.5 inch
3 inch 26-inch relay rack
1
5

i
n
c
h
e
s
3 inch
3-inch base extender required for HCSS - extender is attached after rack is installed
Page 7-46 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 8. Drill the mounting holes in the floor and install the relay rack isolation
kit and anchors according to the manufacturers recommended
procedures.
Go to Installing the Relay Rack Framework, page 7-46.
Installing the Relay Rack Framework
3.25 This section provides the installation procedure for the Tellabs 7100 relay
rack framework.
Note: In this procedure, do not apply torque when tightening the bolts. Secure
the relay rack framework loosely so that all of the pieces can be leveled as
a whole unit; you are directed to tighten and apply torque to the bolts in a
later procedure.
Requirements 3.26 When performing this procedure, perform each step in the order in which
the procedure is written and continue to the next step only when the previous step
is successfully completed. Place a check mark on the line beside the step number
of the procedure as each step is completed.
3.27 If the equipment configuration contains three shelves, the bottom fan
assembly must be removed before starting this procedure. This allows access to
the bottom of the relay rack for installing the anchor bolt kits. Refer to Tellabs
7100/7100N Maintenance Using TL1, for fan assembly removal procedures.
__ non-magnetic level, 24 inch (or metric equivalent)
__ steel square, 16 inch x 24 inch (or metric equivalent)
__ hammer
__ two magnetic mount levels (plumb bob is optional)
__ socket wrench set
__ heavy-duty straps or rope
Warning:
Check the alignment frequently when installing relay racks. If the alignment is not
correct, it may cause difficulties in installing an adjacent relay rack.
Warning:
With an earthquake bracing anchor kit, do not break off the top bolt until the end
of the installation procedure. If the bolt is broken before the relay rack is aligned
or the relay rack needs to be moved or adjusted, a new anchor bolt must be
ordered to replace the broken bolt.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-47
__ 5/16-inch nut driver
__ screwdrivers with torque capability and a 5 inch minimum shaft: #1 and
#2 Phillips-head, and #1 and #2 flat-head
__ (2) 10-inch adjustable wrenches
Materials 3.29 The following materials are provided to perform this procedure:
__ shims of various sizes
__ anchor bolt kits (refer to Table 3.2, page 7-42)
__ 10-32 x 1/2 inch bolts (5 per relay rack)
3.30 In addition to the materials noted above, the following materials must be
supplied to perform this procedure:
__ rope/straps
__ tripod dolly
__ 5/16-inch extension nut driver
__ 3/8-inch nut driver with 3/4 inch extension
Action 3.31 Follow these steps to install the relay rack framework:
Note 1: When installing multiple relay racks together in a lineup, set them
together, side-by-side, to determine which (if any) seats the highest on
the floor. Then, adjust the other relay racks to the highest point on the
tallest of the relay racks.
Note 2: If the relay rack configuration contains three shelves, ensure the bottom
fan assembly is removed before proceeding. Refer to Tellabs
7100/7100N Maintenance Using TL1.
__ 2. Carefully slide the relay rack assembly into position in the equipment
lineup. For the exact location refer to the site specification.
__ 3. Temporarily support the relay rack. Use supporting straps or rope tied
around the top channel of the relay rack frame or any convenient
overhead structure, such as auxiliary framing or cable racks.
__ 4. Install the anchor bolts together with the ancillary hardware provided
in the anchor kit.
If using a earthquake anchor kit, part number 142.0081, refer to
If using a Zone-4 earthquake anchor kit, part number 14.9092,
refer to Figure 3.10, page 7-49.
__ 5. Firmly tighten the anchor bolts to hold the relay rack in position, but do
not torque down fully.
Page 7-48 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.9 Earthquake Anchor Kit Installation
142.0081 earthquake anchor kit
relay rack
base plate
square
washers
A
A
A-A view
cut
away
view of
washer,
relay rack
base, and
floor
concrete floor
minimum
4 inches
(101.6 mm) thick
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-49
Figure 3.10 Zone-4 Earthquake Anchor Kit Installation
concrete
floor
minimum
6 inches
(1.52 mm)
relay rack
base plate
square
washers
A
A
A-A view
not
used
not
used
cut
away
view of
washers,
relay rack
base, and
floor
thick
Page 7-50 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 6. Check that the relay rack is level using a spirit level. If the relay rack is
not level, readjust the leveling screws located at the bottom of the relay
rack. Refer to Figure 3.11, page 7-50.
Figure 3.11 Location of Relay Rack Leveling Feet
__ 7. Place shims under the relay rack as close to the four corners without
protruding from the bottom of the relay rack. This provides enhanced
stability to the relay rack.
__ 8. Back off and lock the leveling screws on the bottom of the relay rack.
DANGER:
Avoid excessive shimming, which results in relay rack instability and can cause
potential equipment damage or bodily harm.
leveling feet
(top view)
locknut
leveling foot
adjusting nut
square end can
be used to adjust
leveler
bottom of rack
leveling foot
(side view)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-51
Note 1: The relay rack leveling feet are an aid during the relay rack installation.
Leveling feet must be retracted when shims are in place to maintain
Zone-4 compliance.
Note 2: Do not tighten anchor bolts at this time. Anchor bolts are tightened when
all the installation procedures for the relay rack or spacer with fiber
management and end shield are completed.
__ 9. Do not install the doors at this time. The doors are installed in a
subsequent procedure. Refer to Installing Optional Door Assemblies,
page 7-494.
Go to Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support, page 7-51.
Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support
3.32 This section describes how to support the top of a relay rack using the
central office (CO) overhead cable rack.
3.33 To maintain Zone-4 earthquake compliance, Tellabs requires using the
following procedures to support the top of each relay rack:
The top of a single relay rack is supported by attaching the relay rack
to an overhead support structure. Refer to Action, page 7-52.
(optional) In a line up that contains two or more relay racks, the top of
each relay rack may be further supported by passing a 1-inch gray
steel pipe through V-bolts located on the top of the relay rack. Refer to
Installing the 1-Inch (25.4 mm) Gray Steel Pipe Support, page 7-114.
If using this option, complete the procedure on Installing the 1-Inch
(25.4 mm) Gray Steel Pipe Support, page 7-114 and then return to
Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support, page 7-51.
Requirements 3.34 Do not begin a new procedure until you have completed all previous
procedures. Place a check mark on the line beside the step number of the
procedure as each step is completed.
Note: When installing the top support, do not block the power cable access to the
BFAP at the front of the relay rack. Otherwise, the top support must be
removed to allow access.
__ hammer
__ two non-magnetic mount levels (plumb bob is optional)
Page 7-52 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Materials 3.36 The following materials are required to perform the overhead support
structure procedure:
__ one or two 5/8 inch x 11 threaded rods
__ J-bolts
__ framing clips
__ auxiliary channel
__ 5/8 inch (15.5 or 16.0 mm) x 11 nuts
Action 3.37 Follow these steps to support the top of a relay rack by attaching it to an
overhead support structure using an auxiliary channel, framing clips, 5/8 inch nuts,
washers, and J-bolts:
__ 1. Remove the temporary top support straps.
__ 2. On the top of the relay rack, find the three holes backed by hex nuts.
__ 3. Using these holes, attach one or two 5/8 inch x 11 threaded rods per
relay rack to the relay rack and to a rigid overhead structure. Refer to
Figures 3.12, page 7-53 through 3.14, page 7-55.
__ 4. Tighten the J-bolts and the 5/8 inch nuts that are at the ends of the
threaded rod and auxiliary channel assembly.
__ 5. Recheck the relay rack leveling and adjust it if necessary.
Go to Installing the 1-Inch Gray Steel Pipe Clamp on the RRS,
page 7-117.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-53
Figure 3.12 Example of Supporting Equipment Relay Racks Using the Overhead Support Structure
framing clips
cable rack
threaded rods
J-bolts
J-bolts
auxiliary
channels
unequal
flange rack
Page 7-54 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.13 Supporting an Equipment Relay Rack Using the Overhead Support Structure
two overhead support assemblies
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LOAM RCMM LIAM TGTM TGTM TGTM TGTMTGTM OPSM SPM LIAM SPM RCMM TGTM TGTM TGTM LOAM
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-55
Figure 3.14 Supporting Two Equipment Relay Racks Using the Overhead Support Structure
four overhead support assemblies
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-56 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.15 Supporting Three Equipment Relay Racks Using the Overhead Support Structure
Go to one of the following procedures:
- Installing Fiber Management Solutions, page 7-57.
Six Overhead Support Assemblies:
- Four Overhead Support Assemblies for the Far Racks and
- Two Single Assemblies for the Middle Relay Rack and End Shield
Top Support for the End Shield Required
Only for Zone 4 Earthquake Installations
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LOAM RCMM LIAM TGTM TGTMTGTM TGTMTGTM OPSM SPM LIAM SPM RCMM TGTM TGTM TGTM LOAM
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-57
Installing Fiber Management Solutions
3.38 This section describes how to install the relay rack spacers and fiber
management ducts. Refer to Figure 3.16, page 7-57.
Figure 3.16 Spacer with Fiber Management Spools
__ hammer
__ 5/16 inch nut driver
__ (2) 10 inch adjustable wrenches
spacer base
fiber spools
lacing brackets
spool covers
spool covers
May leave open
without spools for
installing patch
panels
Note: The spool covers may be oriented to either
the right or the left, depending on the location (left
or right) of the thumbscrews that attach the cover
to the spool.
Page 7-58 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Materials 3.41 The following materials may vary depending on your system configuration:
__ Relay Rack Spacer Panels (RRS):
__ 6-inch with fiber spools (Tellabs part number 149.025)
__ 10-inch with fiber spools (Tellabs part number 249-0014)
__ plastic spool covers (included with RRS kits)
__ miscellaneous hardware (included with RRS kits0
__ Horizontal Fiber Duct:
__ 6-foot Horizontal Fiber Duct Base Spacer (Tellabs part number
245-0047)
__ one per rackBottom of Rack Bracket Kit (Tellabs part number
245-0040), containing two L-brackets and two U-brackets
__ one per rackDuct Covers (Tellabs part number 245-0048)
__ twoEnd Caps (Tellabs part number 245-0049)
__ 3-inch Bend Radius Control Clips (Tellabs part number 245-0051),
used were fibers route into duct
__ Fiber Duct Coupler Clips (Tellabs part number 245-0050), used to
connect fiber ducts
__ Vertical Fiber Ducts:
__ 2-inch x 4-inch slotted vertical fiber duct
__ anchor bolt kit (refer to Table 3.2, page 7-42)
Configurations for Patch
Panels and DCM Chassis
3.42 Some installations require additional patch panels, dispersion
compensation modules (DCMs), and other accessories for the rack spacer
assembly. These items are added after the installation of the racks, rack spacers,
and the associated power and grounding connections are completed.
3.43 To help identify the location of patch panels and DCMs for maintenance
purposes, Tellabs recommends the labeling method shown in Labeling for Patch
Panels and DCM Chassis in RRSs, page 7-260.
3.44 During the installation of the rack spacer assemblies, it may be necessary
to remove the blank filler panels and fiber spools in order to access the mounting
hardware. Keep all removed items secure until the power and grounding is
complete.
3.45 Refer to Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks,
page 7-256s to help determine the rack spacer areas where re-installation of
removed panels may not be necessary:
Installing the Right Relay
Rack Spacer Base
3.46 Follow these steps to install the right rack spacer base:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-59
__ 2. Remove the spacer base and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
__ 3. Anchor the spacer base using either or both of the following methods:
__ 3.1 Using the 3/8-16 bolts provided, anchor the right spacer
base to the right of the equipment relay rack with two
bolts.
and/or:
__ 3.2 Position the spacer base over pre-drilled anchor holes
and install the anchor bolts to secure the base to the
flooring.
Note 1: For anchor hole drilling procedures, refer to Preparing the Floor for
Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-28.
Note 2: For alternate installation methods, use the method specified by local
standards.
Go to Installing the Right Relay Rack Spacer Base, page 7-58.
Installing the Left Relay Rack
Spacer Base
3.47 Follow these steps to install the left rack spacer base:
__ 2. Remove the spacer bases and associated mounting hardware from
the shipping box.
__ 3. Anchor the spacer base using either or both of the methods that follow.
bolts.
flooring.
standards.
Go to Installing the Right Relay Rack Spacer, page 7-59.
Rack Spacer
3.48 Follow these steps to install the right RRS with fiber management spools:
__ 2. Remove the RRS with fiber management spools and associated
hardware from the box.
Page 7-60 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Attach the RRS to the relay rack through the flange in five pre-drilled
locations, using the hardware provided. Refer to Figure 3.17,
page 7-60.
Figure 3.17 Attachment of the Right Relay Rack Spacer (Top View)
Go to Installing the Left Relay Rack Spacer, page 7-60.
Spacer
3.49 Follow these steps to install the left RRS with fiber management spools:
For anchor hole drilling procedures, refer to Preparing the Floor for
locations, using the nut/bolt hardware provided. Refer to Figure 3.18,
page 7-60.
Figure 3.18 Attachment of the Left Relay Rack Spacer
Retain the spool covers to install them at a later time after all racks and
panels are completely installed. Refer to Installing the Relay Rack
Spacer (RRS) Spool Covers, page 7-295.
3.50 Go to one of the following procedures:
Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in a NEBS
top view
relay rack upright
relay rack spacer
nut bolt
relay rack upright
relay rack spacer
top view
bolt nut
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-61
Installing Vertical Fiber Ducts in 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRSs),
page 7-106
Installing the 1-Inch (25.4 mm) Gray Steel Pipe Support, page 7-114
Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in a NEBS Environment
are connected together using Electrical Shelf Interconnect (ESI) cables.
3.53 Table 3.1, page 7-32 shows available HCSS components.
Table 3.1 83.07100B-60 HCSS Components
Tellabs Part Number Description
82.71RACK-KIT-A 83.07100B-60 HCSS rack kit.
83.07100B-60 NEBS/ETSI 83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS)
The 83.07100B-60, HCSS includes the Top Air Baffle, Shelf Chassis with Backplane,
Fiber Trough, Passive Distribution Panel (PDP), and a Fan Tray as part of the shelf.
The Fan Modules (4) and HCSS Fan Filter (1) must be ordered separately.
82.71040 83.07100B-60 HCSS Fan Module
*Order four per HCSS shelf.
82.71060 83.07100B-60 HCSS Fan Filter
*Order one per HCSS shelf.
82.71020H 83.07100B-60 HCSS PDU (Optional)
81.71HCSS-CBL 83.07100B-60 HCSS Shelf Cable Kit
180.0908 83.07100B-60 HCSS NEBS/ETSI Top Baffle (For Replacement Only - Already Part of
Shelf)
81.71HCSS-CBL 83.07100B-60 HCSS Power Cable Kit (includes two sets of 4 cables)
250-0106, power cable (upper set of 4)
250-0107, power cable (lower set of 4)
Page 7-62 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
3.54 After the NEBS relay rack is installed, depending on the system
configuration, perform one or more of the following HCSS installation procedures:
Installing NEBS HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender and Transition
Pieces (Required), page 7-62
Installing the HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU), page 7-73
Installing the HCSS in the Rack, page 7-75
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (NEBS), page 7-80
Installing NEBS HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender and Transition Pieces (Required)
3.55 This section describes how to install the HCSS rear rack base extender kit
(Tellabs part number 249-0051) to the rear of the HCSS rack. The rear rack base
extender is typically installed when the rack is shipped. Refer to Figure 3.19,
page 7-62.
Figure 3.19 HCSS Rear Base Extender Kit
249-0053 83.07100B-60 NEBS HCSS 12-Inch to 15-Inch Rack Transition Pieces (For
Replacement OnlyPart of 83.07100B-60 HCSS rack kit)
249-0051 83.07100B-60 NEBS HCSS 3-inch Base Extender kit
(For Replacement OnlyAlready Part of 83.07100B-60 HCSS rack kit)
81.71ESI-CBL-V NEBS/ETSI HCSS Electrical Shelf Interconnect - Vertical Routing (ESI-V)
Contains 12 ESI cable assemblies for the paired HCSS configuration.
81.71ESI-DUCT NEBS/ETSI Rear ESI cable ductwork. The duct work protects the ESI cables.
Table 3.1 83.07100B-60 HCSS Components (Continued)
base extension cover
base extender
mounting hardware
cover plate for electrical outlet
isolation pad for isolated ground systems
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-63
3.56 Also installed in this procedure are two, Spacer Base Bump Out Transition
Pieces (Tellabs part number 249-0053). The transition pieces are installed to the
left and right of the base extender, over the 10-inch relay rack spacer panels. Refer
to Figure 3.20, page 7-63.
Note: The HCSS rear rack base extender kit and the two transition pieces are
included in the HCSS rack kits.
Figure 3.20 One Spacer Base Bump Out Transition Piece with Hardware
3.57 Figure 3.21, page 7-64 shows the HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender and
Spacer Base Bump Out Transition Pieces installed at the rear of the rack.
Throughout this procedure refer to Figures 3.19, page 7-62 through 3.21,
page 7-64.
Spacer Base Bump Out
Spacer Base Bump Out cover
nut washer bolt
Spacer Base Bump Out cover screws
Page 7-64 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.21 HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender and Transition Pieces Installed
__ #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
Note: The HCSS rear rack base extender kit and the two transition pieces are
included in the HCSS rack kits.
__ oneHCSS rear rack base extender kit (Tellabs part number
249-0051)
__ twospacer base bump out 12-inch to 15-inch, 4-inch high, gray
transition pieces (Tellabs part number 249-0053)
__ (optional) AC outlet kit (Tellabs part number 149.0261)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-65
Installing the HCSS Rear
Rack Base Extender
3.61 Follow these steps to install the HCSS rear rack base extender and
transition pieces:
__ 1. Determine if the HCSS rear rack base extender is installed. The rack
is typically shipped with the HCSS rear rack base extender installed.
__ 1.1 If installed, go to step 9, page 7-66.
__ 1.2 If not installed, go to step 2, page 7-65.
__ 3. Remove the HCSS rear rack base extender and associated mounting
hardware from the shipping box.
__ 4. Go to the rear of the rack.
__ 5. If necessary, attach the isolation pad to the bottom of the base
extender.
__ 6. Align the extender base at the rear of the HCSS relay rack. Refer to
__ 6.1 Remove the existing screws from the HCSS rack base
cover.
__ 6.2 Place the base extender flush with the rear of the HCSS
rack.
Figure 3.22 Extender Base
__ 7. Use a wrench and two hex head screws to attach the base extender
to the rear of the HCSS rack. One screw is used on each end of the
extender. Refer to Figure 3.23, page 7-66 and Figure 3.25, page 7-68.
r
e
m
o
v
e

s
c
r
e
w
s
b
a
s
e

e
x
t
e
n
d
e
r
Page 7-66 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.23 Installing HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender
__ 8. If an electrical outlet is to be installed, refer to Connecting the AC
Power Outlet (Optional), page 7-369.
Installing HCSS Rear Rack
Spacer Base Bump Out
Transition Pieces
__ Remove the two spacer base bump out transition pieces (Tellabs part
number 249-0053) and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box. Refer to Figure 3.20, page 63.
__ Go to the rear of the rack.
__ Remove the HCSS rack base extension cover by removing the screw
on the left side and the screw on right side. Refer to Figure 3.24,
page 67.
__ Set the HCSS rack base extension cover and screws aside for use
later in this procedure.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-67
Figure 3.24 Removing HCSS Rear Guard Cover (Shows Right Side)
__ 10. With the bolt, washer, and nut supplied in each spacer base bump out
transition piece kit, use a wrench and a socket wrench to attach the
Spacer Base Bump Out Transition Piece, to the left side of the base
extender. Refer to Figures 3.25, page 7-68 through 3.27, page 7-69.
__ 11. With the bolt, washer, and nut supplied in each spacer base bump out
transition piece kit, use a wrench and a socket wrench to attach the
spacer base bump out transition pieces, to the right side of the base
extender. Refer to Figures 3.25, page 7-68 through 3.27, page 7-69.
Page 7-68 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.25 Attaching Bump Out Transition Pieces to the HCSS Rear Rack Base
Extender
Figure 3.26 Bolt and Washer Orientation for Spacer Base Bump Out Transition
Piece to Base Extender
b
a
s
e

e
x
t
e
n
d
e
r
Attach each
Transition Piece
Guard Rail to
Base Extender
here.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-69
Figure 3.27 Nut Orientation for Spacer Base Bump Out Transition Piece to Base
Extender
Figure 3.28 Installing the Spacer Base Bump Out Transition Piece to the Base
Extender
Page 7-70 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.29 Spacer Base Bump Out Transition Piece Attached to the Base
Extender (Shows Left Side)
__ 12. Using the two screws supplied, attach the HCSS Spacer Base Bump
Out Top Cover to the left Spacer Base Bump Out with a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver. Refer to Figure 3.30, page 71.
__ 13. Using the two screws supplied, attach the HCSS Spacer Base Bump
Out Top Cover to the right Spacer Base Bump Out with a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver. Refer to Figure 3.30, page 71.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-71
Figure 3.30 HCSS Spacer Base Bump Out Top Cover Screw Locations
Installing the HCSS Rear
Rack Base Extender Cover
__ 14. Install the HCSS rear rack base extender cover over the base
extender using two screws and a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. One
screw is used on each end of the HCSS rear rack base extender cover.
Refer to Figure 3.31, page 7-71.
Figure 3.31 Installing HCSS Rear Rack Base Extender Cover
__ 15. If there is not an electrical outlet installed, install the electrical outlet
cover plate using two screws and a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver.
Page 7-72 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.32 Installing the Electrical Outlet Cover Plate
Go to Installing the HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU), page 7-73
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-73
Installing the HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
3.62 This section describes how to install the optional HCSS PDU (Tellabs part
number 82.71020H) to the top of the HCSS rack. The HCSS PDU is typically
installed when the rack is shipped. Refer to Figure 3.33, page 7-73.
Figure 3.33 82.71020H Power Distribution Unit -- Used with HCSSs
__ screwdriver
__ oneHCSS Power Distribution Unit (Tellabs part number 82.71020H)
__ fourrack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167)
Note: This procedure requires two people.
3.66 Follow these steps to install the HCSS PDU:
__ 2. Remove the HCSS PDU and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
1A2A3A4A5A6A
returns
A-side
1A2A3A4A5A6A
power inputs
A-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
power inputs
B-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
returns
B-side
1A2A3A4A5A6A 1A2A3A4A5A6A 1B2B3B4B5B6B 1B2B3B4B5B6B
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
returns
A-side
power outputs
A-side
power outputs
B-side
returns
B-side
to central office power
to shelves
Page 7-74 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Go to the front of the rack.
__ 4. Have one person align the HCSS PDU to the front of the rack over
NEBS rack holes 88 and 83. Refer to Figure 3.34, page 7-74.
Figure 3.34 HCSS NEBS Rack PDU Installation Location
__ 5. Have the second person attach the left side of the HCSS PDU to the
front of the rack using rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167) in
holes 88 and 83.
__ 6. Have the second person attach the right side of the HCSS PDU to the
front of the rack using rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167) in
holes 88 and 83.
Go to Installing the HCSS in the Rack, page 7-75
front of rack
hole 88
hole 83
hole 88
hole 83
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-75
Installing the HCSS in the Rack
3.67 This section describes how to install the High Capacity Switch Shelf
(HCSS) to the HCSS rack in the upper or lower position. The HCSSs are typically
installed when the rack is shipped.
__ screwdriver
__ up to two83.07100B-60 HCSSs (Tellabs part number 83.07100B-60)
The 83.07100B-60, HCSS includes the Top Air Baffle, Shelf Chassis
a Fan Tray as part of the shelf.
__ eightNEBS rack screws per HCSS (Tellabs part number 40.0167)
__ twotemporary rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167)
__ oneKeep Out Bar (Tellabs part number 110.0892)
Installing HCSS in Lower
Position of Rack
3.71 Follow these steps to install the HCSS:
__ 2. Remove the HCSS and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
__ 3. If necessary, attach the top air baffle to the top of the HCSS:
__ 3.1 Remove the 4 screws holding the mesh to the top of the
shelf. Refer to Figure 3.35, page 76. These screws are
no longer used.
Page 7-76 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.35 Remove Mesh Hold-Down Screws
__ 3.2 Keep the mesh material on the top of the HCSS.
__ 3.3 Align the top air baffle above the HCSS with the venting
to the rear.
__ 3.4 Insert the baffles left and right edges into the side walls
of the shelf.
__ 3.5 From the left side of the shelf, attach the top air baffle to
the shelf using three screws (Tellabs part number
140.0087). Refer to Figure 3.36, page 77.
__ 3.6 From the right side of the shelf, attach the top air baffle
to the shelf using three screws (Tellabs part number
__ 3.7 Torque all six screws to 5 1 Inch-Pounds. Refer to
Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
Side of HCSS
remove mesh
hold-down screws
2 per side
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-77
Figure 3.36 Air Baffle Attachment Screw Locations and Mounting Bracket
__ 4. Determine the shelf position in the rack, upper or lower. Refer to
__ 6. Install the HCSS in the Lower position:
__ 6.1 Temporary screws can be used to rest the HCSS on
while aligning mounting holes. Partially install two
screws, one in hole 23 on the left side of the rack and
one in hole 23 on the right side of the rack.
__ 6.2 Have one person align the HCSS to the front of the rack.
Align shelf mounting brackets over rack mounting holes
25, 30, 35, and 40. Refer to Figure 3.34, page 7-74.
__ 6.2.1 Have the second person attach the left
mounting ears on the HCSS to the left
side of the rack using four rack screws.
__ 6.2.2 Have the second person attach the right
mounting ears on the HCSS to the right
__ 6.3 Remove the two temporary screws.
Side of HCSS
attach baffle to shelf
with 3 screws per side
Page 7-78 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Install the HCSS in the Upper position:
__ 7.1 Temporary screws can be used to rest the HCSS on
while aligning mounting holes. Partially install two
screws, one in hole 55 on the left side of the rack and
one in hole 55 on the right side of the rack.
__ 7.2 Have one person align the HCSS to the front of the rack.
Align shelf mounting bracket over rack mounting holes
57, 62, 67, and 72. Refer to Figure 3.34, page 7-74.
mounting brackets on the HCSS to the
left side of the rack using four rack
screws.
mounting brackets on the HCSS to the
right side of the rack using four rack
screws.
__ 7.3 Remove the two temporary screws.
__ 8. Attach the keep out bar below the lower HCSS. Suggested rack holes
are 15 on the left side of the rack and 9 on the right side of the rack.
__ 10. Attach the lacing bar (Tellabs part number 1000-000371-01) to the
rear of the rack between the PDU and the upper HCSS. The lacing bar
is used later to support the power cables.
__ 11. Torque screws to 32 Inch-Pounds 3.0 Inch-Pounds. Refer to
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-79
Figure 3.37 Suggested HCSS Positions in a NEBS Rack
Go to Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (NEBS),
page 7-80.
lower position
upper position
hole 30
hole 25
hole 40
hole 35
hole 62
hole 57
hole 72
hole 67
hole 15
hole 9
HCSS keep out bar
front of rack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
1RU open space above HCSS
1RU open space above HCSS
Page 7-80 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (NEBS)
3.72 If the two HCSS are not going to be paired, skip this procedure.
3.73 If the rack contains two HCSSs and they are to be paired, complete these
procedures:
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases, page 7-80
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables, page 7-93
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers, page 7-97
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases
3.74 This procedure describes how to install the paired HCSSs Electrical
Interconnect (ESI) Cable Duct Base to the rear of the rack.
__ Phillips-head screwdriver with torque capability
Materials 3.77 The following materials are required:
__ oneHCSS ESI Cable Duct Kit (Tellabs part number 81-71ESI-DUCT)
For piece parts included in the HCSS ESI Duct Kit refer to Table 3.3,
page 7-80. The part number is shown on each duct base piece and
cap piece.
Table 3.3 HCSS ESI Cable Duct
Description Tellabs Part Number Quantity
Connector Cap Cover 1000-000087-01 4
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-81
ESI Cable Block Base 1000-000088-01 4
ESI Cable Block Top 1000-000089-01 4
Center Base 1000-000090-01 2
Center Cap 1000-000091-01 2
Table 3.3 HCSS ESI Cable Duct (Continued)
Page 7-82 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Frame Mounting Z-Bracket 1000-000092-01 6
Upper Right/Lower Left Base
Corners
1000-000093-01 2
Upper Left/Lower Right Base
Corners
1000-000094-01 2
Upper Right/Lower Left
Corners, Cap
1000-000095-01 2
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-83
Upper Left/Lower Right
Corners, Cap
1000-000096-01 2
rack mount screws used to
secure the six Z-brackets to
the rack
40.0167 18
nuts used to secure the ESI
Cable Block Base
42.5013 16
screws used to secure the
ESI Cable Block Top to the
Cable Block Base
140.0261 8
longer center screw used to
secure the ESI Cable Block
Top to the Cable Block Base
140.0055 4
ESI Duct Screw 140.0035 194
Page 7-84 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
3.78 Follow these steps to install the HCSS ESI Cable Duct Base:
__ 2. Remove the HCSS ESI Cable Duct Kit (Tellabs part number
81.71ESI-DUCT) and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
__ 3. Go to the rear of the HCSS rack.
__ 4. Remove the left and right ESI connector cover plates from the upper
HCSS. Refer to Figure 3.38, page 7-84.
__ 5. Remove the left and right ESI connector cover plates from the lower
Note: The ESI cover plates are no longer used in this configuration. Follow your
company procedures for discard.
Figure 3.38 HCSS Rear ESI Connector Cover Plates
Attaching ESI Cable Block
Bases
__ 6. Locate the four ESI Cable Block Bases (Tellabs part number
1000-000088-01).
-48VDC B2
-48RTN B1 -48RTN A1
-48VDC A2
-48RTN A2 -48RTN B2
-48VDC B1 -48VDC A1
left ESI
connector
cover
right ESI
connector
cover
threaded
studs
threaded
studs
threaded
studs
threaded
studs
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-85
__ 6.1 On the rear of the HCSS, position an ESI Cable Block
Base onto the four threaded studs to the left of the
removed ESI connector covers.
__ 6.2 Connect the ESI Cable Block Base to the HCSS rear
metal cover using four nuts (Tellabs part number
42.5013).
Base onto the four threaded studs to the right of the
42.5013).
__ 6.5 Repeat substep 6.1, page 7-85 through 6.4, page 7-85
for the other HCSS.
__ 6.6 Torque all nuts to 14 Inch-Pounds -2.0 Inch-Pounds.
Refer to Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
Attaching NEBS Mounting
Z-Brackets
__ 7. Locate the 6 Frame Mounting Z-Brackets (Tellabs part number
1000-000092-01).
__ 8. Attach 6 Frame Mounting Z-Brackets to the rear of the rack using 18
rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167). Refer to Table 3.4,
page 7-85 and Figure 3.39, page 86.
__ 9. Torque all Frame Mounting Z-Brackets to 32 Inch-Pounds 3.0
Inch-Pounds. Refer to Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
Table 3.4 Z-Bracket Rack Holes
HCSS Z-Bracket
Rack Screw Holes Z-Bracket Location
66, 63, 59 top Z-bracket (left and right)
52, 49, 45 middle Z-bracket (left and right)
38, 35, 31 bottom Z-bracket (left and right)
Page 7-86 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.39 HCSS Rack Rear Showing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Block Bases and Frame Mounting Z-Brackets
back of rack
hole 45
hole 52
hole 49
hole 45
hole 52
hole 49
hole 31
hole 38
hole 35
hole 31
hole 38
hole 35
66
rack holes
63
59
66
rack holes
63
59
Drawing not to scale.
left bracket
orientation
right bracket
orientation
upper ESI cable block bases
lower ESI cable block bases
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-87
__ 10. Locate the two Upper Left/Lower Right Base Corners (Tellabs part
number 1000-000094-01).
__ 10.1 Position one piece over the top left Z-bracket. Refer to
Figure 3.40, page 88.
__ 10.2 Use 3 screws (Tellabs part number 140.0035) to secure
the piece to the top, left Z-bracket. Do not torque screws
at this time.
the piece to back cover. Do not torque screws at this
time.
__ 10.4 Position one piece over the lower right Z-bracket. Refer
to Figure 3.40, page 88.
the piece to the lower, right Z-bracket. Do not torque
screws at this time.
time.
Page 7-88 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.40 Rear HCSS ESI Cable Base Duct For Upper Left and Lower Right Corners (Tellabs part number
1000-000094-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
attach to
back cover at arrows
attach to
attach to
top, left
Z-bracket
attach to
bottom, right
Z-bracket
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-89
__ 11. Locate the two Upper Right/Lower Left Base Corners (Tellabs part
number 1000-000093-01).
__ 11.1 Position one piece over the top right Z-bracket. Refer to
the piece to the top, right Z-bracket. Do not torque
time.
__ 11.4 Position one piece over the lower left Z-bracket. Refer
the piece to the lower, left Z-bracket. Do not torque
time.
Page 7-90 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.41 Rear HCSS ESI Cable Base Duct For Upper Right and Lower Left Corners (Tellabs part number
1000-000093-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
attach to
attach to
attach to
top, right
Z-bracket
attach to
bottom, left
Z-bracket
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-91
__ 12. Locate the two Center Base pieces (Tellabs part number
1000-000090-01).
__ 12.1 Position one Center Base piece between the Upper Left
Corner piece and the Lower Left Corner piece, The
piece covers the middle, left Z-bracket and overlaps the
upper and lower corner pieces. Refer to Figure 3.42,
page 92.
the piece to the middle, left Z-bracket.
the piece to the back cover on the upper and lower
shelf.
the piece to the Upper Left Corner Base piece.
the piece to the Lower Left Corner Base piece.
__ 12.6 Position one Center Base piece between the Upper
Right Corner piece and the Lower Right Corner piece,
The piece covers the middle, right Z-bracket and
overlaps the upper and lower corner pieces. Refer to
the piece to the middle, right Z-bracket.
shelf.
the piece to the Upper Right Corner Base piece.
the piece to the Lower Right Corner Base piece.
__ 13. Torque all ESI Cable Base Duct pieces to 20 Inch-Pounds -2.0
Page 7-92 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.42 Rear HCSS ESI Cable Base Duct For Center Left and Right Pieces (Tellabs part number
1000-000090-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
attach at arrows
attach to
middle, right
Z-bracket
attach to
middle, left
Z-bracket
attach at arrows
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-93
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables
Interconnect (ESI) Cables to the rear of the rack.
3.80 There are twelve ESI cables that are used to connect the two paired
HCSSs. The cables are included in the HCSS Electrical Shelf Interconnect Kit
(Tellabs part number 81.71ESI-CBL-V-R6). These cables are connected to the
backplane within an EMI shielding duct work.
__ Phillips-head screwdriver
__ string cutter
__ 1HCSS ESI Cable Kit (Tellabs part number 81.71ESI-CBL-V) which
contains twelve ESI cables
__ 4ESI Cable Block Tops (Tellabs part number 1000-000089-01)
__ 8screws (Tellabs part number 140.0261)
__ 4longer screws (Tellabs part number 140.0055)
__ waxed lacing cord (Tellabs part number 60.0870)
Installing the HCSS ESI
Cables
3.84 Follow these steps to install the HCSS ESI Cables:
__ 1. Verify that the ESI Cable Duct Base is installed. Refer to Installing
Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases, page 7-80.
__ 3. Remove the twelve HCSS ESI Cables from the shipping box (Tellabs
part number 81.71ESI-CBL-V).
__ 4. Locate the four ESI Cable Block Tops (Tellabs part number
1000-000089-01). Refer to Figure 3.43, page 93.
Figure 3.43 ESI Cable Block Tops (Tellabs part number 1000-000089-01)
__ 5. Locate the ESI Cable Block Top screws. Refer to Table 3.5,
page 7-94.
Page 7-94 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Starting with the upper HCSS, P11-1, connect the ESI cables to the
ESI connectors as shown in Table 3.6, page 7-95, Table 3.7,
page 7-95, Figure 3.44, page 7-95, and Figure 3.45, page 7-96.
__ 7.1 At the upper HCSS, position the right angle cable
connector carefully within the 4-wall shroud of the shelf
connector.
__ 7.2 Check for good alignment, then press in the connector
with equal pressure until it is fully seated.
__ 7.3 Once the connection is in place, route the cable down to
the lower shelf.
__ 7.4 Lace down the cable to the inside of the ESI cable duct
base as you route it to the lower HCSS.
__ 7.5 At the lower HCSS, position the right angle cable
connector.
__ 7.7 Repeat for all ESI cables (12 qty).
Table 3.5 ESI Cable Block Top Screws
ESI Cable Block Top to Base
140.0261 8
Top to Base
140.0055 4
Caution:
Use caution when connecting the ESI Cables to the rear of the HCSSs. Improper
alignment can cause bent connector pins.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-95
Figure 3.44 HCSS ESI Backplane Connectors
Note: The twelve ESI Cables are black (Tellabs part number 250-0131). Some
figures may show the cables with different colors to show each cable
connection.
Table 3.6 Left Side ESI Connections
Connect From Connect To
P11 - 1 (upper HCSS) P11 - 1 (lower HCSS)
Table 3.7 Right Side ESI Connections
Page 7-96 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.45 Paired HCSS ESI Cable Connections
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-97
__ 8. Attach the four ESI Cable Block Tops to the ESI Cable Block Bases.
Refer to Figure 3.43, page 93.
__ 8.1 Position the ESI Cable Block Top over the ESI cables.
__ 8.2 Secure the ESI Cable Block Top using one screw
(Tellabs part number 140.0261) at the top of the block
and one screw at the bottom.
__ 8.3 Use the longer screw (Tellabs part number 140.0055) to
secure the center of the ESI Cable Block Top.
__ 8.4 Torque to 10 Inch-Pounds -1.0 Inch-Pounds. Refer to
__ 8.5 Repeat for each ESI Cable Block Top.
Go to Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers, page 7-97.
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers
Interconnect (ESI) Cable Duct Caps to the rear of the rack.
3.86 There are four ESI Cable Duct Caps that are used to cover the ESI cable
connections at the rear of the paired HCSSs.
Materials 3.89 The following materials are required, refer to Table 3.3, page 7-80:
__ 4Connector Cap Covers (Tellabs part number 1000-000087-01)
__ 2Upper Right/Lower Left Corners, Cap (Tellabs part number
1000-000095-01)
__ 2Upper Left/Lower Right Corners, Cap (Tellabs part number
1000-000096-01)
__ 2Center Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000091-01)
__ 194ESI Duct Screws (Tellabs part number 140.0035)
Cable Duct Covers
3.90 Follow these steps to install the HCSS ESI Cable Caps:
__ 1. Verify that the ESI Cables are installed. Refer to Installing Paired
HCSS ESI Cables, page 7-93.
Page 7-98 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Locate the four Connector Cap Covers (Tellabs part number
1000-000087-01).
__ 3.1 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the upper left ESI
connectors. Refer to Figure 3.46, page 99.
the Connector Cap Cover. Do not torque screws at this
time.
__ 3.3 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the upper right
ESI connectors. Refer to Figure 3.46, page 99.
time.
__ 3.5 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the lower left ESI
time.
__ 3.7 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the lower right
time.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-99
Figure 3.46 Connector Cap Covers (Tellabs part number 1000-000087-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows
attach at arrows
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
Page 7-100 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 4. Locate the two Upper Left/Lower Right Corners, Cap (Tellabs part
number 1000-000096-01).
__ 4.1 Position the Upper Left Corner piece over the upper left
corner of the ESI cables and duct base. Refer to
__ 4.2 Use 13 screws (Tellabs part number 140.0035) to
secure the Upper Left Corner piece. Do not torque
__ 4.3 Position the Lower Right Corner piece over the lower
right corner of the ESI cables and duct base. Refer to
secure the Lower Right Corner piece. Do not torque
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-101
Figure 3.47 Upper Left and Lower Right Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000096-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows
attach at arrows
Page 7-102 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 5. Locate the two Upper Right/Lower Left Corners, Cap (Tellabs part
number 1000-000095-01).
__ 5.1 Position the Upper Right Corner piece over the upper
secure the Upper Right Corner piece. Do not torque
__ 5.3 Position the Lower Left Corner piece over the lower left
secure the Lower Left Corner piece. Do not torque
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-103
Figure 3.48 Upper Right/Lower Left Corners, Cap (Tellabs part number 1000-000095-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows
attach at arrows
Page 7-104 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 6. Locate the two Center Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000091-01).
__ 6.1 Position a Center Cap over the ESI cables on the left
side, between the two left corner pieces. Refer to
secure the left Center Cap. Do not torque screws at this
time.
__ 6.3 Position a Center Cap over the ESI cables on the right
side, between the two right corner pieces. Refer to
secure the right Center Cap. Do not torque screws at
this time.
__ 7. Torque all ESI Cable Duct Covers to 20 Inch-Pounds -2.0
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-105
Figure 3.49 Left and Right Center Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000091-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows attach at arrows
Page 7-106 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
page 7-106
Installing Vertical Fiber Ducts in 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRSs)
3.92 When a 10-inch RRS (Tellabs part numbers 249-0014) is used, 2-inch x
4-inch (Tellabs part number 245-0044) or 4-inch x 4-inch (Tellabs part number
245-0046) slotted vertical fiber ducts may be installed in the RRSs. Refer to
Figure 3.50 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacer Panel with 2-Inch x 4-Inch Slotted Vertical Fiber Troughs (Front View)
10-inch RRS
2-inch x 4-inch fiber ducts
flush wire shield
Tellabs 7100
equipment
rack
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-107
Figure 3.51 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacer Panel with 2-Inch x 4-Inch Slotted Vertical Fiber Troughs (Top View)
Figure 3.52 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacer Panels with 4-Inch x 4-Inch and 2-Inch x 4-Inch Slotted Vertical Fiber
Troughs (Front View)
Tellabs 7100
equipment rack
10-inch L-bracket
flush wire shield
10-inch RRS
(Tellabs
part number
249-0012)
Tellabs 7100
equipment
rack
Tellabs 7100
equipment
rack
10-inch RRS
Page 7-108 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Troughs (Top View)
__ screwdriver
__ hack saw
Materials 3.95 The following materials are required to install a 2-inch x 4-inch or 4-inch x
4-inch slotted vertical fiber duct:
__ (as required) 2-inch x 4-inch slotted vertical fiber duct with cover
__ (as required) 3-inch Bend Radius Control Clips (Tellabs part number
245-0051), used were fibers route into duct
__ 1. Determine the position required for the slotted vertical fiber duct.
__ 2. Screw the slotted vertical fiber duct to the relay rack spacer panel.
__ 3. Determine where fibers will enter and exit the shelf.
__ 3.1 Remove the fingers from the slotted vertical fiber duct at
these locations.
__ 3.2 Attach a fiber guide to these locations. Refer to Figure
3.54, page 7-109.
Tellabs 7100
equipment rack
10-inch L-bracket
10-inch RRS
2-inch x 4-inch fiber duct
flush wire shield
Tellabs 7100
equipment rack
4-inch x 4-inch
fiber duct
(Tellabs part number
245-0046)
front front
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-109
Figure 3.54 Fiber Guides
__ 4. Repeat this procedure to install more slotted vertical fiber duct.
Go to Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks, page 7-109
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks
3.96 Where possible Tellabs recommends that 4-inch x 4-inch fiber ducts be
installed above the Tellabs 7100 system to accommodate required fiber cables and
fiber jumpers. The overhead fiber ducts should be equipped with fiber down spouts
installed above each rack spacer. The Fiber down spouts route fiber from the down
spout to the front and rear of the rack spacer.
3.97 Horizontal fiber duct above the Tellabs 7100 system is determined at site
survey. Follow your companys prescribed procedures for installation of fiber ducts
above the Tellabs 7100 system.
Page 7-110 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Below Relay Racks
3.98 The horizontal fiber duct add additional fiber management below the
existing relay racks. Refer to Figure 3.55, page 7-110.
Figure 3.55 Horizontal Fiber Duct with Cover
__ spirit level, non-magnetic level, 6-inch (or metric equivalent)
__ hack saw
__ screwdriver
Materials 3.101 The following materials are required to install the horizontal fiber duct:
__ one per rack4-inch x 4-inch solid Horizontal Fiber Duct in 6-foot
lengths (Tellabs part number 245-0047)
__ one per rackHorizontal Fiber Duct Cover in 6-foot lengths
245-0040), containing two L-brackets and two U-brackets for
mounting the horizontal duct
h
o
riz
o
n
ta
l fib
e
r d
u
c
t w
ith
c
o
v
e
r
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-111
connect fiber ducts
__ LockMaster for use with screws
Rack Spacer Base
3.102 Follow these steps to install the horizontal fiber duct:
__ 2. Remove the horizontal fiber ducts, covers, and associated mounting
__ 3. Remove the lower air baffle if necessary.
__ 4. Mount an L-bracket to the relay rack on the left-hand side of the relay
rack using the second, third, sixth, and seventh rack holes. Refer to
__ 5. Mount an L-bracket to the relay rack on the right-hand side of the relay
Figure 3.56 Mounting L-Bracket and U-Bracket (Right Side of Rack)
__ 6. Using a spirit level adjust the L-brackets until the bottom is level and
then tighten the mounting screws to secure the L-bracket to the relay
rack.
L
-b
ra
c
k
e
t
U
-b
ra
c
k
e
t
Page 7-112 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Mount the U-bracket on the bottom of the adjacent rack spacer. Refer
__ 56.1 Remove the bottom fiber spool from the adjacent rack.
This spool is no longer needed.
__ 56.2 Re-use the four screws with LockMaster to mount the new
U-bracket in the place of the fiber spool. Do not tighten
screws at this time. Refer to Figure 3.57, page 7-112.
Figure 3.57 Mounting U-Bracket
__ 8. Level the U-bracket in relation to the L-bracket by placing the spirit
level across both the L-bracket and the U-bracket then adjust the
U-bracket so that it is level with the L-bracket. Refer to Figure 3.58,
page 7-112.
Figure 3.58 Leveling the U-Bracket
__ 9. Tighten the four screws securing the U-bracket to the rack spacer.
__ 10. Repeat this for the rack spacer on the opposite side of the rack.
__ 11. When all L-brackets and U-brackets have been installed the horizontal
fiber duct and cover can be installed.
__ 12. Determine the horizontal fiber duct lengths required.
__ 13. Cut the 6-foot horizontal fiber ducts to required lengths.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-113
__ 14. Where the ducts are to be attached together cut out a 3/4-inch slot on
the right and left duct. Refer to Figure 3.59, page 7-113.
Figure 3.59 Horizontal Fiber Duct with 3/4-Inch Cut Out
__ 15. On the end horizontal fiber ducts snap on the end caps. Refer to Figure
3.60, page 7-113.
Figure 3.60 Horizontal Fiber Duct With End Caps
__ 16. Place the horizontal fiber ducts in the U-brackets and L-brackets.
__ 17. Use the fiber duct connectors to slide over the cut out ends and
connect the ducts.
Page 7-114 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 18. Snap in the rear edge of the horizontal fiber duct cover. Be sure to
leave the front of the cover open to allow for fiber routing.
__ 19. If necessary, reinstall the lower air baffle.
Go to Installing the 1-Inch (25.4 mm) Gray Steel Pipe Support,
page 7-114.
Installing the 1-Inch (25.4 mm) Gray Steel Pipe Support
3.103 A one-inch gray steel pipe may be installed to support the top of two or
more Tellabs 7100 relay racks that are installed adjacent to one another. In
addition to providing added rigidity and alignment to the relay racks and spacers in
the line up, it also forces them to move in unison during an earthquake.
3.104 Do not begin a new procedure until you have completed all previous
__ level
__ hammer
__ open-end wrench
Materials 3.106 The following materials are required to install the 1-inch steel pipe, if two
or more adjacent relay racks are contained in the line up:
__ one 1 inch x 10 foot steel pipe to support two adjacent relay racks
__ two V-clamps for each relay rack (Tellabs part number 14.9177)
Action 3.107 Follow these steps to support the top of a relay rack using the 1-inch (25.4
mm) gray steel pipe:
__ 2. Join a row of adjacent relay racks by securing a 1-inch (25.40 mm)
gray steel pipe horizontally along the top angle of the relay rack.
Use V-clamps to secure the gray steel pipe loosely to the relay rack.
__ 3. Tighten the V-clamps but do not apply torque at this time.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-115
Figure 3.61 Supporting Equipment Relay Racks Using the 1-Inch Gray Steel Pipe
Go to Installing the Lacing Bracket, page 7-116.
1-inch gray
V-clamps
angle iron
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314
CriticalMajor Minor
ACO
Lamp Test
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314
CriticalMajor Minor
ACO
Lamp Test
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
on top, front
of rack
steel pipe
end shield
inner channel
front of rear rear of front
toward toward
side cut-away view of pipe, V-clamp, and angle iron
Page 7-116 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Lacing Bracket
3.108 This section describes how to install the lacing brackets located at the top
of a relay rack spacer (RRS) assembly. The lacing bracket provides support for
cables routed to and from a RRS.
__ screwdrivers with torque capability and a 5 inch (127 mm) minimum
shaft: #1 Phillips-head
__ (2) 10-32 Flange head screws and nuts with lock washers (screws are
1/2 inches long)
Materials 3.111 A relay rack spacer kit includes the lacing brackets and mounting
hardware. Refer to Figure 3.62, page 7-116.
Figure 3.62 RRS Top Support with Lacing Brackets
Action 3.112 The lacing bracket is installed directly onto the relay rack spacer rear
panel. Follow these steps to install the lacing bracket:
__ 2. Remove the lacing bracket(s) and associated hardware from the box.
__ 3. Position the lacing bracket over the pre-drilled holes on the relay rack
spacer back panel. Ensure that the holes are properly aligned.
__ 4. Using the flange head screw and nut hardware, secure the lacing
bracket to the relay rack spacer back panel.
__ 5. Tighten the flange head screw and nut hardware. Tighten to the
correct amount of torque. Refer to Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
Go to Installing the 1-Inch Gray Steel Pipe Clamp on the RRS,
page 7-117.
lacing brackets
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-117
Installing the 1-Inch Gray Steel Pipe Clamp on the RRS
3.113 This section describes how to install the 1-inch gray steel pipe clamp at the
top support assembly of a relay rack spacer.
3.114 The pipe clamp secures the RRS with fiber management spools onto the
gray steel pipe top support.
__ hammer
__ #1 Phillips-head screwdriver with torque capability and a 5 inch
minimum shaft:
__ 2 x 10-32 Flange head screws and nuts with lock washers (screws are
1/2 inch in length)
Materials 3.117 The pipe clamps and mounting hardware required to perform this
procedure are included in the relay rack spacer kit, which must be available before
starting this procedure. Refer to Figure 3.63, page 7-117.
Figure 3.63 RRS Top Support with Pipe Clamps
Action 3.118 The pipe clamp is installed directly onto the RRS back panel, according to
the following steps:
__ 2. Remove the pipe clamp(s) and associated hardware from the shipping
container.
__ 3. Position the pipe clamp around the 1-inch steel pipe, placing the pipe
clamp base over the pre-drilled holes on the top support. Ensure that
the holes are properly aligned.
pipe clamps
Page 7-118 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 4. Using the flange head screw/nut assembly, secure the pipe clamp to
the relay rack spacer back panel.
__ 5. Tighten the flange head screw/nut assembly, but do not apply torque
at this time.
Go to Installing the End Shield, page 7-118.
Installing the End Shield
3.119 This section describes how to install the end shield at the end of a relay
rack lineup in a 6-inch/152 mm RRS scenario.
3.120 The end shield closes off the Tellabs 7100 OTS NE from a different
product installed next to it and protects cables routed to and from a Tellabs 7100
NE. It is also used at the end of a relay rack equipment lineup allowing end of aisle
LEDs and switches to be installed in the provided cutouts.
__ hammer
__ screwdrivers with torque capability and a 5 inch (127 mm) minimum
shaft: #1 and #2 Phillips-head, and #1 and #2 flat-head
Materials 3.123 An end shield kit is required to perform this procedure. The end shield kit
includes the following:
inner channel
inner channel base spacer
end shield
end shield panel
metal braces (5 inch)
mounting hardware
Note: For a 6-inch/152 mm RRS installation, the 6-inch/152 mm L brackets must
be ordered separately. However, if using the rear cover kit, the L-brackets
are not needed.
Action 3.124 The end shield for the NEBS 6-inch RRS is installed directly onto the RRS.
Follow these steps to install the end shield:
__ 2. Remove the end shield and associated hardware from the shipping
carton.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-119
__ 3. Attach the end shield to the RRS using the nuts/bolts assembly
provided.
__ 4. (optional, as needed. See previous note.) Arrange the L-brackets so
that they are evenly spaced along the vertical height of the relay rack
and end shield, aligning the pre-drilled holes in the end shield and
relay rack.
__ 5. Secure the end shield by attaching the two L-brackets between the
end shield and the back flange of the relay rack. Attach one L-bracket
near the top and the other L-bracket near the bottom of the rack. Refer
to Figure 3.64, page 7-119 and Figure 3.65, page 7-120.
Figure 3.64 Attaching the L-Bracket to the End Shield and Relay Rack Back Flange
Thread the bolt from the space between the relay rack and the end
panel with the nut threaded on the bolt at the end panel. Threading the
bolt from the end panel to the relay rack upright leaves little space for
possibly removing the bolt for expansion purposes. Refer to Figure
3.65, page 7-120.
back view
RRS panel
end shield
relay rack upright
1-of-3 L-brackets
bolt
Page 7-120 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.65 Photo Showing Detail of Orientation of Joining Bolt
__ 6. If specified, wire and install light switches and electrical outlets in the
openings provided at the middle and lower portions of the end shield
cover panel. Observe all applicable local wiring standards.
end shield
relay rack
mid-compartment opening in 6-inch
rack spacer > 3 inches (76.2 mm)
incorrect
orientation of
boltthreads
to inside of
opening
Incorrect Orientation
Correct Orientation
correct
orientation of
boltbolt head
to inside of
opening
end shield
relay rack
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-121
__ 7. If specified, remove the cover from the aisle alarm lamp cutouts and
wire and install aisle alarm lamps in the spaces provided at the top of
the end shield cover panel. Observe all applicable local electrical
wiring standards.
__ 8. Use the hardware provided to secure the end shield cover panel to the
end shield. For the correct installation procedure for the 6-inch RRS,
Figure 3.66 Relay Rack with 6-Inch RRS Installed with End Shield Kit
Go to Supporting the Top of the End Shield, page 7-121.
Supporting the Top of the End Shield
3.125 An overhead support assembly may be installed to support the top of an
end shield. In addition to providing added rigidity and alignment to the relay rack
line up, it also forces the individual equipment to move in unison during an
earthquake. Figure 3.67, page 7-123 shows the completed assembly.
6-inch L-
brackets
end shield
electrical
outlet
space for
space
for aisle
alarm
lamps
space
for light
switch
end shield
cover panel
End shield kit
Page 7-122 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ spirit level
__ hammer
__ open-end wrench
__ screwdrivers with a 5 inch minimum shaft: #1 and #2 Phillips-head,
and #1 and #2 flat-head
Materials 3.128 An end shield kit is required to perform this procedure, including the
following hardware:
__ two or more 5/8 inch x 11 threaded rods
__ J-bolts
__ framing clips
__ 5/8 inch x 11 nuts
Action 3.129 Follow these steps to support the top of an end shield:
__ 2. Locate the knock-out in the top center of the end shield inner channel.
Remove the knock-out piece using the appropriate tools (hammer,
screwdriver).
__ 3. Insert the 5/8 inch threader rod through the center of the resulting hole,
with a nut and bolt assembly.
__ 4. Insert a nut and framing clip on the threading rod to anticipate the
emplacement of the auxiliary channel.
__ 5. On the ladder rack, position a j-bolt assembly parallel to the threaded
rod.
__ 6. Position the auxiliary channel on the left and right of the j-bolt
assembly so as to confine the j-bolt assembly between the auxiliary
channel.
__ 7. At each j-bolt, position a framing clip and secure the auxiliary channel
with a framing clip and 5/8 inch nut.
Repeat this step for both left and right sides. Refer to Figure 3.67,
page 7-123.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-123
Figure 3.67 Supporting Equipment Relay Racks End Shield Using the Overhead Support Assembly
__ 8. Add a final framing clip onto the threaded rod and secure a nut on top
of the auxiliary channel.
__ 9. Re-check the relay rack leveling and adjust it if necessary.
__ 10. Bolt the entire assembly into place by securing all nuts, but do not
apply torque at this time.
Go to Installing the Wire Shield, page 7-124.
End Shield Overhead
Support Assembly
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-124 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Wire Shield
3.130 The wire shield is an optional plate for protecting the fiber optic cabling and
for separating the racks and the relay rack spacer panels.
3.131 There are two wire shields available. Refer to Figure 3.68, page 7-124:
Tellabs part number 149.0342 extends past the front of the spacers
and is used when a barrier is required between two spacers or third
party equipment. Use Tellabs part number 149.035X when a wire
shield extender is needed with this wire shield.
Tellabs part number 149.0408 is used when a barrier is not required
between two spacers. Spacers are flush to one another from the front
of the rack when this wire shield is used. Use Tellabs part number
149.042X when a wire shield extender is needed with this wire shield.
Where:
X = The height of extension:
0 = 6 inches,
1 = 12 inches,
2 = 20 inches,
3 = 24 inches,
4 = 30 inches,
5 = 36 inches,
6 = 54 inches,
7 = 56 inches.
Figure 3.68 Examples of Wire Shields
__ #1 and #3 Phillips-head screwdrivers
__ flat head screwdriver
__ open end wrench-and-socket set
6" RRS 6" RRS 6" RRS 6" RRS
Tellabs
7100
OTS
Tellabs
7100
OTS
3
rd
party
equipment
extended wire shields (Tellabs part number 149.0342)
flush wire shield (Tellabs part number 149.0408)
rack front
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-125
Materials 3.134 Obtain the following materials, available separately:
__ wire shield panel (Tellabs part numbers 149.0342 or 179.0408). Refer
__ (optional) L-brackets (Tellabs part number 149.0244)
__ (optional) relay rack edge guard (Tellabs part number 14.9087)
Figure 3.69 Locations for Connecting the Wire Shield to the Rack and Spacer
Action 3.135 Following are possible scenarios for using a wire shield. Refer to the
appropriate procedure for the appropriate scenario:
Installing the Wire Shield Next to Third Party Equipment, page 7-126
Installing the Wire Shield Between Two Rack Spacers, page 7-128
step 2. These two holes on the
wire shield are used to secure
the wire shield to the base of the
relay rack or rack spacer.
step 1. These five holes are
used to secure the wire shield
to the relay rack side flange
or rack spacer.
The cut-out area allows
space for the 1-inch gray pipe
at the top of the relay rack.
step 3. These sets of
holes are used to secure
the wire shield to the relay
rack side flange or rack
spacer
These two holes at the top of the
the splice plate for the wire
shield extension.
Page 7-126 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Wire Shield Next to Third Party Equipment
3.136 Follow this procedure to install the wire shield adjacent to the rack spacer
panel, where the equipment line-up contains a Tellabs 7100 relay rack and a
third-party equipment rack. There may or may not be a gap between the
Tellabs 7100 OTS and the third party equipment. This scenario typically uses
Tellabs part number 149.0342 to create a barrier between the Tellabs 7100 spacer
and the third party equipment. Refer to Figure 3.70, page 7-126.
Figure 3.70 Wire Shield (149.0342) Next to Third-Party Equipment With Gap
Note 1: Where a wire shield is used next to third-party equipment, you may need
to leave 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) of space between the wire shield and the
third-party equipment. This is to accommodate the head of the bolt,
located at the base of the rack, which extends 1/4 inches (6.35 mm) past
the wire shield. An alternative option is not installing the bolt at the base
of the rack.
Note 2: In this scenario, do not use the hex head screws, HHS 1032 x .625 LG,
STL Z/C hardware. The long screws interfere with the equipment
mounted in the rack spacer, such as the DCM chassis or RCMM patch
panel.
__ 1. Using the following hardware, attach the wire shield to the rack spacer
using the large holes in the vertical center of the wire shield. Refer to
step 1 in Figure 3.69, page 7-125.
Table 3.8 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield to Rack Spacer
Quantity Item Description
5 Washer
#10, STL, Z/C
5 Flat head Phillips-head screws
FHMS, 10 32 x .500 LG, PHIL, STL, Z/C
5 Hex nut
10 32, KEPS, STL, Z/C
7100
6" RRS 3
rd
Party
Equipment
6" RRS
E
n
d

o
f

A
i
s
l
e
Wire Shield
Gap in Line Up
Tellabs
OTS
This figure shows a
gap as an example.
Also use this
procedure if a gap
does not exist
between the
Tellabs 7100 OTS
and the third party
equipment.
front
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-127
__ 2. Using the following hardware, attach the wire shield to the base of the
rack spacer. Refer to step 2 in Figure 3.69, page 7-125.
__ 3. (If not using the rear cover panel) If L-brackets for a rack spacer
(Tellabs part number 149.0244) are used, use the following hardware
to secure the L-brackets to the wire shield and to the rear flange on the
equipment relay rack. Use two screws per L-bracket. Refer to step 3
in Figure 3.69, page 7-125. For orientation of the L-brackets, refer to
Figure 3.71 Attaching the L-Bracket to the 149.0342 Wire Shield (Top View)
Table 3.9 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield to Base of Spacer
2 Washer
3/8 inch, STL, Z/C
2 Round head Phillips bolts
RHMS, 3/8 16 x .75 LG, PHIL, STL, Z/C
2 Hex nut
3/8 16, KEPS, STL, Z/C
Table 3.10 Hardware for Using L-Brackets
6 Flat head Phillips screws
rear
L-bracket
wire
shield
relay rack
flange (front)
screw
screw
6 inches
shelves
spacer
23 inches
Page 7-128 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 4. Dispose of the remaining hardware that is not used.
__ 5. (optional) Attach the relay rack edging material (Tellabs part number
14.9087) to the front edge of the wire shield. Press the open edge of
the edging material onto the exposed edge of the wire shield.
Go to Installing the Wire Shield Extension, page 7-130.
Installing the Wire Shield Between Two Rack Spacers
3.137 Follow this procedure to install the wire shield between two rack spacers
of any size. The rack spacer may be between two Tellabs 7100 OTS racks that use
rack spacers; or it may be used between a Tellabs 7100 OTS and a third party
equipment rack that uses a rack spacer. This scenario typically uses Tellabs part
number 149.0408 when a barrier between the Tellabs 7100 spacers is typically not
required and 149.0432 when separating a Tellabs 7100 spacer and a third party
equipment spacer. Refer to Figure 3.72, page 7-128.
Figure 3.72 Wire Shield Between Rack Spacers
Table 3.11 Unused Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield
5 Hex head screws
HHMS, 10 32 x .625 LG, STL, Z/C
2 Hex head screws
HHCS, 3/8 16 x .75 LG, STL, Z/C
7100
6" RRS 5" RS 3
rd
Party
Equipment
6" RRS
E
n
d

o
f

A
i
s
le
Wire Shield
7100
6" RRS 6" RRS
E
n
d

o
f

A
i
s
le
Wire Shield
7100
6" RRS
Tellabs
OTS
Tellabs
OTS
Tellabs
OTS
(149.0342)
(149.0408)
front
front
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-129
__ 1. Using the following hardware, attach the wire shield to the two rack
spacers using the large holes in the vertical center of the wire shield.
Refer to step 1 in Figure 3.69, page 7-125.
__ 2. Using the following hardware, attach the wire shield to the base of the
rack spacer. Use the 3/8-inch hex head bolt due to constrained space
in the base of the rack spacer and the need to use an open end
wrench-and-socket set. Refer to step 2 in Figure 3.69, page 7-125.
__ 3. (If not using the rear cover panel) If L-brackets for a rack spacer
(Tellabs part number 149.0244) are used, use the following hardware
to secure the L-brackets to the wire shield and to the rear flange on the
equipment relay rack. Use two screws per L-bracket. Refer to step 3
5 Washer
#10, STL, Z/C
5 Hex head screws
HHMS, 10 32 x .625 LG, STL, Z/C
5 Hex nut
Table 3.13 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield to Base of Spacer
2 Washer
3/8 inch, STL, Z/C
2 Hex head screws
HHCS, 3/8 16 x .75 LG, STL, Z/C
2 Hex nut
3/8 32, KEPS, STL, Z/C
Table 3.14 Hardware for Using L-Brackets
Page 7-130 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.73 Attaching the L-Bracket to the 149.0408 Wire Shield (Top View)
__ 5. (optional) Attach the relay rack edging material to the front edge of the
wire shield. Press the open edge of the edging material onto the
exposed edge of the wire shield.
Go to Installing the Wire Shield Extension, page 7-130.
Installing the Wire Shield Extension
3.138 The wire shield extension kit is used with the wire shield for protecting and
separating the racks and fiber optical cables.
__ flat head screwdriver
rear
L-bracket
wire
shield
relay rack
flange (front)
screw
screw
6 inches
shelves
spacer
23 inches
2 Round head Phillips bolts
RHMS, 3/8 16 x .75 LG, PHIL, STL, Z/C
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-131
Materials 3.141 Obtain the following materials, available separately. Refer to Figure 3.74,
page 7-131.
__ wire shield extension (Tellabs part number 149.035X, used with wire
shield 149.0342)
or
__ wire shield extension (Tellabs part number 149.042X, used with wire
shield 149.0408)
Where:
X = Length in inches, as follows:
0 = 6 inch
1 = 12 inch
2 = 20 inch
3 = 24 inch
4 = 30 inch
5 = 36 inch
6 = 54 inch
7 = 56 inch.
__ splice plate and mounting hardware, contained in the 149.035X kit
__ (optional) relay rack edge guard (Tellabs part number 14.9087)
Figure 3.74 Locations for Connecting the Wire Shield Extension
The wire shield splice plate
secures the wire shield to the
wire shield extension plate.
wire shield extension plate
wire shield splice plate
step 2. Three sets to two holes are
used for securing L-brackets to
attach the wire shield extension to
the relay rack extension. Quantities
depend on the extension height.
step 3. These two holes are used to
attach the splice plate, which joins the
wire shield extension to the wire shield.
step 1.
These four
holes
connect the
wire shield to
the rack
spacer or
relay rack.
Quantities
depend on
the
extension
height
Page 7-132 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Action 3.142 The wire shield extension is installed adjacent to the rack spacer extension
or the relay rack extension. The quantity of hardware that is used to install the wire
shield extension depends on the height of the wire shield extension. Refer to Figure
3.75, page 7-132.
Figure 3.75 Wire Shield Splice Plate to Install the Wire Shield Extension
3.143 Following are possible scenarios for using a wire shield and wire shield
extension. Refer to the appropriate procedure for the appropriate scenario:
Installing the Wire Shield Extension Next to Third Party NE,
page 7-133
Installing the Wire Shield Extension Between Two Rack Spacers,
page 7-135
wire shield extension
splice plate joins the
to the wire shield for
proper alignment
is installed above the
wire shield
(optional)
relay rack
edge guard on
the front edge
of the wire
shield protects
fiber cables
from sharp
edges
wire shield
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-133
Installing the Wire Shield Extension Next to Third Party NE
3.144 Follow this procedure to install the wire shield extension adjacent to the
rack spacer panel, where the equipment line-up contains a Tellabs 7100 relay rack
and a third-party equipment rack. There may or may not be a gap between the
Tellabs 7100 OTS and the third party equipment. Tellabs part number 149.0342 is
typically used in this type of installation. Refer to Figure 3.76, page 7-133.
Figure 3.76 Wire Shield Next to Third-Party Equipment With or Without Gap
Note: In this scenario, do not use the hex head screws, HHS 1032 x .625 LG,
STL Z/C hardware. The screws are too long and would interfere with the
equipment mounted in the rack spacer, such as the DCM chassis or
RCMM patch panel.
__ 1. Using the following hardware, attach the wire shield extension to the
rack spacer extension or relay rack extension using the large holes in
the vertical center of the wire shield. The quantity of hardware that is
used to install the wire shield extension depends on the height of the
wire shield extension. Refer to step 1 in Figure 3.74, page 7-131.
rack spacer extension. Refer to step 2 in Figure 3.74, page 7-131.
4 Washer
#10, STL, Z/C
4 Hex nut
Table 3.17 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield Extension
4 Flat head Phillips bolts
7100
6" RRS 3
rd
Party
Equipment
6" RRS
E
n
d

o
f

A
i
s
l
e
Wire Shield
Gap in Line Up
Tellabs
OTS
(149.0342)
Page 7-134 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. (If not using the rear cover panel) If L-brackets are used, use the
following hardware to secure the L-brackets to the wire shield and to
the rear flange on the equipment relay rack extension. The quantity of
hardware that is used to install the wire shield extension depends on
the height of the wire shield extension. Use two screws per L-bracket.
Refer to step 3 in Figure 3.74, page 7-131. For orientation of the
L-brackets, refer to Figure 3.77, page 7-134.
Figure 3.77 Attaching the L-Bracket to the Wire Shield Extension (Top View)
wire shield extension. Press the open edge of the edging material onto
the exposed edge of the wire shield extension.
Go to Installing the Rear Cover Panel Assembly, page 7-139
.
Table 3.18 Hardware for Attaching L-Brackets to Extension
rear
L-bracket
wire shield
(149.0342)
relay rack
flange (front)
screw
screw
6 inches
shelves
spacer
23 inches
Table 3.19 Unused Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield Extension
4 Hex head screws
HHMS, 10 32 x .625 LG, STL, Z/C
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-135
Installing the Wire Shield Extension Between Two Rack Spacers
3.145 Follow this procedure to install the wire shield extension between two rack
spacers of any size. The rack spacer may be between two Tellabs 7100 OTS racks
that use rack spacers; or it may be used between a Tellabs 7100 OTS and a third
party equipment rack that uses a rack spacer. Refer to Figure 3.78, page 7-135.
Figure 3.78 Wire Shield Next to Third-Party Equipment With Rack Spacer
rack spacer extension using the large holes in the vertical center of the
wire shield. Refer to step 1 in Figure 3.74, page 7-131.
__ 2. Using the following hardware, attach the splice plate to the wire shield
and wire shield extension. Refer to step 2 in Figure 3.74, page 7-131.
Table 3.20 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield Extension to Spacer Extension
4 Washer
#10, STL, Z/C
4 Hex head screws
HHMS, 10 32 x .625 LG, STL, Z/C
4 Hex nut
Table 3.21 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield Extension
7100
6" RRS 5" RS 3
rd
Party
Equipment
6" RRS
E
n
d

o
f

A
i
s
le
Wire Shield
7100
6" RRS 6" RRS
E
n
d

o
f

A
i
s
le
Wire Shield
7100
6" RRS
Tellabs
OTS
Tellabs
OTS
Tellabs
OTS
(149.0342)
(149.0408)
Page 7-136 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. (optional) If L-brackets are used, use the following hardware to secure
the L-brackets to the wire shield extension and to the rear flange on
the equipment relay rack extension. The quantity of hardware that is
used to install the wire shield extension depends on the height of the
wire shield extension. Use two screws per L-bracket. Refer to step 3
Figure 3.79 Attaching the L-Bracket to the Wire Shield (Top View)
wire shield extension. Press the open edge of the edging material onto
the exposed edge of the wire shield extension.
Go to Finalizing the Relay Rack Framework Installation, page 7-137.
Table 3.22 Hardware for Attaching Wire Shield to L-Brackets
rear
L-bracket
wire shield
(149.0432)
relay rack
flange (front)
screw
screw
6 inches
shelves
spacer
23 inches
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-137
Finalizing the Relay Rack Framework Installation
3.146 This section describes how to secure the Tellabs 7100 OTS relay rack
framework. After building the relay rack framework, follow these steps to level all
parts of the framework and tighten to the appropriate level of torque. Refer to
__ spirit level, 24 inch (or metric equivalent)
__ hammer
Materials 3.149 Shims are required to perform this procedure.
Action 3.150 Follow these steps to secure the relay rack framework:
__ 1. Tighten the screws on the spacer panel.
__ 2. Ensure the relay rack is level. If necessary, use shims and the leveling
screws to level the relay rack. Refer to Figure 3.80, page 7-138.
DANGER:
Personal injury can result from an unsupported relay rack. Never remove the
temporary top support straps before the installation of the top support hardware
is completed in Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support, page 7-51.
Page 7-138 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Retract and lock the leveling screws.
__ 4. Manually tighten the floor anchor bolts and then tighten the relay
rack-joining hardware securely.
__ 5. Torque all the screws on the following equipment, refer to Torquing
Force Tables, page 7-22:
__ relay rack framework
__ overhead support
__ 1-inch (25.4 mm) gray support pipe
Warning:
The leveling screws must be retracted and locked after relay rack leveling is
completed. Ensure that all required relay rack alignment and leveling is
complete. Ensure that the required shims are in place under the relay rack base
and that the four leveling screws are fully retracted and locked prior to the final
tightening of the anchor bolts. The final tightening of the anchor bolts without
retracting and locking the leveling screws results in relay rack instability and
possible damage to the relay rack. Zone-4 earthquake compliance is violated if
leveling screws are not fully retracted.
leveling feet
(top view)
locknut
leveling foot
adjusting nut
square end can
be used to adjust
leveler
bottom of rack
leveling foot
(side view)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-139
__ bolts on the v-clamps
__ clamps on the relay rack spacer (RRS)
__ spacer panel
__ end shield
__ wire shield and extension
__ 6. Reinstall the bottom fan assembly that was removed in Installing the
Relay Rack Framework, page 7-46. Refer to Tellabs 7100/7100N
Maintenance Using TL1, for fan assembly installation procedures.
Go to Installing the Rear Cover Panel Assembly, page 7-139.
Installing the Rear Cover Panel Assembly
Note: This procedure does not apply to racks with 83.07100B-60 HCSSs.
3.151 This section describes how to install the rear cover panel kits that enclose
the rear of the 6-inch or 10-inch spacer panel for protecting the optical fiber cables.
The design of the rear cover assembly accommodates aligning the enclosure with
the duct downspouts from the environment. There is one 6-inch rear cover panel
kit (Tellabs part number 180.0517) and one 10-inch rear cover panel kit (Tellabs
part number 180.0757).
3.152 The rear cover assembly kits are designed to allow for growth of the
Tellabs 7100 OTS line-up with maximum flexibility and re-use of the common
components. Refer to Figure 3.81, page 7-140.
Page 7-140 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.81 Locations for Connecting the Wire Shield to the Rack and Spacer
Rack End Aisle Rear Cover Panel Kits
3.153 There is a rack end aisle cover panel kit for the 6-inch rack spacer panels
(Tellabs part number 180.0517) and for the 10-inch rack spacer panels (Tellabs
part number 180.0757). These kits have several uses, refer to paragraph 3.154,
page 7-140 through 3.156, page 7-141.
3.154 The rack end aisle rear cover panel kits are used with an end of the aisle
panel (Tellabs part number 14.90450-0 or 14.9097). Refer to Figure 3.82,
page 7-141.
step 2. These two holes on the
the wire shield to the base of the
relay rack or rack spacer.
step 1. These five holes are
used to secure the wire shield to
the relay rack side flange or rack
spacer.
The cut-out area allows
space for the 1-inch gray pipe
at the top of the relay rack.
step 3. These sets of
holes are used to secure
the wire shield to the rear
cover panel (middle end
shield adapter and bottom
end shield adapter)
These two holes at the top of the
the splice plate for the wire
shield extension.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-141
Figure 3.82 Rack End Aisle Cover Panel Kit with End Panel or Wire Shield
3.155 The rack end aisle rear cover panel kits are used when a wire shield
(Tellabs part number 149.0342) is mounted on one side of a rack spacer assembly,
and a Tellabs 7100 NE is located on the opposite side of the rack spacer assembly.
Figure 3.83 Rack End Aisle Cover Panel Kit with End Panel or Wire Shield
3.156 The rack end aisle rear cover panel kits are used when two spacer panels
are used between two Tellabs 7100 relay racks. Order 2 rear cover panel kits, one
for each spacer panel. Refer to Figure 3.84, page 7-141.
Figure 3.84 Rack End Aisle Cover Panel Kit with Two RRS and Wire Shield
Tellabs
System
7100
end of aisle panel
rack spacer panel
end of aisle panel cover (rear cover)
One Tellabs 7100
equipment rack, next
to a rack spacer,
ending with end of
aisle panel
Tellabs
System
7100
wire shield (140.0342)
rack spacer panel
third
NE
party
One Tellabs
7100
equipment rack
is located next
to one rack
spacer, with a
wire shield
separating the
spacer from a
third party
equipment rack
Tellabs
System
7100
wire shield
149.0408
rack spacer panels
Two Tellabs
7100
equipment
racks, next to
two rack
spacers with a
wire shield
separating the
two spacers
Tellabs
System
7100
Page 7-142 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Growing NEs at End of Aisle
or Wire Shield
3.157 Typically, installing an additional bay in a line-up position that uses the rack
end aisle cover panel kit (Tellabs part numbers 149.0517 or 149.0757) requires
relocating the wire shield or end of aisle panel to the opposite side of the new NE
and adding fiber spools to both sides of the new NE along with fiber radius controls
on the new rack spacer.
3.158 The top box rear cover plate and rear cover panels from the original
position are moved to the new end of aisle position. A new top box rear cover plate
and new rear cover panels are then installed across the rack spacer that previously
joined the end of aisle panel or wire shield.
Requirements 3.159 Read the following requirements and guidelines:
Before starting this procedure, all equipment racks and rack spacers
must be installed.
If applicable, the 1-inch gray pipe support that is used at the top of the
equipment racks must be installed before starting the procedure.
Coordinate installing any fiber duct downspouts from the overhead
environment when installing the top box assembly, the fiber duct
mounting bracket, and the rack spacer extension bracket.
3.160 When performing this procedure, perform each step in the order in which
__ # 3 Phillips-head screwdriver
__ # 2 Phillips-head screwdriver
__ # 2 Phillips-head screwdriver, stubby (shaft no longer than 4 inches)
__ 5/16-inch nut driver or socket set with 5/16 inch socket
Materials 3.162 The following tables show the piece parts included in the Rear Cover Panel
kits:
__ Table 3.24, page 7-143 shows the material list for both 6-inch rack
cover panel kits (Tellabs part number 180.0517).
__ Table 3.25, page 7-147 shows the material list for the 10-inch rack
cover panel kit (Tellabs part number 180.0757).
Note 1: All equipment that is shipped with the Rack Cover Panel Kits may not be
used. Some components are optional, depending on the specific site
requirements and environment.
Note 2: Rack Cover Panel Kit piece parts cannot be ordered separately.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-143
Table 3.24 Material List for 6-Inch End Aisle/Wire Shield Cover Panel Kit
Quantity Item Description Tellabs Part Number
Graphic View
(representations, not to
scale)
1 rack spacer top box
(Use if there is space in
the overhead
environment)
104.0040
6 rack fiber storage spool
(Use to route fiber from
back of rack to front of
rack)
104.0041
1 rack top fiber guide
(diverter)
104.0042
3 bracket, rack radius
control
110.0579
1 plate, front rack spacer
top box
110.0582
Page 7-144 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
1 bracket, rack spacer duct
mounting
110.0583
1 bracket, rack spacer
extension mounting
110.0584
1 bracket, end shield
adapter - top, with PEM
nuts
110.0588
adapter - middle
Note: identify by 5 holes
in a pyramid design at the
bottom of the adapter
bracket
110.0589
adapter - bottom
Note: identify by 6 holes
in parallel design at the
bottom of the adapter
bracket
110.0590
Table 3.24 Material List for 6-Inch End Aisle/Wire Shield Cover Panel Kit (Continued)
Graphic View
scale)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-145
1 plate, rear rack end aisle
top box
110.0591
3 rack end aisle cover
panel - order one set for
each side of the wire
shield
110.0592
adapter - top without
PEM nuts
For use in a 2-rack
spacer application
110.0610
21 Screw, 8 32 x 3/8 PLP
PN w/nylon patch
140.0261
12 Screw, 12 24 x 3/8 PLP
FLT UC SS
140.0262
24 inches Edge guard grommet 160.0551
10 Screw, 12 24 x 5/16 SLT
HX WSH SEM
40.0253
Graphic View
scale)
Page 7-146 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
24 Screw, 12 24 x 1/2 SLT
HX WSH SEM
40.0167
10 washer, flat 8 SS 42.0104
Graphic View
scale)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-147
Table 3.25 Material List for 10-inch Spacer Rack Cover Panel Kit
Graphic View (representations,
not to scale)
1 rack spacer top box
(Use if there is space in the
overhead environment)
104.0067
1 rack top fiber guide (diverter) 104.0068
3 rear rack cover panel -
order one set for each rack
spacer
110.1103
1 plate, front rack spacer top box 110.1098
Page 7-148 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
1 plate, rear rack end aisle top box 110.1099
1 bracket, rack spacer duct
mounting
110.1100
1 bracket, rack spacer extension
mounting
110.1101
1 bracket, end shield adapter - top,
with PEM nuts
110.0588
1 bracket, end shield adapter -
middle
Note: identify by 5 holes in a
pyramid design at the bottom of
the adapter bracket
110.0589
Table 3.25 Material List for 10-inch Spacer Rack Cover Panel Kit (Continued)
not to scale)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-149
1 bracket, end shield adapter -
bottom
Note: identify by 6 holes in
parallel design at the bottom of
the adapter bracket
110.0590
1 bracket, end shield adapter - top
without PEM nuts
For use in a 2-rack spacer
application
110.0610
21 Screw, 8 32 x 3/8 PLP PN
w/nylon patch
140.0261
16 Screw, 12 24 x 3/8 PLP FLT UC
SS
140.0262
86
inches
Edge guard grommet 160.0551
10 Screw, 12 24 x 5/16 SLT HX
WSH SEM
40.0253
29 Screw, 12 24 x 1/2 SLT HX
WSH SEM
40.0167
not to scale)
Page 7-150 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Go to Installing the End Shield Adapters, page 7-150.
Installing the End Shield Adapters
3.163 The end shield adapters are brackets that provide a surface for attaching
the rear door panels to a spacer or end of aisle panel, both of which lack a flat
surface for attaching the door panel.
Note: Complete this procedure only if using kit 180.0517 or 180.0757 End
Aisle/Wire Shield Rear Cover Panel Kit. Refer to Rack End Aisle Rear
Cover Panel Kits, page 7-140.
3.164 Figure 3.85, page 7-150 shows the location of the end shield adapter
brackets.
Figure 3.85 Location of End Shield Adapter Brackets
10 washer, flat 8 SS 42.0104
not to scale)
Tellabs
System
7100
Tellabs
System
7100
third
NE
party
Tellabs
System
7100
Tellabs
System
7100
wire shield application (C)
end-of-aisle application (D) 2-spacer with wire shield application (B)
end shield adapter brackets
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-151
Materials 3.165 If using the 180.0517 or 180.0757 kit, obtain the following materials and
complete these steps:
Attaching the Bottom End
Shield Adapter
3.166 Using the #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, attach the end shield adapters on
the spacer or end of aisle panel in the location shown in Figure 3.86, page 7-152.
The end shield adapters are installed in the Top, Middle and Bottom of the rack
spacer. This procedure starts by installing the Bottom end shield adapter.
Note: The bottom end shield adapter bracket is identified by a 6-hole
configuration at the bottom of the bracket. A middle end shield adapter is
identified by a 5-hole configuration at the bottom of the bracket.
__ 1. Position the 110.0590 bottom end shield adapter on the wire shield or
end of aisle panel with the PEM nuts on the outside, and insert the
screws in the screw holes through the wire shield or end of aisle panel
toward the PEM nuts.
For a 2-spacer application, refer to Figure 3.86, page 7-152.
For a wire shield of end-of-aisle application, refer to Figure 3.87,
page 7-153 and Figure 3.88, page 7-154.
__ 2. Use the 5/16 inch nut driver or socket wrench to tighten the screws and
attach the end shield adapter to the wire shield or end-of-aisle panel.
Do not fully tighten at this time.
Table 3.26 Components and Hardware for Installing Door Latch Brackets
Component
Scenario B
Two Spacer Panels
Scenario C
Wire Shield
Scenario D
End of Aisle
End shield adapter - top with
PEM nuts, 110.0588
3 - hex head screws,
12 24 x 1/2 SLT HX
WSH SEM, Tellabs part
number 40.0167
3 - flat head screws,
12 24 x 3/8 PLP FLT
UC SS, Tellabs part
number 140.0262
3 - hex head screws,
12 24 x 5/16 SLT HX
WSH SEM, Tellabs part
number 40.0253
End shield adapter - top
without PEM nuts, 110.0610
not used in this
application
not used in this
application
End shield adapter - middle,
110.0589
4 - screws, 40.0167 3 - screws, 140.0262 3 - screws, 40.0253
End shield adapter - bottom,
110.0590
4 - screws, 40.0167 4 - screws, 140.0262 4 - screws, 40.0253
Page 7-152 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.86 Attaching 110.0590 Bottom End Shield Adapter in 2 Spacer (B) Application
__ 3. Attach the bottom end shield adapter in a wire shield (C) or aisle panel
(D) applications. Refer to Figure 3.87, page 7-153.
Scenario B:
two40.0167 screws
Scenario B:
two40.0167 screws
end shield - bottom
110.0590
screw holes with
PEM nuts
Insert screws in
holes marked with
arrows (blue);
remainder are
unused
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-153
Figure 3.87 Lower Edge of 110.0590 End Shield Adapter-Bottom in Wire Shield (C) or Aisle Panel (D) Applications
Scenario C:
two140.0262 screws
Scenario D:
two40.0253 screws
end-of-aisle panel
end shield adapter
note post between end
shield bracket and end
of aisle panel, close to
mounting holes
Page 7-154 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.88 Top Edge of 110.0590 Bottom End Shield Adapter in Wire Shield (C) or End-of-Aisle (D) Applications
Attaching the Middle End
Shield Adapter
Note: The bottom end shield adapter bracket is identified by a 6-hole
configuration at the bottom of the bracket. A middle end shield adapter is
identified by a 5-hole configuration at the bottom of the bracket.
__ 1. Position the 110.0590 bottom end shield adapter on the wire shield or
end-of-aisle panel, and align the screws with the screw holes.
For a 2-spacer application, refer to Figure 3.89, page 7-155 and
For a wire shield or end-of-aisle application, refer to Figure 3.91,
page 7-157.
__ 2. Insert the screws through the screw holes with PEM nuts.
__ 3. Depending on the scenario, perform one of the following substeps:
screw locations for top edge of
bottom end shield adapter, 110.0590
Scenario C:
two140.0262 screws
Scenario D:
two40.0253 screws
middle
bottom
middle end shield
adapter, 110.0589
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-155
__ 3.1 For Scenario B, use the 5/16 inch nut driver or the
socket wrench. In the two spacer application (scenario
B), attach the end shield adapters to the right side of
the left spacer panel and the left side of the right
spacer panel, sandwiching the wire shield between
them. Refer to Figure 3.90, page 7-156. Do not fully
tighten at this time.
__ 3.2 For Scenarios C and D, use the #3 Phillips-head
screwdriver to tighten the screws to attach the end
shield adapter to the wire shield or end-of-aisle panel.
Do not fully tighten at this time.
For a wire shield (scenario C) and end of aisle (scenario
D) applications, use the #3 Phillips-head screwdriver to
attach the bottom end shield adapter. Refer to Figure
3.91, page 7-157.
Figure 3.89 Attaching 110.0589 Middle End Shield Adapter in 2 Spacer (B) Applications
Scenario B:
two40.0167 screws
Scenario B:
two40.0167 screws
end shield - middle
110.0589
end shield - top
110.0588 or 110.0610
end shield - bottom
110.0590
screw holes with
PEM nuts
Insert screws in
holes marked with
arrows (blue);
remainder are
unused
Page 7-156 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.90 Attaching the 110.0590 Bottom End Shield Adapters in 2 Spacer Application (Scenario B)
Example Shows 6-inch Spacer
relay rack
end
shield
adapter -
bottom
left
6-inch
rack
spacer
cutouts
for
fiber
cables
relay rack
wire
shield
right
6-inch
rack
spacer
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-157
Figure 3.91 Attaching 110.0589 Middle End Shield Adapter in Wire Shield (C) or End of Aisle (D) Applications
Attaching the Top End Shield
Adapter, With/Without PEM
Nuts
__ 4. Position the 110.0588 top end shield adapter with PEM nuts and align
the screw holes. Refer to Figure 3.92, page 7-158.
__ 5. If using a 2-spacer application (Scenario B), position the 110.0610 top
end shield adapter on the other side of the wire shield, opposite the
110.0588 top end shield adapter. Thread the screws first through the
holes in the 110.0610 without PEM nuts, then through the 110.0588
with PEM nuts. Refer to Figure 3.93, page 7-158. The view shown in
the figure may be reversed with the PEMs on the left and the screws
threading from right to left.
__ 6. Use the #3 Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the screws and attach
the end shield adapter to the spacer or end of aisle panel. Do not fully
Scenarios C and D:
1 - screw
(see part numbers
below)
Scenario C:
two140.0262 screws
Scenario D:
two40.0253 screws
end-of-aisle panel
end shield adapter
screw holes with
PEM nuts
Insert screws in
holes marked with
arrows (blue);
remainder are
unused
Page 7-158 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.92 Attaching the 110.0588/110.0610 Top End Shield Adapters to Spacer or End-of-Aisle Panel (B, C, D)
Figure 3.93 Position of 110.0588/110.0610 Top End Shield Adapters in Two Rack Spacer Application (B)
Note 1: Figure 3.94, page 7-159 shows the middle and top end shield adapters
as they are installed in a 2-spacer application. The dotted outline shows
the location of the 110.0610 top end shield adapter without PEM nuts,
which is attached to the left spacer panel, but is blocked from view in the
figure.
Note 2: In a 2-spacer application (scenario B), the top adapter with PEMs may
be located in either the left or right spacer, as long as the top adapter
without PEMs is located in the other spacer.
Scenario B:
three40.0167 screws
Scenario C:
three140.0262 screws
Scenario D:
three40.0253 screws
top end shield adapter,
110.0588 w/PEMs
In 2-spacer site, also
use 110.0610 w/o
PEMs
direction of screws
left rack spacer right rack spacer
110.0588
top end shield
adapter with
PEM nuts
110.0610
top end shield
adapter without
PEM nuts
middle end shield adapter
wire shield (149.0342)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-159
Figure 3.94 View of Top of Rack Spacer with Top and Middle End Shield Adapters in a 2-Spacer Application (B)
3.167 Select one of the following procedures:
If using 6-inch spacers, go to Installing the Radius Control Plates,
page 7-160.
If using 10-inch spacers, go to Attaching the Edge Guards (Optional),
page 7-161.
end shield
adapter with
PEMs, 110.0588
end shield
adapter -
middle
110.0589
rack spacer
rack lacing bracket
location of
end shield
adapter
without
PEMs on left
side of wire
shield,
110.0610
Page 7-160 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Radius Control Plates
3.168 Skip this procedure if using 10-inch spacer panels.
3.169 Obtain the following materials and complete these steps:
Materials __ threefiber radius control plates (Tellabs part number 110.0579)
__ ninepan head screws, eight32 x 3/8 PLP PN w/nylon patch (Tellabs
part number 140.0261) with 3 per radius control plate
Action __ 1. Attach one radius control plate directly on the lacing brackets, using
three screws for each plate. Refer to Figure 3.95, page 7-160.
__ 2. Use the #3 Phillips-head screwdriver to loosely tighten the screw.
Figure 3.95 Installing the Radius Control Plate in the Rack Spacer
Go to Attaching the Edge Guards (Optional), page 7-161.
lacing bracket
radius control plate
screws
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-161
Attaching the Edge Guards (Optional)
Materials __ (optional) edge guard grommets (Tellabs part number 160.0551)
Note: If using a wire shield application, apply the edge guard only to the side
opposite the wire shield.
Action __ 1. Perform one of the following substeps:
__ 1.1 If the configuration has 6-inch spacer: Cut and position
an edge guard grommet on the rear edge of the rack
spacer, next to the fiber opening in the spacer, and
immediately above the radius control plate and lacing
bracket. Refer to Figure 3.96, page 7-161.
__ 1.2 If the configuration has 10-inch spacer: Cut and position
an edge guard grommet on the rear edge of the rack
spacer, next to the fiber opening in the spacer, and on
the top of the lacing bracket. Refer to Figure 3.97,
page 7-162.
__ 2. Press the open side of the edge guard grommet onto the rear edge of
the rack spacer until the edge guard remains attached to the rear edge
of the rack spacer.
__ 3. Repeat these steps for the top, middle, and bottom fiber openings.
Figure 3.96 Applying the Edge Guard Grommets to 6-Inch Spacer
Configurations
edge guard
fiber spool
radius
control plate
lacing
bracket
wire shield
grommet
Page 7-162 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.97 Applying the Edge Guard Grommets to 10-Inch Spacer Configurations
Go to Installing the Top Box, page 7-162.
Installing the Top Box
3.171 Install the top box if the overhead environment is over 7 feet (2133.6 mm)
and there is adequate space between the top of the rack and the overhead
equipment.
Note: All equipment that is shipped with the Rack Cover Panel Kits may not be
Materials __ onerack spacer top box for configurations with 6-inch rack spacers
or
__ onerack spacer top box for configurations with 10-inch rack spacers
__ threepan head screws, eight32 x 3/8 PLP PN w/nylon patch (Tellabs
part number 140.0261)
apply edge
guard grommets
along edges
apply edge guard
grommet along edge
of lacing bracket
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-163
Action __ 1. Attach the top box to the top of the relay rack spacer. Use 3 screws in
rear of the rack spacer. Refer to Figure 3.98, page 7-163.
__ 2. Use the #3 Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the screw. Do not fully
Figure 3.98 Attaching the Top Box to the Rack Spacer (Rear View)
Go to Installing the Rack Top Fiber Guide (Diverter), page 7-163.
Installing the Rack Top Fiber Guide (Diverter)
Materials __ onerack top fiber guide (diverter) for configurations with 6-inch
spacer (Tellabs part number 104.0042)
or
__ onerack top fiber guide (diverter) for configurations with 10-inch
spacer (Tellabs part number 104.0068)
__ twopan head screws, eight32 x 3/8 PLP PN w/nylon patch (Tellabs
Action __ 1. Attach the rack top fiber guide (diverter) to the rack spacer above the
upper space allotted for the RCMM patch panel. Refer to Figure 3.99,
page 7-164.
__ 2. Use the #3 Phillips-head screwdriver to loosely tighten the screw.
top box
screws
Page 7-164 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.99 Rack Top Fiber Guide (Diverter)
3.174 Select one of the following procedures:
If the configurations contains 6-inch spacers, go to Installing the Fiber
Spools, page 7-164.
If the configurations contains 10-inch spacers, go to Installing the Door
Cover Screws, page 7-166.
Installing the Fiber Spools
3.175 Skip this procedure if using 10-inch spacer panels.
3.176 The fiber spools are for routing fiber cables from the rear of the spacer
panel to the front of the rack.
Note: All equipment that is shipped with the Rack Cover Panel Kits may not be
Materials __ If using the wire shield, 3 - fiber spools (Tellabs part number 104.0041)
to attach to the back of the rack
__ sixflat head screws, twelve24 x 3/8 PLP FLT UC SS (Tellabs
__ If not using the wire shield, 6 - fiber spools (Tellabs part number
104.0041) to attach to the back of both sides of the rack.
__ twelveflat head screws, twelve24 x 3/8 PLP FLT UC SS
rack top
fiber
guide
(diverter)
screws
top box
RCMM patch panel
Tellabs part number 104.0068
Tellabs part number 104.0042
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-165
Note: Tellabs recommends mounting the fiber spools in the following holes on
the relay rack, but it is allowable to vary up or down one or two holes.
Action __ 1. Position the fiber spool in the following positions, located on the rack
flange. Refer to Figure 3.100, page 7-165:
- for three spools, use 2 holes for each spool: 7, 8; 29, 30; 57, 58
- for six spools, use the same 2 holes for each spool on the other
side of the rack spacer, so the spools are at the same level
__ 2. Using a #3 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten 2 screws into the top and
bottom holes on the fiber spool. Do not fully tighten at this time.
Figure 3.100 Installing Fiber Spools in the Rack Spacer
Go to Installing the Door Cover Screws, page 7-166.
fiber
spool
fiber
spool
end of
aisle
panel
wire
shield
screws
rack
flange
Page 7-166 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Door Cover Screws
Materials __ If using kit, Tellabs part number 180.0517, use sixpan head screws,
twelve24 x 1/2 HX WSH SEM (Tellabs part number 40.0167) two
screws per rear cover panel
__ If using kit, Tellabs part number 180.0757, use sixpan head screws,
twelve24 x 1/2 HX WSH SEM (Tellabs part number 40.0167) two
screws per rear cover panel
Action __ 1. Using the 5/16 nut driver or socket kit, insert and tighten one screw in
each of the following locations on the rack flange. Do not fully tighten
the screws at this time. Refer to Figure 3.101, page 7-166.
Holes 6, 26, 34, 54, 62, 82 from the bottom of the rack spacer
__ 2. Choose one of the following options:
For kit, Tellabs part number 180.0517, attach the screws to the
rack flange that is opposite from the wire shield.
For kit, Tellabs part number 180.0757, attach the screws to the
rack flange that is opposite from the wire shield.
Note: Do not install the rear door panels at this time. The rear door panels are
attached later in this procedure.
Figure 3.101 Locations of Screws for Hanging the Rear Spacer Door Panels
holes 82,
62,
54,
34,
26,
6
(top to bottom)
rack bottom
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-167
Note: Figure 3.102, page 7-167 shows the door cover screws with and without
the door panel attached. Note that the straight edge of the door panel is
located between the end shield adapter and the wire shield. The flanged
edge of the door panel is attached directly to the rack.
Figure 3.102 Attaching the Door Cover Screws in the Rack Spacer for the Rear Door Panels (Example Shows
6-Inch Spacer Configuration.)
If using the fiber extension, go to Installing the Fiber Extension,
page 7-168.
If not using the fiber extension, go to Installing the Rack Spacer
Duct Mounting Bracket, page 7-169.
end shield adapter
wire shield
door cover screws
Do not attach the
rear door panel at
this time. This figure
shows the door
cover screws with
and without the door
panel attached.
door panel,
straight edge
door panel,
flanged edge
rack posts
Page 7-168 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Fiber Extension
Materials __ onefiber extension (Tellabs part number 110.0584)
or
__ onefiber extension (Tellabs part number 110.1101)
__ fourpan head screws, eight32 x 3/8 PLP PN w/nylon patch (Tellabs
__ fourflat washers, eightSS (Tellabs part number 42.0104)
Action __ 1. Position the fiber extension mounting bracket inside the top box with
the mounting ears facing the rear of the spacer panel, using the two
holes provided. Refer to Figure 3.103, page 7-168.
Figure 3.103 Installing Fiber Extension Mounting Bracket (Rear View),
__ 2. Place one washer on the screw. Figure 3.104, page 7-169 shows the
placement of the washers and the extension bracket orientation to the
rear of the rack.
screws
fiber
extension
top box,
rear view
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-169
Figure 3.104 Washers When Installing the Fiber Extension Bracket
__ 3. Insert the screw into one of the two holes. Tighten the screw, but do
not fully tighten at this time. Repeat for the second hole on this side.
__ 4. Repeat placing the washer and tightening the screws for the other
side.
Go to Installing the Rack Spacer Duct Mounting Bracket, page 7-169.
Installing the Rack Spacer Duct Mounting Bracket
Materials __ onerack spacer duct mounting bracket for 6-inch spacer panel
or
__ onerack spacer duct mounting bracket for 10-inch spacer panel
__ twopan head screws, 8 32 x 3/8 PLP PN w/nylon patch (Tellabs part
number 140.0261)
__ fourflat washers, 8 SS, 42.0104
Tools __ # 2 Phillips-head screwdriver, stubby (shaft no longer than 4 inches)
Action __ 1. Use the appropriate screw type (screws are supplied by the customer)
that is compatible with the fiber duct, and attach the 110.0583 rack
spacer duct mounting bracket to the duct downspout with the three
holes at the top of the plate.
fiber extension
bracket
duct mounting bracket
fiber extension
bracket
Page 7-170 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 2. Position the rack spacer duct mounting bracket inside the top box
assembly with the mounting ears toward the bottom of the rack
spacer. The mounting ears may be oriented either to the front or the
rear, depending on the alignment with the duct downspout. Refer to
Figure 3.105 Attaching the Rack Spacer Duct Mounting Bracket
__ 3. Place two washers on each screw. Figure 3.106, page 7-170 shows
the location of the washers.
Figure 3.106 Washers When Installing the Duct Mounting Bracket
__ 4. Insert the screw into the slot in one of the mounting ears and align it
with one of the two closest holes in the top box that allows the duct
mounting bracket to align with the duct downspout. Tighten the
screws, but do not fully tighten at this time. Repeat for the other
mounting ear. Refer to Figure 3.107, page 7-171.
screws
screws
flanges toward
front of rack
spacer
front or rear of top box
attach to duct
downspout -
screws
customer-supplied
twowashers
twowashers
twowashers
twowashers
fiber extension
bracket
duct mounting bracket
fiber extension
bracket
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-171
__ 5. Adjust the horizontal placement to align with the duct downspout from
the overhead environment.
__ 6. Tighten the screws to maintain the alignment with the duct downspout.
Figure 3.107 Rack Spacer Duct Mounting Bracket, Installed (Rear View)
Go to Installing the Fiber Cables, page 7-171.
Installing the Fiber Cables
Materials __ For the appropriate fiber cables and routing information, refer to
Section 8, Installing Optical Cabling, page 7-408.
__ For more information about routing fibers, refer to Cabling
Methodology, page 7-412.
Action __ 1. Route the fibers to the front of the rack spacer panel for fibers to and
from the RCMM patch panels, the DCM chassis, and the port shelf
patch panel.
__ 2. Route the fibers to the rear of the rack spacer through the cutouts, for
fibers to and from the transponders and the LGX panel. Use the fiber
spools to guide the fibers. Attach additional edge guards (Tellabs part
number 160.0551) as needed to protect the fibers from sharp metal
edges.
Go to Installing the Rear Cover Plate on the Top Box, page 7-172.
slotted hole
top box, rear view
duct mounting
bracket
Page 7-172 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Rear Cover Plate on the Top Box
Materials __ for installations using the wire shield or the end aisle rack cover kit with
6-inch spacers, use rear cover plate (Tellabs part number 110.0591)
__ for installations using the wire shield or the end aisle rack cover kit with
10-inch spacers, use rear cover plate (Tellabs part number 110.1099)
__ eighthex head screws, twelve24 x 1/2 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs
Action __ 1. Insert the screws into the 4 holes in the rear of the top box and 4 holes
in the upper portion of the relay rack.
__ 2. Tighten the screws, but do not fully tighten at this time.
__ 3. Slide the rear cover plate over the screws and lower the rear cover
plate to allow the plate to rest on the screws.
For the rear cover plate (Tellabs part number 110.0581) in
applications without a wire shield, refer to Figure 3.108,
page 7-172.
For the rear cover plate (Tellabs part numbers 110.0591 or
110.1099) in applications with a wire shield, refer to Figure 3.109,
page 7-173.
Figure 3.108 Rear Cover Plate in Applications Without Wire Shield (Example
shows 6-inch spacer.)
relay rack
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-173
Figure 3.109 Rear Cover Plate in Applications With Wire Shield (Example shows
6-inch Spacer.)
Go to Installing the Front Cover Plate on the Top Box, page 7-173.
Installing the Front Cover Plate on the Top Box
Materials __ onefront cover top box for 6-inch spacer panel (Tellabs part number
110.0582)
or
__ onefront cover top box for 10-inch spacer panel (Tellabs part number
110.1098)
__ fourhex head screws, twelve24 x 1/2 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs
Action __ 1. Insert the screws to the front of the top box front panel. Tighten the
screws, but do not fully tighten at this time. Refer to Figure 3.110,
page 7-174.
__ 2. Position the front cover plate with the cut out to accommodate the
standoff for the patch panel top covers.
__ 3. Align the slotted holes in the front cover plate with the screws attached
to the front of the top box.
__ 4. Slide the front cover plate back against the top box front panels to
allow the screws through the slotted holes. Lower the front cover plate
to allow the plate to rest on the screws. Refer to Figure 3.111,
page 7-174.
relay rack
wire
shield
Page 7-174 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.110 Front Cover for Top Box (Example shows 6-inch spacer.)
Figure 3.111 Top Cover for Top Box, Installed
Go to Installing the Installing the Front Edge Guard to the Wire Shield
(Optional), page 7-175.
screws
screws
slotted holes
standoff for patch panel cover
top box
top cover
standoff
clear polymer cover
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-175
Installing the Front Edge Guard to the Wire Shield (Optional)
3.183 (Optional) Use the edge guard when using a wire shield to protect fiber
optic cables from damage from possible sharp edges.
Materials 3.184 Obtain the following materials and complete these steps:
__ edge guard material (Tellabs part number 14.09087)
Action __ 1. Measure an uncut piece of the edge guard to fit the height of the wire
shield.
__ 2. Press the open side of the edge guard onto the edge of the wire shield
until the edge guard remains attached to the front edge of the wire
shield.
Go to Installing the Rear Door Panels, page 7-175.
Installing the Rear Door Panels
Materials 3.185 Obtain the following materials and complete these steps:
__ The end aisle rear cover kit (Tellabs part number 180.0517) contains
threerear door plates with double flanges (Tellabs part number
110.0592)
__ The end aisle rear cover kit (Tellabs part number 180.0757) contains
threerear door plates with double flanges (Tellabs part number
110.1103)
Action __ 1. Position the bottom door panel with the flanges over the door panel
screws so that the bottom of the door panel aligns with the bottom of
the rack spacer. Refer to Figure 3.112, page 7-176.
For the 110.0592 door panel with the single flange, position the
straight edge without the flange next to the wire shield. Position
the flange over the screws on the rack side that is opposite to the
wire shield. You can reverse the top and bottom for the correct
orientation of the door panel (rotate top to bottom). Refer to Figure
3.112, page 7-176 and Figure 3.113, page 7-176.
__ 2. Align the slotted holes on the door panel with the screws attached to
the rear door panel bracket.
__ 3. Slide the door panel back against the spacer flanges to allow the
screws through the slotted holes. Lower the door panel to allow the
plate to rest on the screws. Refer to Figure 3.113, page 7-176.
__ 4. Repeat these steps for the two remaining door panels, positioning the
three panels at the bottom, middle, and top of the spacer panel.
Page 7-176 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 3.112 Position the Rear Door Panels Over the Door Panel Screws (Top View)
Figure 3.113 Attaching the Door Cover Panels in the 2-Spacer Application (Scenario B), (Example shows 6-inch
spacer)
door panel
left rack spacer
right rack spacer
single rack spacer or
end-of-aisle panel
door panels
screw
wire
shield end shield adapter
end shield adapter
post
screw
screws
two rack spacer
post
end shield adapter
wire shield
door cover screws
door panel,
straight edge
door panel,
flanged edge
rack
posts
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-177
Figure 3.114 Rear Door Plates on the Rack Spacer, Shown in a 2 Spacer Line-Up (Example shows 6-inch spacers)
Go to Tightening All Screws, page 7-177.
Tightening All Screws
__ 1. Using a torque screwdriver, adjust each new component and tighten
each screw to the allowable torque setting. For torque settings, refer
to Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
Go to Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks,
page 7-256.
spacer panel
spacer panel
wire shield
screw inserted
through left door
latch bracket,
wire shield and
right door latch
bracket
door latch bracket
door latch bracket
left right
left right
slotted hole in
rear door
panel fits over
post
4. Unpacking and Installing ETSI Equipment Relay Racks Installation
Page 7-178 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
4. Unpacking and Installing ETSI Equipment Relay Racks
4.01 This section contains the procedures for unpacking and installing the
Tellabs 7100 Optical Transport System equipment.
4.02 The following procedures are provided in this section:
Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-183
Installing the Relay Rack Framework, page 7-192
- Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support, page 7-197
- Installing the End Spacer Panel Kit, page 7-203
- Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in an ETSI
- Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (ETSI), page 7-228
Unpacking System Equipment
4.03 This section contains the procedures for unpacking the relay racks.
4.04 Tellabs delivers equipment using two separate shipping methods: crated
and uncrated shipment.
Crated shipment: When shipped overseas, or at the specific request
of the customer, the Tellabs 7100 OTS is shipped crated and the
plug-in modules are packaged and shipped separately.
Uncrated shipment: When shipped domestically, all of the internal
electrical and alarm wiring has already been completed. Depending
upon customer specifications, modules may be shipped in separate
crates.
Note: If the Tellabs 7100 OTS is shipped domestically, then it is not shipped
crated unless otherwise specified.
4.05 Tellabs takes the precaution of ensuring that its equipment relay racks are
packaged in shipping crates with internal cushioning and shipped using reliable
transporters with efficient handling and tracking procedures.
4.06 If equipment is damaged during the delivery process, immediately report
discrepancies to your regional Tellabs office.
requirements are met:
Installation 4. Unpacking and Installing ETSI Equipment Relay Racks
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-179
__ Ensure that a clean, dry, and dust-free area is available before
unpacking the equipment. If required, use a sheet of masonite for floor
protection.
__ Ensure that the installation activities are performed as outlined in this
section.
__ gloves
__ safety goggles
__ metal shears and hammer (if steel metal banding is used to bind the
equipment packing material)
__ two equipment moving dollies (crated shipment)
__ appliance dolly (uncrated shipment)
__ hex head socket wrench set (7/16, 9/16, and 15/16 inch) or impact tool
Protective Materials 4.9 The following material is recommended for use during this procedure:
__ 4 foot x 8 foot x 1/8 inch sheet of Masonite (1220 m x 2440 mm x
3.175 mm)
This masonite sheet is intended to protect the floor from scrapes and
damage that may occur during the unpacking process. The Tellabs
7100 OTS relay rack assembly must be mounted on a concrete floor
or other non-combustible surface in accordance with the local country
electrical codes.
Go to Unpacking the Equipment, page 7-179.
Unpacking the Equipment
4.10 The following requirements and procedures should be followed for both
crated and uncrated shipment.
Warning:
Equipment shelves can be twisted and wire harnesses can be torn from
connectors by improper handling. Use care whenever handling or moving
equipment racks and whenever hoisting equipment using ropes, belts, or cables.
DANGER:
Relay rack equipment is heavy and difficult to handle. To avoid personal injury
or equipment damage, at least four installers are required to remove the relay
rack assembly from the shipping crate.
Page 7-180 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 1. Verify that the equipment contents matches the accompanying
packing list or shipping manifest. Immediately report any
discrepancies between the two documents to your regional Tellabs
office.
Note: If Tellabs is performing the installation, the Tellabs representative who
performs the checklist informs Tellabs Customer Service of any
discrepancies found between the actual equipment contents and the
accompanying packing list or shipping manifest.
__ 2. Inspect the equipment (or shipping container) for evidence of any
transport damage that may have occurred during shipping.
Immediately report any evidence of damage to both Tellabs and to the
shipping carrier to initiate damage claims.
Note 1: Retain the packing material and cartons until all unpacking, installation
procedures and acceptance testing are complete.
Note 2: Repack damaged equipment for return shipment in the original shipping
container, with the original shipping and packing materials.
.
__ 3. Remove the relay rack assembly (or shipping container) from the
delivery vehicle, and proceed according to one of the following
sub-procedures:
__ 3.1 For crated shipment: position the shipping container,
front side up, between the two equipment moving
dollies so that the weight of the container is evenly
distributed between the two dollies.
or
Warning:
The equipment is very sensitive and can be damaged if dropped or handled
improperly. When handling and moving uncrated equipment, avoid any
structural stress, excessive shock, or vibration, all of which may damage the
equipment.
Warning:
Twisting the crates or relay racks can warp equipment relay racks and damage
equipment shelves. Use care when handling, moving, and unpacking
equipment. Avoid any strain, excessive shock, or vibration, all of which might
damage the equipment.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-181
__ 3.2 For uncrated shipment: securely position the relay rack
assembly in an upright position, front side forward, on
the appliance moving dolly so that the weight of the
relay rack assembly is evenly distributed on the
appliance dolly.
Note: When attaching a restraining belt, brace or strap, make sure that the
restraints do not squeeze or damage the equipment body.
__ 4. If restraining belts are required, then attach them at this time. Ensure
that the relay rack assembly is secured on the appliance dolly
according to all applicable safety guidelines.
Note: Whenever possible, leave the anti-static plastic wrap over the relay rack
until it has been moved to the final installation staging area.
__ 5. Move the relay rack assembly (or shipping container) close to the
proximity of its final installation location for unpacking.
For uncrated shipments, skip the remaining portion of this procedure,
which applies exclusively to crated shipments, and go to Preparing the
Floor for Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-183.
For crated shipments, go to Unpacking Crated Shipments, page 7-181 to
safely unpack the Tellabs 7100 OTS equipment relay rack.
Unpacking Crated Shipments
4.11 Use the following procedure to unpack the Tellabs 7100 OTS equipment
from the shipping crate.
Warning:
Electronic equipment can be damaged by moisture, dust, and electrostatic
discharge (ESD). Ensure that the unpacking and inspection area is dry and free
from dust and static.
DANGER:
To prevent physical injury, ensure that the relay rack assembly is secured by a
reliable restraining method, which respects all applicable safety guidelines,
whenever it is left unattended prior to the completion of the installation
procedure. If the relay rack assembly is not secured in this manner, physical
injury could result.
Page 7-182 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 1. Place the shipping container back side down on a level floor that is
protected, if required, by a masonite sheet.
__ 2. If steel metal banding is used to bind the shipping container, then
carefully cut the metal banding straps using metal shears. Firmly
secure the top of the banding when cutting to prevent recoil and injury.
__ 3. Remove the bolts from the top and side panels of the crate.
Note: Because of the size and weight of the equipment, Tellabs recommends
using four installers to lift the equipment out of its shipping container.
__ 4. Immediately verify that all of the equipment listed on the shipping
manifest is present on the relay rack and that the additional shipping
containers include all of the modules and equipment specified on the
packing list or shipping manifest.
__ 5. Before proceeding to extract the rack from the crate, clear the area of
all shipping and packing materials. Save this material until the
installation and acceptance testing phases are complete, and the
equipment has proven to be in satisfactory operating condition.
__ 6. Using four installers, carefully lift the rack out of its shipping crate and
place it in an upright position on the protective masonite sheet.
Go to Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting, page 7-183.
DANGER:
Metal banding can recoil when it is cut or removed from the crate as the tension
on the banding is released. Place pressure on the top of the banding when
cutting to prevent recoil. Use safety goggles and gloves should be used to avoid
physical injury.
Warning:
Never place the relay rack on the floor in a horizontal position. This places weight
and pressure on the front mounting screws of the relay rack and can lead to
equipment damage.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-183
Preparing the Floor for Relay Rack Mounting
4.12 Use the procedures in this section to plan the floor layout and prepare the
floor for relay rack equipment mounting.
Floor Load, page 7-183
Floor Layout, page 7-183
Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for Site Installations, page 7-184
Preparing for the Relay Rack Installation, page 7-189
Floor Load
4.13 For a system with 7100C/D-60 shelves, one fully configured relay rack with
one completely populated main shelf and one completely populated port shelf has
a maximum floor load of 381.50 pounds (173 kilograms).
Floor Layout
4.14 A functional description of the equipment relay rack parts and their
corresponding part numbers is provided in Table 4.1, page 7-186. Local conditions
and requirements dictate actual configuration layouts. The equipment relay rack
framework consists of the following parts:
__ ETSI relay rack
__ (optional) relay rack pad isolation
__ equipment relay rack
4.15 For alternative layouts, contact Tellabs Customer Service at
1.800.443.5555, or follow company procedures for obtaining technical assistance.
4.16 The Tellabs 7100 OTS allows for flexible layouts that meet most telco CO
specifications. For a standard ETSI layout floor plan, refer to Figure 4.1,
page 7-184.
Page 7-184 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.1 ETSI Standard Floor Layout - Top View
Planning Rack Accessory Equipment for Site Installations
4.17 Tellabs 7100 OTS relay racks (refer to Equipment Overview, page 7-5) are
typically shipped complete with shelves and cabling. Additional accessory items for
installing these systems in telco offices are provided in Table 4.1, page 7-186.
Note: Relay Rack Spacers are optional in ETSI installations.
4.18 The suggested configurations for the Tellabs 7100 OTS ETSI rack
installations are shown in Figure 4.2, page 7-185 through 4.4, page 7-186.
m
i
n
i
m
u
m

7
5
0

m
m
aisle space
rear line
3
0
0

m
m
front line
Tellabs 7100
OTS
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-185
Figure 4.2 Recommended Relay Rack Floor LayoutTop View (SBOADM)
Figure 4.3 Recommended HCSS Relay Rack Floor LayoutTop View
(SBOADM)
equipment
relay
rack
Port Shelf
Port Shelf
flush mount end panel kit
m
i
n
i
m
u
m

7
5
0

m
m
aisle space
front line
end spacer panel kit
aisle space
3
0
0

m
m
rear line
Key
ETSI Spacer Panel
Tellabs
7100 Port
Shelves
Tellabs
7100 Main
and Port
Shelves
equipment
relay
rack
Port Shelf
Port Shelf
m
i
n
i
m
u
m

7
5
0

m
m
aisle space
front line
aisle space
6
0
0

m
m
rear line
Key
ETSI Spacer Panel
HCSS
Shelves
Main and
Port
Shelves
Page 7-186 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.4 Recommended Relay Rack Floor LayoutTop View (OLA)
ETSI Accessory Equipment
4.19 Table 4.1, page 7-186 shows parts that may be used during the installation
of the Tellabs 7100 OTS in an ETSI configuration.
rack (Tellabs part number 14.9621.0).
equipment
relay
rack
m
i
n
i
m
u
m

7
5
0

m
m
aisle space
front line
aisle space
3
0
0

m
m
rear line
Key
ETSI Spacer Panel
Tellabs
7100 Main
and Port
Shelves
Table 4.1 Accessory Equipment for the ETSI Relay Rack Installations
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
ETSI Relay Rack Kit 81.71RACK-KIT-F 2200 x 600 x 300 relay rack used for the Tellabs
7100 OTS Main shelf and Port shelf installation.
Includes cables, Top Baffle (Tellabs part number
81.71070B), and Keep Out Bar (Tellabs part
number 110.0892)..
ETSI HCSS Relay Rack Kit 82.71RACK-KIT-F 2200 x 600 x 300 relay rack used for the Tellabs
7100 OTS HCSS installation. Includes two sets of
power cables, and Keep Out Bar (Tellabs part
number 110.0892).
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-187
HCSS ESI Cable Duct Kit 81.71ESI-DUCT NEBS/ETSI Rear ESI cable duct work. The duct
work protects the ESI cables.
HCSS Duct Work Conversion Kit 8008-000024-01 This duct work kit is used with ETSI Relay Rack
(Tellabs part number 14.9621.0) and the HCSS
ESI Cable Duct Kit (Tellabs part number
81.71ESI-DUCT).
NEBS/ETSI HCSS Electrical Shelf
Interconnect - Vertical Routing
(ESI-V)
81.71ESI-CBL-V Contains 12 ESI cable assemblies for the paired
HCSS configuration.
ETSI Relay Rack 14.9621.0 2200 x 600 x 300 relay rack for equipment
installation.
ETSI End Spacer Panel Kit 14.90450-0 End panel spacer for accessory equipment.
Usually used in end of the aisle installations.
Rack Within A Rack (RWR) Kit 149.0398 Installed in the adjacent equipment rack. Used to
house DCMs, RCCM patch panels, and OPSM
patch panels.
ETSI Top Baffle 81.71070B Always installed above the first 7100C/D-60 shelf
in the rack.
ETSI Middle Baffle 81.71070A Baffles used below the top 7100C/D-60 shelf in a
rack and above the second 7100C/D-60 shelf in
the rack. Installation orientation differs depending
on the shelf associated with the baffle.
Breaker Frame Alarm Panel
(BFAP)
82.71020C Installed at the top of each equipment rack
containing main or port shelves.
A Generic BFAP is also available, refer to Installing
Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment, page 7-323.
Alarm Interface Panel (AIP) 81.71010 Installed below each BFAP in the equipment rack
containing 7100A/B/C/D-60 shelves.
Fan Filter and Plenum 82.71030B The fan plenum is below each 7100C/D-60 shelf.
83.07100B-60 HCSS PDU
(Optional)
82.71020H Installed at the top of each equipment rack
containing HCSSs.
OPSM Patch Panel 81.7100PP-O-xM
Where:
xM = Cable length
in meters
(1 m, 3 m, 5 m,
10 m, 15 m, or
20 m).
Required for using the Optical Protection and
Synchronization Module (OPSM). With 2
interconnect cables. Can be used to support
multiple OPSMs. Requires an OPSM/ECMM patch
panel shelf.
Table 4.1 Accessory Equipment for the ETSI Relay Rack Installations (Continued)
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-188 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
RCMM Fiber Patch Panel 81.7100PP-R-xM
Where:
xM = Cable length
in meters
(1 m, 3 m, 5 m,
10 m, 15 m, or
20 m).
RCMM fiber patch panel with 8 RCMM
interconnect (Express) cables.
OMD44-1 Patch Panel 81.714144 Used with RCMM-8D88 for routing up to 44
255-0070-Cxxxx or 155.06xx).
OMD44-45 Patch Panel 81.714188 Used with RCMM-8D88 when routing more than 44
255-0070-Cxxxx or 155.06xx).
OMD44-1 Patch Panel 82.714144 Used with OADM88-xR when routing up to 44
channels to transponders. Cables ordered
separately (Tellabs part numbers 255-0070-Cxxxx
or 155.06xx).
OMD44-45 Patch Panel 82.714188 Used with OADM88-xR when routing more than 44
255-0070-Cxxxx or 155.06xx).
OMD88 Patch Panel 81.71S-OMD88 Used with DX RCMMs and LOAM-E88s for
RDXM Directionless Kit C7100RDXM_KIT The RDXM Directionless Kit is used for
The kit includes the following piece parts:
81.71S-OMD88, Optical Mux/Demux
88 Channel Patch Panel (OMD88)
81.71T-DXRCMM Directionless
Reconfigurable Channel Multiplexer Module -
88 Channel (DX RCMM)
81.71123C, Line Output Amplifier Module -
Enhanced 88 Channel (LOAM-E88)
Fiber Connection Tool 160.0492 Optional tool for use with RCMM fiber patch panel.
OPSM patch panel shelf 81.071PP-SHLF Holds up to four OPSM patch panels.
Patch panel blank plate 81.7100PP-BLK Covers unused patch panel locations in the patch
panel shelf.
Patch Panel Top Cover 180.0430 Patch panel top cover, clear plastic. For use with
the RCMM patch panel, OPSM patch panel and
port shelf patch panel. Kit contains vinyl pockets
for printed panel guide to mark locations.
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-189
Preparing for the Relay Rack Installation
4.20 Obtain the following materials and perform the steps that follow.
requirements have been met:
__ For each relay rack, mark and drill the mounting holes first before
installing the relay rack. Next, install the relay rack itself.
__ If installing 14.9092 earthquake bolts, the anchors require a concrete
floor that is at least 6 inches thick (152.4 mm).
__ electric drill with masonry bit, 5/8 inch or 3/8 inch, depending upon the
type of anchor bolt that is used
__ chalk line
__ HEPA vacuum cleaner
__ anchor setting tool
__ safety goggles
__ felt pen
__ measuring tape
Materials 4.23 Table 4.2, page 7-189 specifies the anchor bolt kits available for the
Tellabs 7100 rack mounting procedure.
ETSI Relay Rack Pad Isolation 14.90520 Customers may require isolated grounding
techniques for the Tellabs 7100 OTS.
Keep Out Bar 110.0892 Used to allow air flow and prevent equipment
installation.
1 RU Fiber Trough 179.1398 For use with the patch panels.
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Table 4.2 Anchor Bolt Kits
Floor
Type
Quantity per
Relay Rack
Supplied
by
Earthquake anchor bolts
Rated for all seismic zones
142.0081 Concrete 2 bolt kits Tellabs
Page 7-190 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Action 4.24 Follow these steps to prepare the floor for the relay rack mounting
procedure:
__ 2. Plan the Tellabs 7100 relay rack and relay rack spacer footprint and
anchor layout. Refer to Figure 4.5, page 7-191.
Note: For ETSI relay rack floor layouts, contact your Tellabs Customer Service
at 1.800.443.5555, or follow company procedures for obtaining customer
technical assistance.
__ 3. Mount the equipment relay rack toward the front or rear of the
overhead cable rack. This allows vertical access to the cable run
between the equipment relay rack and the overhead cable rack.
__ 4. Verify that the dimension of the available floor space and the location
of the reference points correspond to the floor plan.
__ 5. Mark the front base line and aisle boundaries with a chalk line. Use the
floor reference points in a new area, or use the front of the existing
lineup where the relay racks extend or fill an existing line.
Zone-4 Earthquake bracing bolts 14.9092 Concrete 1 bolt kit Tellabs
Table 4.2 Anchor Bolt Kits (Continued)
Floor
Type
Quantity per
Relay Rack
Supplied
by
Warning:
To be UL compliant, the Tellabs 7100 OTS must be mounted in a restricted area
such as a dedicated equipment room or equipment closet. Additionally, it must
be mounted on a concrete or other non-combustible floor, in accordance with
articles 110-18, 110-26, and 110-27 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA
70.
DANGER:
The correct anchor bolt assemblies, as specified in Table 4.2, page 7-189, must
be ordered and on site before installation can commence. Before proceeding,
always ensure the anchor bolt assemblies are appropriate for use with the type
of floor material at the site. Installing incorrect anchor bolt assemblies causes
relay rack instability and can cause potential equipment damage or bodily harm.
Warning:
If installing earthquake bolts (Tellabs part number 14.9092), the anchors require
at least a 6 inch (152.4 mm) thick concrete floor. Before proceeding, ensure that
the floor is at least 6 inches in depth. Validate this fact with the customer before
starting this installation procedure. Attempting to install the 14.9092 earthquake
bolts in a floor less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) thick results in improper installation
of the anchor bolts, causing relay rack instability.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-191
__ 6. Mark the location where the relay rack is going to be installed.
Note: Except on end relay rack installation scenarios or where the relay racks are
supported in the middle of the relay rack lineup, and only if permitted by
your standard office procedures, two anchor points in diagonal corners
may be used instead of four. For more information, consult your Tellabs
Customer Service Representative.
__ 7. Mark the four anchor points of the relay rack in the center of the 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) radius, 45-degree angled ovals, ensuring that the
location of each relay rack to be installed is properly marked: Follow
the template illustrated in Figure 4.5, page 7-191 to mark the location
of each rack and spacer.
Figure 4.5 ETSI Relay Rack Floor Layout Template
__ 8. If spacers are being installed, mark the location where the relay rack
spacer (RRS) with fiber management spools is going to be installed.
Mark two anchor points in the center of the front and back anchor
plates between the adjacent relay racks.
600 mm relay rack
front
520 mm
40 mm 40 mm
200 mm
Warning:
Check the alignment frequently when installing relay racks. If the alignment is not
correct, it may cause difficulties in installing an adjacent relay rack.
Warning:
With an earthquake bracing anchor kit, do not break off the top bolt until the end
of the installation procedure. If the bolt is broken before the relay rack is aligned
or the relay rack needs to be moved or adjusted, a new anchor bolt must be
ordered to replace the broken bolt.
Page 7-192 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 9. Drill the mounting holes in the floor and install the relay rack isolation
kit and anchors according to the manufacturers recommended
procedures.
Go to Installing the Relay Rack Framework, page 7-192.
Installing the Relay Rack Framework
4.25 This section provides the installation procedure for the Tellabs 7100 OTS
relay rack framework.
Note: In this procedure, do not apply torque when tightening the bolts. Secure
the relay rack framework loosely so that all of the pieces can be leveled as
a whole unit; you are directed to tighten and apply torque to the bolts in a
later procedure.
4.27 If the equipment configuration contains three shelves, the bottom fan
assembly must be removed before starting this procedure. This allows access to
the bottom of the relay rack for installing the anchor bolt kits. Refer to Tellabs
7100/7100N Maintenance Using TL1, for fan assembly removal procedures.
__ hammer
__ heavy-duty straps or rope
__ (2) 10-inch adjustable wrenches
__ anchor bolt kits (refer to Table 4.2, page 7-189)
__ 10-32 x 1/2 inch bolts (5 per relay rack)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-193
4.30 In addition to the materials noted above, the following materials must be
supplied to perform this procedure:
__ rope/straps
__ tripod dolly
__ 5/16-inch extension nut driver
__ 3/8-inch nut driver with 3/4 inch extension
Action 4.31 Follow these steps to install the relay rack framework:
Note 1: When installing multiple relay racks together in a lineup, set them
together, side-by-side, to determine which (if any) seats the highest on
the floor. Then, adjust the other relay racks to the highest point on the
tallest of the relay racks.
Note 2: If the relay rack configuration contains three shelves, ensure the bottom
fan assembly is removed before proceeding. Refer to Tellabs
7100/7100N Maintenance Using TL1.
__ 2. Carefully slide the relay rack assembly into position in the equipment
lineup. For the exact location refer to the site specification.
__ 3. Temporarily support the relay rack. Use supporting straps or rope tied
around the top channel of the relay rack frame or any convenient
overhead structure, such as auxiliary framing or cable racks.
__ 4. Install the anchor bolts together with the ancillary hardware provided
in the anchor kit.
If using a earthquake anchor kit, part number 142.0081, refer to
If using a Zone-4 earthquake anchor kit, part number 14.9092,
__ 5. Firmly tighten the anchor bolts to hold the relay rack in position, but do
not torque down fully.
Page 7-194 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.6 Earthquake Anchor Kit Installation
relay rack
base plate
square
washers
A
A
A-A view
cut
away
view of
washer,
relay rack
base, and
floor
concrete floor
minimum
4 inches
(101.6 mm) thick
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-195
Figure 4.7 Zone-4 Earthquake Anchor Kit Installation
concrete
floor
minimum
6 inches
(1.52 mm)
relay rack
base plate
square
washers
A
A
A-A view
not
used
not
used
cut
away
view of
washers,
relay rack
base, and
floor
thick
Page 7-196 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 6. Check that the relay rack is level using a spirit level. If the relay rack is
not level, readjust the leveling screws located at the bottom of the relay
rack. Refer to Figure 4.8, page 7-196.
__ 7. Place shims under the relay rack as close to the four corners without
protruding from the bottom of the relay rack. This provides enhanced
stability to the relay rack.
__ 8. Back off and lock the leveling screws on the bottom of the relay rack.
leveling feet
(top view)
locknut
leveling foot
adjusting nut
square end can
be used to adjust
leveler
bottom of rack
leveling foot
(side view)
DANGER:
Avoid excessive shimming, which results in relay rack instability and can cause
potential equipment damage or bodily harm.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-197
Note 1: The relay rack leveling feet are an aid during the relay rack installation.
Leveling feet must be retracted when shims are in place to maintain
Zone-4 compliance.
Note 2: Do not tighten anchor bolts at this time. Anchor bolts are tightened when
all the installation procedures for the relay rack or spacer with fiber
management, and end shield are completed.
__ 9. Do not install the doors at this time. The doors are installed in a
subsequent procedure. Refer to Installing Optional Door Assemblies,
page 7-494.
Go to Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support, page 7-197.
Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support
4.32 This section describes how to support the top of a relay rack using the
central office (CO) overhead cable rack.
4.33 To maintain Zone-4 earthquake compliance, Tellabs requires using the
following procedures to support the top of each relay rack:
The top of a single relay rack is supported by attaching the relay rack
to an overhead support structure. Refer to Action, page 7-198.
Note: When installing the top support, do not block the power cable access to the
BFAP at the front of the relay rack. Otherwise, the top support must be
removed to allow access.
__ hammer
Page 7-198 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Materials 4.36 The following materials are required to perform the overhead support
structure procedure:
__ one or two 5/8 inch x 11 threaded rods
__ J-bolts
__ framing clips
__ 5/8 inch (15.5 or 16.0 mm) x 11 nuts
Action 4.37 Follow these steps to support the top of a relay rack by attaching it to an
overhead support structure using an auxiliary channel, framing clips, 5/8 inch nuts,
washers, and J-bolts:
__ 1. Remove the temporary top support straps.
__ 2. On the top of the relay rack, find the three holes backed by hex nuts.
__ 3. Using these holes, attach one or two 5/8 inch x 11 threaded rods per
relay rack to the relay rack and to a rigid overhead structure. Refer to
__ 4. Tighten the J-bolts and the 5/8 inch nuts that are at the ends of the
threaded rod and auxiliary channel assembly.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-199
Figure 4.9 Example of Supporting Equipment Relay Racks Using the Overhead Support Structure
framing clips
cable rack
threaded rods
J-bolts
J-bolts
auxiliary
channels
unequal
flange rack
Page 7-200 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.10 Supporting an Equipment Relay Rack Using the Overhead Support Structure
two overhead support assemblies
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-201
Figure 4.11 Supporting Two Equipment Relay Racks Using the Overhead Support Structure
__ 6. Repeat the rack installation and auxiliary channel top support for each
relay rack being installed.
four overhead support assemblies
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
A
R
C
M
M
C
R
C
M
M
D
R
C
M
M
B
D
C
M
A
D
C
M
C
D
C
M
B
D
C
M
D
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-202 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.12 Supporting Three Equipment Relay Racks Using the Overhead Support Structure
Go to Installing the End Spacer Panel Kit, page 7-203.
Six Overhead Support Assemblies:
- Four Overhead Support Assemblies for the Far Racks and
- Two Single Assemblies for the Middle Relay Rack and End Shield
Top Support for the End Shield Required
Only for Zone 4 Earthquake Installations
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-203
Installing the End Spacer Panel Kit
4.38 Begin the Tellabs 7100 OTS line up with an End Spacer Panel Kit (Tellabs
part number 14.90450-0).
__ flat-head screwdriver
__ open end wrench-and-socket set
__ End Spacer Panel Kit (Tellabs part number 14.90450-0)
4.42 Perform the following procedure to install the End Spacer Panel Kit:
Note: Panels can be assembled on either the left or right side of the rack and are
adjustable from 0" to 5" in front of the rack.
__ 1. Assemble the End Spacer Panel Kit. Refer to Figure 4.13, page 204.
__ 2. Using the hardware provided in the End Spacer Panel Kit, attach the
assembled End Spacer Panel to the last spacer panel in the line up.
Page 7-204 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.13 End Spacer Panel Kit
ription
Page of
2
1
3
4
5 TYP.
6
7 3X
8
5
6
1
8
TYP.
2
7
3X
3
4
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-205
Finalizing the Relay Rack Framework Installation
4.43 This section describes how to secure the Tellabs 7100 OTS relay rack
framework. After building the relay rack framework, follow these steps to level all
parts of the framework and tighten to the appropriate level of torque. For torque
specifications, refer to Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
__ spirit level, 24 inch (or metric equivalent)
__ hammer
Materials 4.46 Shims are required to perform this procedure.
Action 4.47 Follow these steps to secure the relay rack framework:
__ 1. Tighten the screws on the spacer panel.
__ 3. Ensure the relay rack is level. If necessary, use shims and the leveling
screws to level the relay rack. Refer to Figure 4.14, page 7-206.
DANGER:
Personal injury can result from an unsupported relay rack. Never remove the
temporary top support straps before the installation of the top support hardware
is completed in Installing the Auxiliary (Aux) Channel Top Support, page 7-197.
Page 7-206 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 4. Retract and lock the leveling screws.
__ 5. Manually tighten the floor anchor bolts and then tighten the relay
rack-joining hardware securely.
__ 6. Torque all the screws on the following equipment, refer to Torquing
Force Tables, page 7-22:
__ relay rack framework
__ overhead support
Warning:
Example:The leveling screws must be retracted and locked after
relay rack leveling is complete. Ensure that all required relay rack
alignment and leveling is complete. Ensure that the required shims
are in place under the relay rack base and that the four leveling
screws are fully retracted and locked prior to the final tightening of
the anchor bolts. The final tightening of the anchor bolts without
retracting and locking the leveling screws results in relay rack insta-
bility and possible damage to the relay rack. Zone-4 earthquake
compliance is violated if leveling screws are not fully retracted.
leveling feet
(top view)
locknut
leveling foot
adjusting nut
square end can
be used to adjust
leveler
bottom of rack
leveling foot
(side view)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-207
__ 1-inch (25.4 mm) gray support pipe
__ bolts on the v-clamps
__ clamps on the 6-inch relay rack spacer (RRS)
__ spacer panel
__ end shield
__ wire shield and extension
Note: The recommended torque for M6 x 1 screws that are used for the ETSI
rack and spacer are 355 in-lbs or 455 kg-cm. Refer to Torquing Force
Tables, page 7-22.
Go to Tightening All Screws, page 7-207.
Tightening All Screws
Go to Installing Fiber Management Solutions, page 7-207.
Installing Fiber Management Solutions
4.48 This section describes how to install the relay rack spacers and fiber
management ducts. Refer to Figure 4.15, page 7-208.
Note: Before attaching the 10-inch spacer panel to the ETSI rack, verify hole
alignment. The top hole may need to be enlarged. Follow company
procedure when enlarging top hole.
Page 7-208 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.15 Spacer with Fiber Management Spools
__ hammer
spacer base
fiber spools
lacing brackets
spool covers
spool covers
May leave open
without spools for
installing patch
panels
Note: The spool covers may be oriented to either
the right or the left, depending on the location (left
or right) of the thumbscrews that attach the cover
to the spool.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-209
__ Relay Rack Spacer Panels (RRS):
__ 10-inch with fiber spools (Tellabs part number 249-0014)
__ plastic spool covers (included with RRS kits)
__ miscellaneous hardware (included with RRS kits)
__ Horizontal Fiber Duct:
__ 6-foot Horizontal Fiber Duct Base Spacer (Tellabs part number
245-0047)
245-0040), containing two L-brackets and two U-brackets
__ one per rackDuct Covers (Tellabs part number 245-0048)
connect fiber ducts
__ Vertical Fiber Ducts:
__ anchor bolt kit (refer to Table 4.2, page 7-189)
Configurations for Patch
Panels and DCM Chassis
compensation modules (DCMs), and other accessories for the rack spacer
assembly. These items are added after the installation of the racks, rack spacers,
and the associated power and grounding connections are completed.
purposes, Tellabs recommends the labeling method shown in Labeling for Patch
Panels and DCM Chassis in RRSs, page 7-260.
4.54 During the installation of the rack spacer assemblies, it may be necessary
to remove the blank filler panels and fiber spools in order to access the mounting
hardware. Keep all removed items secure until the power and grounding is
complete.
4.55 Refer to Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks,
page 7-256 to help determine the rack spacer areas where re-installation of
removed panels may not be necessary:
Rack Spacer Base
4.56 Follow these steps to install the right rack spacer base:
Page 7-210 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 2. Remove the spacer base and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
__ 3. Anchor the spacer base using either or both of the following methods:
bolts.
and/or:
flooring.
standards.
Go to Installing the Right Relay Rack Spacer Base, page 7-209.
Spacer Base
4.57 Follow these steps to install the left rack spacer base:
__ 2. Remove the spacer bases and associated mounting hardware from
the shipping box.
__ 3. Anchor the spacer base using either or both of the methods that follow.
bolts.
flooring.
standards.
Go to Installing the Right Relay Rack Spacer, page 7-210.
Rack Spacer
4.58 Follow these steps to install the right RRS with fiber management spools:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-211
locations, using the hardware provided. Refer to Figure 4.16,
page 7-211.
Figure 4.16 Attachment of the Right Relay Rack Spacer (Top View)
Go to Installing the Left Relay Rack Spacer, page 7-211.
Spacer
4.59 Follow these steps to install the left RRS with fiber management spools:
For anchor hole drilling procedures, refer to Preparing the Floor for
locations, using the nut/bolt hardware provided. Refer to Figure 4.17,
page 7-211.
Figure 4.17 Attachment of the Left Relay Rack Spacer
Retain the spool covers to install them at a later time after all racks and
panels are completely installed. Refer to Installing the Relay Rack
Spacer (RRS) Spool Covers, page 7-295.
page 7-212
top view
relay rack upright
relay rack spacer
nut bolt
relay rack upright
relay rack spacer
top view
bolt nut
Page 7-212 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Vertical Fiber Ducts in 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacers (RRSs)
4.61 When a 10-inch RRS (Tellabs part numbers 249-0014) is used, 2-inch x
4-inch (Tellabs part number 245-0044) or 4-inch x 4-inch (Tellabs part number
245-0046) slotted vertical fiber ducts may be installed in the RRSs. Refer to
Figure 4.18 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacer Panel with 2-Inch x 4-Inch Slotted Vertical Fiber Troughs (Front View)
10-inch RRS
flush wire shield
Tellabs 7100
equipment
rack
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-213
Figure 4.19 10-Inch Relay Rack Spacer Panel with 2-Inch x 4-Inch Slotted Vertical Fiber Troughs (Top View)
Troughs (Front View)
Tellabs 7100
equipment rack
10-inch L-bracket
flush wire shield
10-inch RRS
(Tellabs
part number
249-0012)
Tellabs 7100
equipment
rack
Tellabs 7100
equipment
rack
10-inch RRS
Page 7-214 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Troughs (Top View)
__ screwdriver
__ hack saw
Materials 4.64 The following materials are required to install a 2-inch x 4-inch or 4-inch x
4-inch slotted vertical fiber duct:
__ (as required) 3-inch Bend Radius Control Clips (Tellabs part number
245-0051), used were fibers route into duct
__ 1. Determine the position required for the slotted vertical fiber duct.
__ 2. Screw the slotted vertical fiber duct to the relay rack spacer panel.
__ 3. Determine where fibers will enter and exit the shelf.
__ 3.1 Remove the fingers from the slotted vertical fiber duct at
these locations.
__ 3.2 Attach a fiber guide to these locations. Refer to Figure
4.22, page 7-215.
Tellabs 7100
equipment rack
10-inch L-bracket
10-inch RRS
flush wire shield
Tellabs 7100
equipment rack
4-inch x 4-inch
fiber duct
(Tellabs part number
245-0046)
front front
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-215
Figure 4.22 Fiber Guides
__ 4. Repeat this procedure to install more slotted vertical fiber duct.
Go to Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks, page 7-215
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Above Racks
4.65 Where possible Tellabs recommends that 4-inch x 4-inch fiber ducts be
installed above the Tellabs 7100 system to accommodate required fiber cables and
fiber jumpers. The overhead fiber ducts should be equipped with fiber down spouts
installed above each rack spacer. The Fiber down spouts route fiber from the down
spout to the front and rear of the rack spacer.
4.66 Horizontal fiber duct above the Tellabs 7100 system is determined at site
survey. Follow your companys prescribed procedures for installation of fiber ducts
above the Tellabs 7100 system.
Go to Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Below Relay Racks, page 7-216
Page 7-216 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Horizontal Fiber Duct Below Relay Racks
4.67 The horizontal fiber duct add additional fiber management below the
existing relay racks. Refer to Figure 4.23, page 7-216.
Figure 4.23 Horizontal Fiber Duct with Cover
__ spirit level, non-magnetic level, 6-inch (or metric equivalent)
__ hack saw
__ screwdriver
Materials 4.70 The following materials are required to install the horizontal fiber duct:
__ one per rack4-inch x 4-inch solid Horizontal Fiber Duct in 6-foot
lengths (Tellabs part number 245-0047)
__ one per rackHorizontal Fiber Duct Cover in 6-foot lengths
245-0040), containing two L-brackets and two U-brackets for
mounting the horizontal duct
h
o
riz
o
n
ta
l fib
e
r d
u
c
t w
ith
c
o
v
e
r
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-217
connect fiber ducts
__ LockMaster for use with screws
Rack Spacer Base
4.71 Follow these steps to install the horizontal fiber duct:
__ 2. Remove the horizontal fiber ducts, covers, and associated mounting
__ 3. Remove the lower air baffle if necessary.
__ 4. Mount an L-bracket to the relay rack on the left-hand side of the relay
__ 5. Mount an L-bracket to the relay rack on the right-hand side of the relay
Figure 4.24 Mounting L-Bracket and U-Bracket (Right Side of Rack)
__ 6. Using a spirit level adjust the L-brackets until the bottom is level and
then tighten the mounting screws to secure the L-bracket to the relay
rack.
L
-b
ra
c
k
e
t
U
-b
ra
c
k
e
t
Page 7-218 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Mount the U-bracket on the bottom of the adjacent rack spacer. Refer
__ 24.1 Remove the bottom fiber spool from the adjacent rack.
This spool is no longer needed.
__ 24.2 Re-use the four screws with LockMaster to mount the new
U-bracket in the place of the fiber spool. Do not tighten
screws at this time. Refer to Figure 4.25, page 7-218.
Figure 4.25 Mounting U-Bracket
__ 8. Level the U-bracket in relation to the L-bracket by placing the spirit
level across both the L-bracket and the U-bracket then adjust the
U-bracket so that it is level with the L-bracket. Refer to Figure 4.26,
page 7-218.
Figure 4.26 Leveling the U-Bracket
__ 9. Tighten the four screws securing the U-bracket to the rack spacer.
__ 10. Repeat this for the rack spacer on the opposite side of the rack.
__ 11. When all L-brackets and U-brackets have been installed the horizontal
fiber duct and cover can be installed.
__ 12. Determine the horizontal fiber duct lengths required.
__ 13. Cut the 6-foot horizontal fiber ducts to required lengths.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-219
__ 14. Where the ducts are to be attached together cut out a 3/4-inch slot on
the right and left duct. Refer to Figure 4.27, page 7-219.
Figure 4.27 Horizontal Fiber Duct with 3/4-Inch Cut Out
__ 15. On the end horizontal fiber ducts snap on the end caps. Refer to Figure
4.28, page 7-219.
Figure 4.28 Horizontal Fiber Duct With End Caps
__ 16. Place the horizontal fiber ducts in the U-brackets and L-brackets.
__ 17. Use the fiber duct connectors to slide over the cut out ends and
connect the ducts.
__ 18. Snap in the rear edge of the horizontal fiber duct cover. Be sure to
leave the front of the cover open to allow for fiber routing.
Page 7-220 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 19. If necessary, reinstall the lower air baffle.
- If wire shields are required, refer to Installing the Wire Shield,
page 7-124.
- Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in an ETSI
- Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks,
page 7-256
- Connecting the System Wiring, page 7-334
Installing the High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) in an ETSI Environment
are connected together using Electrical Shelf Interconnect (ESI) cables. The paired
HCSS feature is not supported in ETSI installations.
rack (Tellabs part number 14.9621.0). The footprint must be at least
600 mm x 600 mm to accommodate the rear exhaust baffles.
4.74 Table 4.1, page 7-186 shows HCSS components.
Table 4.1 83.07100B-60 HCSS Components
82.71RACK-KIT-F 83.07100B-60 HCSS rack kit.
Includes ETSI rack (Tellabs part number 14.9621-0), HCSS power cable kit (Tellabs
part number 81.71HCSS-CBL), and Keep Out Bar (Tellabs part number 110.0892)
14.9621-0 ETSI equipment rack. Included in 82.71RACK-KIT-F.
83.07100B-60 NEBS/ETSI 83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS)
The 83.07100B-60, HCSS includes the Top Air Baffle, Shelf Chassis with Backplane,
Fiber Trough, Passive Distribution Panel (PDP), and a Fan Tray as part of the shelf.
The Fan Modules (4) and HCSS Fan Filter (1) must be ordered separately.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-221
4.75 The following procedures are available to install an HCSS:
Installing the Optional HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) in ETSI
Installing the HCSS in the ETSI Rack, page 7-224
82.71040 83.07100B-60 HCSS Fan Module (Order four per HCSS shelf.)
82.71060 83.07100B-60 HCSS Fan Filter (Order one per HCSS shelf.)
81.71HCSS-CBL 83.07100B-60 HCSS Power Cable Kit (includes two sets of 4 cables)
250-0106, power cable (upper set of 4)
250-0107, power cable (lower set of 4)
110.0892 ETSI Keep Out Bar (included in ETSI rack kits)
81.71ESI-DUCT NEBS/ETSI Rear ESI cable duct work. The duct work protects the ESI cables.
8008-000024-01 This duct work kit is used with ETSI Relay Rack (Tellabs part number 14.9621.0) and
the NEBS/ETSI Rear ESI cable duct work. (Tellabs part number 81.71ESI-DUCT).
81.71ESI-CBL-V NEBS/ETSI HCSS Electrical Shelf Interconnect - Vertical Routing (ESI-V)
Contains 12 ESI cable assemblies for the paired HCSS configuration.
180.0908 83.07100B-60 HCSS NEBS/ETSI Top Baffle (For Replacement Only - Already Part of
Shelf)
14.9621.0 2200 x 600 x 300 relay rack for equipment installation.
149.0398 ETSI Rack Within A Rack (RWR) Kit
Installed in the adjacent equipment rack. Used to house DCMs, RCCM patch panels,
OPSM patch panels, and Y-Cable patch panels.
Table 4.1 83.07100B-60 HCSS Components (Continued)
Page 7-222 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Optional HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) in ETSI Environment
4.76 This section describes how to install the optional HCSS PDU (Tellabs part
number 82.71020H) to the top of the HCSS rack. Refer to Figure 4.29, page 7-222.
__ screwdriver
__ oneHCSS Power Distribution Unit (Tellabs part number 82.71020H)
__ fourrack screws (Tellabs part number 140.0039)
4.80 Follow these steps to install the HCSS PDU:
__ 2. Remove the HCSS PDU and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
1A2A3A4A5A6A
returns
A-side
1A2A3A4A5A6A
power inputs
A-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
power inputs
B-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
returns
B-side
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
returns
A-side
power outputs
A-side
power outputs
B-side
returns
B-side
to shelves
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-223
__ 4. Have one person align the HCSS PDU to the front of the rack over
ETSI rack holes 81 and 75. Refer to Figure 4.30, page 7-223.
Figure 4.30 HCSS ETSI Rack/Cabinet PDU Installation Location
__ 5. Have the second person attach the left side of the HCSS PDU to the
front of the rack using two rack screws.
__ 6. Have the second person attach the right side of the HCSS PDU to the
front of the rack using two rack screws.
Go to Installing the HCSS in the ETSI Rack, page 7-224
front of rack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
hole 82
hole 76
hole 82
hole 76
Page 7-224 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the HCSS in the ETSI Rack
4.81 This section describes how to install the High Capacity Switch Shelf
(HCSS) in the upper or lower position of the Tellabs ETSI rack.
__ screwdriver
__ up to two83.07100B-60 HCSSs (Tellabs part number 83.07100B-60)
The 83.07100B-60, HCSS includes the Top Air Baffle, Shelf Chassis
a Fan Tray as part of the shelf.
__ eightETSI rack screws per HCSS (Tellabs part number 140.0039)
Installing HCSS in Lower
Position of Rack
4.85 Follow these steps to install the HCSS:
__ 2. Remove the HCSS and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
__ 3. If necessary, attach the top air baffle to the top of the HCSS:
__ 3.1 Remove the 4 screws holding the mesh to the top of the
shelf. Refer to Figure 4.31, page 225. These screws are
no longer used.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-225
Figure 4.31 Remove Mesh Hold-Down Screws
__ 3.2 Keep the mesh material on the top of the HCSS.
__ 3.3 Align the top air baffle above the HCSS with the venting
to the rear.
__ 3.4 Insert the baffles left and right edges into the side walls
of the shelf.
__ 3.5 From the left side of the shelf, attach the top air baffle to
the shelf using three screws (Tellabs part number
__ 3.6 From the right side of the shelf, attach the top air baffle
to the shelf using three screws (Tellabs part number
140.0087). Figure 4.32, page 226.
__ 3.7 Torque all six screws to 5 1 Inch-Pounds. Refer to
Side of HCSS
remove mesh
hold-down screws
2 per side
Page 7-226 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.32 Air Baffle Attachment Screw Locations
__ 4. Determine the shelf position in the rack, upper or lower. Refer to
__ 6. Have one person align the HCSS to the front of the rack:
__ 6.1 Lower positionalign shelf mounting ears using the hole
pattern closest to shelf, over the rack mounting holes.
Side of HCSS
attach baffle to shelf
with 3 screws per side
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-227
__ 6.2 Upper positionalign shelf mounting ears using the hole
pattern closest to shelf, over the rack mounting holes.
__ 7. Attach the keep out bar below the lower HCSS. Refer to Figure 4.33,
page 7-227.
__ 9. Attach the lacing bar (Tellabs part number 1000-000371-01) to the
rear of the rack between the PDU and the upper HCSS. The lacing bar
is used later to support the power cables.
__ 10. Torque screws to 45.2 kg-cm. Refer to Torquing Force Tables,
page 7-22.
Figure 4.33 Suggested HCSS Positions in a Rack
front of rack
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
lower position
upper position
keep-out bar
open space above HCSS
open space above HCSS
hole 32
hole 26
hole 40
hole 36
hole 61
hole 55
hole 69
hole 65
hole 17
hole 10
Page 7-228 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables and Duct (ETSI)
4.86 If the two HCSS are not going to be paired, skip this procedure.
4.87 If the rack contains two HCSSs and they are to be paired, complete these
procedures:
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases
Interconnect (ESI) Cable Duct Base to the rear of the rack.
__ Phillips-head screwdriver with torque capability
__ oneHCSS ESI Cable Duct Kit (Tellabs part number 81-71ESI-DUCT)
For piece parts included in the HCSS ESI Duct Kit refer to Table 4.3,
page 7-229. The part number is shown on each duct base piece and
cap piece.
__ oneETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit (Tellabs part
number 8008-000024-01).
For piece parts included in the ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work
Conversion Kit refer to Table 4.4, page 7-232. The part number is
shown on each duct base piece and cap piece.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-229
Table 4.3 HCSS ESI Cable Duct
Connector Cap Cover 1000-000087-01 4
ESI Cable Block Base 1000-000088-01 4
ESI Cable Block Top 1000-000089-01 4
*NOT USED FOR ETSI
Paired HCSS Configurations
Center Base
1000-000090-01 2
Page 7-230 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
*NOT USED FOR ETSI
Center Cap
1000-000091-01 2
*NOT USED FOR ETSI
Frame Mounting Z-Bracket
1000-000092-01 6
Upper Right/Lower Left Base
Corners
1000-000093-01 2
Upper Left/Lower Right Base
Corners
1000-000094-01 2
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-231
Upper Right/Lower Left
Corners, Cap
1000-000095-01 2
Upper Left/Lower Right
Corners, Cap
1000-000096-01 2
rack mount screws used to
secure the six Z-brackets to
the rack
40.0167 18
nuts used to secure the ESI
Cable Block Base
42.5013 16
ESI Cable Block Top to the
Cable Block Base
140.0261 8
Top to the Cable Block Base
140.0055 4
Page 7-232 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work
Conversion Kit
4.92 Refer to Table 4.4, page 7-232 for piece parts included in the ETSI Paired
Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit (Tellabs part number 8008-000024-01).
Table 4.4 ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit (Tellabs part number 8008-000024-01)
ETSI Base, HCSS Shelf
Pairing Duct Center
1000-000367-01 2
ETSI Cover, HCSS Shelf
Pairing Duct Center
1000-000368-01 2
ETSI Bracket, HCSS Shelf
Pairing Rack Support
1000-000372-01 2
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-233
4.93 Follow these steps to install the HCSS ESI Cable Duct Base:
__ 2. Remove the HCSS ESI Cable Duct Kit (Tellabs part number
81.71ESI-DUCT) and associated mounting hardware from the
shipping box.
__ 3. Remove the ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit (Tellabs part
number 8008-000024-01) and associated mounting hardware from
the shipping box.
__ 5. Remove the left and right ESI connector cover plates from the upper
__ 6. Remove the left and right ESI connector cover plates from the lower
Note: The ESI cover plates are no longer used in this configuration. Follow your
company procedures for discard.
Table 4.4 ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit (Tellabs part number 8008-000024-01) (Continued)
Page 7-234 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.34 HCSS Rear ESI Connector Cover Plates
Attaching ESI Cable Block
Bases
__ 7. Locate the four ESI Cable Block Bases (Tellabs part number
1000-000088-01).
Base onto the four threaded studs to the left of the
42.5013).
Base onto the four threaded studs to the right of the
42.5013).
__ 7.5 Repeat substep 7.1, page 7-234 through 7.4,
page 7-234 for the other HCSS.
__ 7.6 Torque all nuts to 14 Inch-Pounds -2.0 Inch-Pounds.
Refer to Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
-48VDC B2
-48RTN B1 -48RTN A1
-48VDC A2
-48RTN A2 -48RTN B2
-48VDC B1 -48VDC A1
left ESI
connector
cover
right ESI
connector
cover
threaded
studs
threaded
studs
threaded
studs
threaded
studs
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-235
Attaching ETSI Mounting
Brackets
__ 8. Locate the 2 ETSI Frame Mounting Brackets (Tellabs part number
1000-000372-01).
__ 9. Attach the ETSI Frame Mounting Bracket to the rear of the rack using
8 rack screws (Tellabs part number 140.0039). Refer to Table 4.5,
page 7-235 and Figure 4.35, page 236.
__ 10. Torque all Frame Mounting Brackets to 45.2 kg-cm. Refer to Torquing
Force Tables, page 7-22.
Table 4.5 ETSI Frame Mounting Bracket Rack Holes
HCSS ETSI Mounting Bracket
Rack Screw Holes Bracket Location
5, 6, 7, 8 left middle
5, 6, 7, 8 right middle
Page 7-236 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.35 HCSS Rack Rear Showing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Block Bases and ETSI Frame Mounting Brackets
back of rack
hole 8
rack holes
8
rack holes
Drawing not to scale.
left bracket
orientation
right bracket
orientation
upper ESI cable block bases
lower ESI cable block bases
7
6
5
hole 7
hole 6
hole 5
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-237
__ 11. Locate the two Upper Left/Lower Right Base Corners (Tellabs part
number 1000-000094-01).
__ 11.1 Position one piece over the top left mounting bracket.
the piece to the top, mounting bracket. Do not torque
time.
__ 11.4 Position one piece over the lower right mounting
bracket. Refer to Figure 4.36, page 238.
the piece to the lower, mounting bracket. Do not torque
time.
Page 7-238 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.36 Rear HCSS ESI Cable Base Duct For Upper Left and Lower Right Corners (Tellabs part number
1000-000094-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
attach to
attach to
mounting
bracket
attach to
attach to
mounting
bracket
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-239
__ 12. Locate the two Upper Right/Lower Left Base Corners (Tellabs part
number 1000-000093-01).
__ 12.1 Position one piece over the top right mounting bracket.
the piece to the top, right mounting bracket. Do not
torque screws at this time.
time.
__ 12.4 Position one piece over the lower left mounting bracket.
the piece to the lower, left mounting bracket. Do not
torque screws at this time.
time.
Page 7-240 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.37 Rear HCSS ESI Cable Base Duct For Upper Right and Lower Left Corners (Tellabs part number
1000-000093-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
attach to
attach to
mounting
bracket
attach to
attach to
mounting
bracket
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-241
__ 13. Locate the two Center Base pieces (Tellabs part number
1000-000367-01). These center pieces are included in the ETSI
Paired Shelf Duct Work Conversion Kit (Tellabs part number
8008-000024-01).
__ 13.1 Position one Center Base piece between the Upper Left
Corner piece and the Lower Left Corner piece, The
piece covers the mounting bracket and overlaps the
upper and lower corner pieces. Refer to Figure 4.38,
page 242.
the piece to the middle, left mounting bracket.
shelf.
the piece to the Upper Left Corner Base piece.
the piece to the Lower Left Corner Base piece.
__ 13.6 Position one Center Base piece between the Upper
Right Corner piece and the Lower Right Corner piece,
The piece covers the middle, right mounting bracket
and overlaps the upper and lower corner pieces. Refer
the piece to the middle, right mounting bracket.
shelf.
the piece to the Upper Right Corner Base piece.
the piece to the Lower Right Corner Base piece.
__ 14. Torque all ESI Cable Base Duct pieces to 20 Inch-Pounds -2.0
Page 7-242 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.38 Rear HCSS ESI Cable Base Duct For Center Left and Right Pieces (Tellabs part number
1000-000090-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
attach at arrows
attach to
mounting
bracket
attach to
mounting
bracket
attach at arrows
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-243
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cables
Interconnect (ESI) Cables to the rear of the rack.
4.95 There are twelve ESI cables that are used to connect the two paired
HCSSs. The cables are included in the HCSS Electrical Shelf Interconnect Kit
(Tellabs part number 81.71ESI-CBL-V). These cables are connected to the
backplane within an EMI shielding duct work.
__ string cutter
__ 1HCSS ESI Cable Kit (Tellabs part number 81.71ESI-CBL-V) which
contains twelve ESI cables
__ 4ESI Cable Block Tops (Tellabs part number 1000-000089-01)
__ 8screws (Tellabs part number 140.0261)
__ 4longer screws (Tellabs part number 140.0055)
__ waxed lacing cord (Tellabs part number 60.0870)
Cables
4.99 Follow these steps to install the HCSS ESI Cables:
__ 1. Verify that the ESI Cable Duct Base is installed. Refer to Installing
Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Bases, page 7-228.
__ 3. Remove the twelve HCSS ESI Cables from the shipping box (Tellabs
part number 81.71ESI-CBL-V).
__ 4. Locate the four ESI Cable Block Tops (Tellabs part number
1000-000089-01). Refer to Figure 4.39, page 243.
Figure 4.39 ESI Cable Block Tops (Tellabs part number 1000-000089-01)
__ 5. Locate the ESI Cable Block Top screws. Refer to Table 4.6,
page 7-244.
Page 7-244 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Starting with the upper HCSS, P11-1, connect the ESI cables to the
ESI connectors as shown in Table 4.7, page 7-245, Table 4.8,
page 7-245, Figure 4.40, page 7-245, and Figure 4.41, page 7-246.
__ 7.1 At the upper HCSS, position the right angle cable
connector.
__ 7.3 Once the connection is in place, route the cable down to
the lower shelf.
__ 7.4 Lace down the cable to the inside of the ESI cable duct
base as you route it to the lower HCSS.
__ 7.5 At the lower HCSS, position the right angle cable
connector.
__ 7.7 Repeat for all ESI cables (12 qty).
Table 4.6 ESI Cable Block Top Screws
ESI Cable Block Top to Base
140.0261 8
Top to Base
140.0055 4
Caution:
Use caution when connecting the ESI Cables to the rear of the HCSSs. Improper
alignment can cause bent connector pins.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-245
Figure 4.40 HCSS ESI Backplane Connectors
Note: The twelve ESI Cables are black (Tellabs part number 250-0131). Some
figures may show the cables with different colors to show each cable
connection.
Table 4.7 Left Side ESI Connections
Table 4.8 Right Side ESI Connections
Page 7-246 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 4.41 Paired HCSS ESI Cable Connections
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-247
__ 8. Attach the four ESI Cable Block Tops to the ESI Cable Block Bases.
__ 8.1 Position the ESI Cable Block Top over the ESI cables.
__ 8.2 Secure the ESI Cable Block Top using one screw
(Tellabs part number 140.0261) at the top of the block
and one screw at the bottom.
__ 8.3 Use the longer screw (Tellabs part number 140.0055) to
secure the center of the ESI Cable Block Top.
__ 8.4 Torque to 10 Inch-Pounds -1.0 Inch-Pounds. Refer to
__ 8.5 Repeat for each ESI Cable Block Top.
Go to Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers, page 7-247.
Installing Paired HCSS ESI Cable Duct Covers
Interconnect (ESI) Cable Duct Caps to the rear of the rack.
4.101 There are four ESI Cable Duct Caps that are used to cover the ESI cable
connections at the rear of the paired HCSSs.
Materials 4.104 The following materials are required, refer to Table 4.3, page 7-229 and
Table 4.4, page 7-232:
__ 4Connector Cap Covers (Tellabs part number 1000-000087-01)
__ 2Upper Right/Lower Left Corners, Cap (Tellabs part number
1000-000095-01)
__ 2Upper Left/Lower Right Corners, Cap (Tellabs part number
1000-000096-01)
__ 2Center Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000368-01)
These center pieces are included in the ETSI Paired Shelf Duct Work
Conversion Kit (Tellabs part number 8008-000024-01).
__ 194ESI Duct Screws (Tellabs part number 140.0035)
Cable Duct Covers
4.105 Follow these steps to install the HCSS ESI Cable Caps:
__ 1. Verify that the ESI Cables are installed. Refer to Installing Paired
HCSS ESI Cables, page 7-243.
Page 7-248 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Locate the four Connector Cap Covers (Tellabs part number
1000-000087-01).
__ 3.1 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the upper left ESI
time.
__ 3.3 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the upper right
time.
__ 3.5 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the lower left ESI
time.
__ 3.7 Position a Connector Cap Cover over the lower right
time.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-249
Figure 4.42 Connector Cap Covers (Tellabs part number 1000-000087-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows
attach at arrows
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
Page 7-250 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 4. Locate the two Upper Left/Lower Right Corners, Cap (Tellabs part
number 1000-000096-01).
__ 4.1 Position the Upper Left Corner piece over the upper left
secure the Upper Left Corner piece. Do not torque
__ 4.3 Position the Lower Right Corner piece over the lower
secure the Lower Right Corner piece. Do not torque
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-251
Figure 4.43 Upper Left and Lower Right Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000096-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows
attach at arrows
Page 7-252 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 5. Locate the two Upper Right/Lower Left Corners, Cap (Tellabs part
number 1000-000095-01).
__ 5.1 Position the Upper Right Corner piece over the upper
secure the Upper Right Corner piece. Do not torque
__ 5.3 Position the Lower Left Corner piece over the lower left
secure the Lower Left Corner piece. Do not torque
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-253
Figure 4.44 Upper Right/Lower Left Corners, Cap (Tellabs part number 1000-000095-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows
attach at arrows
Page 7-254 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 6. Locate the two Center Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000368-01).
__ 6.1 Position a Center Cap over the ESI cables on the left
side, between the two left corner pieces. Refer to
secure the left Center Cap. Do not torque screws at this
time.
__ 6.3 Position a Center Cap over the ESI cables on the right
side, between the two right corner pieces. Refer to
secure the right Center Cap. Do not torque screws at
this time.
__ 7. Torque all ESI Cable Duct Covers to 20 Inch-Pounds -2.0
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-255
Figure 4.45 Left and Right Center Caps (Tellabs part number 1000-000368-01)
back of rack
Drawing
not to scale.
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
P11-1
P11-2
P11-3
P11-4
P10-1
P10-3
P9-1
P9-2
P9-3
P9-4
P10-2
P10-4
attach at arrows attach at arrows
5. Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks Installation
Page 7-256 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
5. Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks
5.01 Patch Panels and DCMs are typically installed in Relay Rack Spacer
Panels (RRSs) or in an Auxiliary Rack. Various patch panels are available for
managing the optical cabling for the system.
The RCMM patch panel and the high-density port patch panel are
required whenever the RCMM module is used (SBOADM
configuration). It is not required for a Tellabs 7100 OTS OLA
configuration.
The OPSM patch panel is used with the 81.71329 OPSM. The
82.71329 OPSM is not compatible with the OPSM patch panel.
The dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) compensate for
dispersion and are optional.
The Port Shelf patch panel is optional and provides a method of optical
fiber management.
The Y-Cable patch panel is optional and provides a method of
protection for paired OTNM-D and TGTM-E modules.
The 81.714144 Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 1 to 44 (OMD44-1)
and the 81.714188 Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 45 to 88
(OMD44-45) act as a patch panel for the RCMM-8D88 module used in
SBOADM configurations. Each RCMM-8D88 requires one OMD44-1
for the first 44-channels. One OMD44-45 is required for channels 45
through 88. Each RCMM-8D88 may require two OMD44 modules
which are installed in the spacer panels. The 82.714144/88 Optical
Mux/Demux patch panels are not compatible with the RCMM-8D88
modules.
The 82.714144 Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 1 to 44 (OMD44-1)
and the 82.714188 Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 45 to 88
(OMD44-45) act as a patch panel for the OADM88-xR modules used
in SBOADM configurations. Each OADM88-xR requires one
OMD44-1 for the first 44-channels. One OMD44-45 is required for
channels 45 through 88. Each OADM88-xR may require two OMD44
modules which are installed in the spacer panels. The 81.714144/88
Optical Mux/Demux patch panels are not compatible with the
OADM88-xR modules. The OMD44 modules are not required for a
Tellabs 7100 OTS OLA configuration.
5.02 Select one of the following topics:
Mounting the DCM Horizontally in a Rack, page 7-257
Relay Rack Spacer Panels (RRSs), page 7-259
Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel, page 7-287
an Auxiliary Rack Using a Rack Within a Rack (RWR), page 7-299
Installation 5. Installing Equipment in Spacer Panels or Auxiliary Racks
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-257
Mounting the DCM Horizontally in a Rack
5.03 It is also possible to mount the DCM chassis horizontally in the rack below
the lower air baffle for the top shelf only in a Tellabs 7100 OTS with one shelf in the
rack; for example, a 7100 OLA may contain only one shelf in a rack. Refer to Figure
5.1, page 7-258.
5.04 To mount the DCM chassis horizontally in a rack, obtain the following
material and complete the procedure:
Materials __ quantity and type of DCM chassis as required by the customer NE
configuration (Tellabs part number 81.071DCM-SHLF). Refer to the
Tellabs 7100/7100N Software Release Document and the Dispersion
Compensation Module (DCM) module practices for available DCMs.
The 81.071DCM_SHLF includes the mounting bracket.
One of the following items.
If mounting the DCM without a fiber trough:
__ one19-23 inch rack adapter, 1 RU (Tellabs part number 14.9074)
or
if mounting the DCM with the fiber trough:
__ one2 RU adapter (Tellabs part number 149.0247)
__ DCM blank filler modules as needed (Tellabs part number
81.7100DCM-BLK)
__ 1 RU blank panel (Tellabs part number 149.0322)
__ fourrack screws, hex head 1224 x 1/2 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs
__ (optional) patch panel vinyl pocket to display the cable running list
Tools 5.05 Obtain the following tools:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent equipment relay rack for the DCM
chassis. Refer to Figure 5.1, page 7-258.
Page 7-258 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.1 Horizontal Placement of the DCM Shelf in a Rack with 7100 OLA
__ 2. Verify the proper placement of the mounting ears by referring to the
DCM module practice, 61530/61531/71532 Dispersion Compensation
Module.
The last set of holes in each of the DCM shelf mounting brackets align
with the rows of holes on each side of the shelf that are closest to the
front edge of the shelf. In this position, the ear of the bracket measures
approximately 4 inches from the front lip of the shelf. Refer to Figure
5.2, page 7-259.
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
air baffle
DCM chassis
fiber trough
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-259
Figure 5.2 DCM Shelf Mounting Holes for Brackets
__ 3. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the DCM Chassis.
__ 4. Place the DCM Chassis into the Rack. Refer to Figure 5.1,
page 7-258.
__ 5. Use four screws, attach the DCM Chassis to the Rack. Refer to Figure
5.1, page 7-258.
__ 7. Repeat this procedure for each DCM Chassis required for the system
configuration.
Note: DCMs are installed during acceptance testing of the system.
Installing the DCM Chassis, Patch Panels, and Fiber Management in Relay
Rack Spacer Panels (RRSs)
5.06 Select one of the following procedures to install equipment in the RRS:
Labeling for Patch Panels and DCM Chassis in RRSs, page 7-260
Suggested Installation Locations in RRSs, page 7-260
Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-270
Installing the 88-Channel OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RRS,
page 7-271
Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-273
Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-275
Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS,
page 7-277
Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP) in
the RRS, page 7-282
Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-285

mounting holes
shelf front
bracket
4 inches
Page 7-260 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-289
Installing the DCM Chassis in the RRS, page 7-291
Installing the Relay Rack Spacer (RRS) Spool Covers, page 7-295
Installing the Patch Panel Top Cover, page 7-296
Labeling for Patch Panels and DCM Chassis in RRSs
purposes, Tellabs recommends using the labeling method shown in Figure 5.3,
page 7-260.
Figure 5.3 Labeling Method
Go to Suggested Installation Locations in RRSs, page 7-260.
Suggested Installation Locations in RRSs
5.08 The patch panels and DCMs are located in the relay rack spacer, which
are shipped with removable fiber management spools. Removing the spools
provides space for each type of patch panel. Tellabs recommends locating the
patch panel as close to the corresponding module and shelf as possible to reduce
cable lengths.
5.09 For suggested installation locations refer to the following figures:
Figure 5.4, Example of Patch Panel, DCM, and Fiber Trough
Locations in Single Rack Configurations, page 7-262
Locations for 4-Degree SBOADM, page 7-263
Locations in 8-Degree SBOADM (44-channel), page 7-264
Figure 5.7, Example of OMD44-xx Patch Panels, DCMs, and Fiber
Troughs in 4-Degree SBOADM (88-Channels), page 7-265
Troughs in 8-Degree SBOADM (88-Channels) with a Main Shelf and
Secondary Main Shelf, page 7-266
Relay rack number - L/left or R/right - 1-top, 2-center, 3-bottom - A, B, C mounting positions
L R
A B C
The example shown above may be: RR#331 - R - 1 - C
1-top
2-center
3-bottom
RR#
mounting positions
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-261
Troughs in an 4-Degree SBOADM (44-Channels) with One Main
Shelf, One Port Shelf, and Two HCSS, page 7-267
Figure 5.10, Example of OMD44-xx Patch Panels, DCMs, Fiber
Troughs, and OMD88 Patch Panels in 8-Degree SBOADM
(88-Channels) with a Main Shelf and Secondary Main Shelf
(2-Degrees Configured for Directionless Add/Drop Terminal),
page 7-268
Figure 5.11, Example of 44- or 88-Channel Spacer Configuration with
Two Main Shelves, Two Port Shelves, and Two HCSSs, page 7-269
Note: 83.07100B-60 High-Capacity Switch Shelves (HCSSs) are typically
deployed with a 10-inch spacer and a wire shield on both sides of the shelf.
The HCSS requires an HCSS PDU (Tellabs part number 82.71020H) or
alternate power source.
Page 7-262 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.4 Example of Patch Panel, DCM, and Fiber Trough Locations in Single Rack Configurations
HD PPP = high-density port shelf patch panel
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
D
C
M
-
D
D
C
M
-
B
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
DCMs
installed in
the left and
right spacer
panels
BFAP
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-263
Figure 5.5 Example of Patch Panel, DCM, and Fiber Trough Locations for 4-Degree SBOADM
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
rack 1 rack 2
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
D
C
M
-
D
D
C
M
-
B
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
BFAP BFAP
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
port shelf 3
(PS-4)
Page 7-264 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.6 Example of Patch Panel, DCM, and Fiber Trough Locations in 8-Degree SBOADM (44-channel)
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
D
R
C
M
M
-
B
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
F
R
C
M
M
-
H
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
E
R
C
M
M
-
G
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
HD PPP= high-density port shelf patch panel
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
first
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
second
main shelf
(MS-15)
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
G
D
C
M
-
E
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
F
D
C
M
-
H
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
BFAP BFAP
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
rack 1 rack 2
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-265
Figure 5.7 Example of OMD44-xx Patch Panels, DCMs, and Fiber Troughs in 4-Degree SBOADM (88-Channels)
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
6-inch spacer panels
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
4 x 4 horizontal fiber
duct with cover
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
2
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
port shelf 3
(PS-4)
BFAP BFAP
duct with cover
rack 1 rack 2
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
Page 7-266 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.8 Example of OMD44-xx Patch Panels, DCMs, and Fiber Troughs in 8-Degree SBOADM (88-Channels)
with a Main Shelf and Secondary Main Shelf
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
first
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
duct with cover
BFAP
D
C
M
-
G
D
C
M
-
E
second
main shelf
(MS-15)
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
E
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
G
D
C
M
-
F
D
C
M
-
H
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
H
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
F
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
E
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
G
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
H
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
F
duct with cover
BFAP
4 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
rack 1 rack 2
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-267
Figure 5.9 Example of OMD44-xx Patch Panels, DCMs, and Fiber Troughs in an 4-Degree SBOADM
(44-Channels) with One Main Shelf, One Port Shelf, and Two HCSS
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
duct with cover
BFAP
duct with cover
HCSS 1
(PS-3)
HCSS 2
(PS-4)
HCSS PDU
Fiber spools
can be replaced
with OPSM
patch panels,
fiber troughs, or
Y-Cable patch
panels
4 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
rack 1 rack 2
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
Page 7-268 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.10 Example of OMD44-xx Patch Panels, DCMs, Fiber Troughs, and OMD88 Patch Panels in 8-Degree
SBOADM (88-Channels) with a Main Shelf and Secondary Main Shelf (2-Degrees Configured for Directionless
Add/Drop Terminal)
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
first
main shelf
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
AD
C
M
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
O
M
D
8
8

P
P
duct with cover
BFAP
second
main shelf
(MS-15)
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
duct with cover
BFAP
4 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
rack 1 rack 2
D
C
M
-
G
D
C
M
-
E
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
E
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
ED
C
M
-
F
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
F
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
F
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
G
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
G
O
M
D
8
8

P
P
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
2 x 4 vertical
fiber duct
with cover
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
blank filler plate,
OPSM patch panel,
or Y-Cable patch
panel
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-269
Figure 5.11 Example of 44- or 88-Channel Spacer Configuration with Two Main Shelves, Two Port Shelves, and
Two HCSSs
DCM-C DCM-A
f
i
r
s
t
m
a
i
n

s
h
e
l
f

(
M
S
-
1
)
p
o
r
t

s
h
e
l
f

1

(
P
S
-
2
)
OMD44-1-A
OMD44-1-C
DCM-B DCM-D
OMD44-1-D
OMD44-1-B
1 RU Fiber trough
OMD44-45-A
OMD44-45-C
1 RU Fiber trough
OMD44-45-D
OMD44-45-B
4

x

4

h
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
1
0
-
i
n
c
h

s
p
a
c
e
r

p
a
n
e
l
s
B
F
A
P
DCM-G DCM-E
s
e
c
o
n
d
m
a
i
n

s
h
e
l
f

(
M
S
-
1
5
)
OMD44-1-E
OMD44-1-G
DCM-F DCM-H
OMD44-1-H
OMD44-1-F
1 RU Fiber trough
OMD44-45-E
OMD44-45-G
1 RU Fiber trough
OMD44-45-H
OMD44-45-F
4

x

4

h
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
1
0
-
i
n
c
h

s
p
a
c
e
r

p
a
n
e
l
s
B
F
A
P
1
0
-
i
n
c
h

s
p
a
c
e
r

p
a
n
e
l
s
H
C
S
S

1

(
P
S
-
4
)
H
C
S
S

2

(
P
S
-
5
)
H
C
S
S

P
D
U
F
i
b
e
r

s
p
o
o
l
s

c
a
n

b
e

r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d

w
i
t
h

O
P
S
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
s
,

f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
s
,

o
r

Y
-
C
a
b
l
e

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
s
4

x

4

h
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
r
a
c
k

1
r
a
c
k

2
r
a
c
k

3
p
o
r
t

s
h
e
l
f

2

(
P
S
-
3
)
4

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
4

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
Page 7-270 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RRS
5.10 The RCMM patch panel is an optional feature of the relay rack spacer. It is
located where the blank filler plates are removed. The RCMM patch panel provides
fiber terminations as well as a fiber trough for fiber management. One RCMM patch
panel accommodates 44 port connections using LC/UPC connectors and 8 cables
with MPO/M connectors.
Material 5.11 Obtain the following materials:
__ RCMM patch panel (Tellabs part number 81.7100PP-R-XM)
Where:
X = Cable length in meters, from 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m,
15 m, and 20 m.
__ RCMM fiber trough (Tellabs part number 179.1398)
__ eightrack screws, twelve24 x 5/16 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs part
number 40.0253)
__ Patch panel top cover (Tellabs part number 180.0430)
Installing the RCMM Patch
Panel
__ 1. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the RCMM patch panel.
Refer to Figures 5.4, page 7-262 through 5.11, page 7-269.
Note: The middle position between the two RCMM patch panels is for the RCMM
fiber trough. Each of the three units is 1 RU wide, to fit within the 3 RU
space. Refer to Figure 5.12, page 7-271.
__ 2. Remove the blank panel from the front of the rack spacer by removing
the four screws that attach it.
__ 3. Place the RCMM patch panel shelf into the rack spacer where you just
removed the blank panel. Orient the panel so that the cable assembly
with eight MPO connectors are at the bottom of the patch panel. Refer
__ 4. Use the 40.0253 screws to attach the RCMM patch panel to the front
of the rack spacer.
Installing the Fiber Trough __ 5. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the fiber trough. The proper
location is in the middle position of the spacer opening.
__ 6. Use the 40.0253 screws to install the fiber trough adapter brackets in
the middle position in the top of the opening in the rack spacer.
__ 7. Place the fiber trough into the center of the rack spacer opening.
Orient the panel so that it aligns vertically next to the RCMM patch
panel and over the adapter brackets.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-271
__ 8. Attach the fiber trough to the brackets on the front of the rack spacer
with the screws from the fiber trough kit. The screws are approximately
3/4 inch long. Refer to Figure 5.12, page 7-271.
__ 9. Attach the door to the fiber trough by aligning the top and bottom
edges and pressing until the door hinge snaps into place.
__ 10. Attach the patch panel top cover kit to the front of the rack spacer.
Refer to Installing the Patch Panel Top Cover, page 7-296.
__ 11. Apply the vinyl pockets for the cable running lists. Refer to Figure 5.29,
page 7-299.
Figure 5.12 RCMM Patch Panel and RCMM Fiber Trough
Installing the 88-Channel OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RRS,
page 7-271
Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-273
Installing the 88-Channel OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RRS
5.13 The OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 are used as patch panels for the
RCMM-8D88 to transponder connections. They are typically installed in the relay
rack spacers where the blank filler plates are removed. The OMD44-x patch panels
provide fiber terminations as well as a fiber trough for fiber management. The
OMD44-1 patch panel accommodates port connections 1 through 44. The
OMD44-45 accommodates port connections 45 through 88.
__ one OMD44-1 patch panel (Tellabs part number 81.714144)
RCMM patch
panel fiber trough
6-inch relay
rack spacer
RCMM patch panel
fiber trough bracket
with 40.0253 screws
fiber trough
bracket with
40.0253 screws
40.0253 screws
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
1 U each
R
C
M
M
-
B
/
D

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
fiber trough door
Solid metal
panel to LEFT
R
C
M
M
-
A
/
C

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
Rx Tx
IN OUT
40.0253 screws
Page 7-272 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
or
__ fiber trough (Tellabs part number 179.1398)
number 40.0253)
Installing the OMD44
Modules
__ 1. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the OMD44. Refer to
Note: The middle position between two patch panels is used for the fiber trough
or DCMs. Each of the three units is 1 RU wide, to fit within the 3 RU space.
__ 2. Remove the blank panel from the front of the rack spacer by removing
the four screws that attach it.
__ 3. Place the OMD44 into the rack spacer where you just removed the
blank panel. Orient the panel so that the DWDM port and data port are
at the bottom. Refer to Figure 5.13, page 7-273.
__ 4. Use the screws (Tellabs part number 40.0253) to attach the OMD44
to the front of the rack spacer.
Installing the Fiber Trough __ 5. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the fiber trough. The proper
location is in the middle position of the spacer opening.
__ 6. Use the screws (Tellabs part number 40.0253) to install the fiber
trough adapter brackets in the middle position in the top of the opening
in the rack spacer.
__ 7. Place the fiber trough into the center of the rack spacer opening.
Orient the panel so that it aligns vertically next to the DCMs and over
the adapter brackets.
__ 8. Attach the fiber trough to the brackets on the front of the rack spacer
with the screws from the fiber trough kit. The screws are approximately
3/4 inch long. Refer to Figure 5.13, page 7-273.
__ 9. Attach the door to the fiber trough by aligning the top and bottom
edges and pressing until the door hinge snaps into place.
__ 10. Attach the patch panel top cover kit to the front of the rack spacer.
Refer to Installing the Patch Panel Top Cover, page 7-296.
page 7-299.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-273
__ 12. Repeat this procedure for other OMD44 modules.
Figure 5.13 OMD44-1 or OMD44-45 Patch Panel and Fiber Trough
Go to Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-273.
Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RRS
5.16 When an OPSM is used in the system, one OPSM patch panel is required
for each OPSM module. The OPSM patch panel resides in the relay rack spacer.
The OPSM patch panel provides terminations for four protection circuits, as well as
a fiber trough for fiber management.
Materials 5.17 Obtain this material and follow these steps:
__ OPSM patch panel (Tellabs part number 81.7100PP-O-XM)
Where:
X = Cable length in meters, from 1 m, 3 m, 5 m,
10 m, 15 m, and 20 m.
__ OPSM shelf (Tellabs part number 81.071PP-SHLF)
__ (optional as needed) patch panel blank plate (Tellabs part number
81.7100PP-BLK)
__ 1 RU fiber trough (Tellabs part number 179.1398)
patch panel fiber
trough
relay rack
spacer
OMD44-x patch
panel
fiber trough
bracket with
40.0253 screws
fiber trough
bracket with
40.0253 screws
40.0253 screws
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
1 U each
R
C
M
M
-
B
/
D

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
fiber trough door
Solid metal
panel to LEFT
R
C
M
M
-
A
/
C

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
Rx Tx
IN OUT
40.0253 screws
Page 7-274 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ twelverack screws, 12 24 x 5/16 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs part
number 40.0253)
__ Reuse the existing spool cover that was removed to accommodate the
patch panel
Installing the OPSM Patch
Panel
__ 1. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the OPSM patch panel.
__ 2. Remove the fiber management spool assembly from the front of the
rack spacer by removing the four screws that attach it.
__ 3. Place the OPSM patch panel shelf into the rack spacer where you just
removed the spool assembly. Orienting the shelf so that the bottom
plate is to the left.
__ 4. Use the screws that are included in the OPSM patch panel kit to attach
the OPSM patch panel to the front of the rack spacer.
Panel Fiber Trough
__ 5. Install the fiber trough next to the OPSM patch panel in the spacer. Fill
any remaining space with a 1 RU blank filler panel.
__ 6. Use the screws that are included in the fiber trough kit to attach the
fiber trough to the front of the rack spacer.
__ 7. Attach the existing spool cover, which was removed to accommodate
the patch panel.
page 7-299.
Figure 5.14, page 7-275 shows four OPSM patch panels in a relay
rack spacer.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-275
Figure 5.14 OPSM Patch Panels (4) Located in the Relay Rack Spacer
Go to Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-275.
Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS
5.19 The port shelf patch panel is an optional feature of the relay rack spacer
that replaces the fiber management spools. The port shelf patch panel provides
terminations for protection circuits, as well as a fiber management trough.
__ 84 connector port shelf patch panel (Tellabs part number 180.0132)
__ port shelf patch panel fiber trough (Tellabs part number 179.1398)
__ sixthumbscrews
__ fourrack screws, 1224 x 5/16 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs part
number 40.0253)
OPSM patch panel
relay rack spacer
fiber trough
Tx Rx
OUT IN
Page 7-276 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Port Shelf Patch
Panel
__ 1. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the port shelf patch panel.
__ 3. Place the port shelf patch panel into the rack spacer where you just
removed the spool assembly. Orient the panel so that the lower
connector numbers are at the top of the unit and the fiber optic
connectors are next to the NE that it services.
__ 4. Use the screws that are included in the port shelf patch panel kit to
attach the port shelf patch panel to the front of the rack spacer.
Installing the Port Shelf Patch
Panel Fiber Trough
__ 5. Install the fiber trough next to the port shelf patch panel in the spacer.
__ 7. Attach the front and back polycarbonate covers to the unit using the
thumbscrews that are provided. Refer to Figure 5.15, page 7-276.
page 7-299.
Figure 5.15 Port Shelf Patch Panel (Front View)
Go to Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the
RRS, page 7-277.
polycarbonate
cover - back
polycarbonate
cover - front
6-inch relay
rack spacer
port shelf
patch panel
screws
thumbscrews
thumbscrew
thumbscrews
thumbscrew
thumbscrew
F
a
c
ilit
y
W
o
r
k
in
g
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-277
Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RRS
5.22 If the 2RU high-density port shelf patch panel (HD PPP) is installed in the
upper opening in the spacer panel, place the fiber troughs on the side of the
opening farthest from the equipment shelf and place the patch panel on the side of
the opening closest to the equipment shelf. This allows convenient routing of the
fiber cables out the bottom of the fiber trough and around a fiber management
spool before routing the cables into the shelf fiber trough. Refer to Figures 5.4,
page 7-262 through 5.11, page 7-269.
5.23 If the HD PPP is installed in the lower opening in the spacer panel, place
the fiber trough on the side of the opening closest to the equipment shelf and the
patch panel on the side of the opening away from the equipment shelf. This allows
the fiber cables to be routed out the opening in the side of the fiber trough and
directly into the shelf fiber trough, Refer to the lower portion of Figure 5.16,
page 7-278.
5.24 The high-density port shelf patch panel kit (Tellabs part number 180.0611)
includes the following pieces:
__ 1 patch panel with 104 duplex LC connector adapters on the front and
back of the panel
__ 2 fiber management troughs:
__ 1 fiber management trough with an opening at the sides. One set
of cable management fingers has been removed to allow cables
to be routed in/out the sides of the fiber trough.
__ 1 fiber management trough without the opening on the sides.
__ 2 fiber management trough covers
__ 2 fiber management trough mounting brackets
5.25 Figure 5.16, page 7-278 shows the high-density port shelf patch panel
mounting locations in the rack spacer panels.
Page 7-278 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.16 Spacer Panel Mounting Locations for High-Density Port Shelf Patch
Panel
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-279
5.26 To install a high-density port shelf patch panel and fiber management
troughs on a spacer panel, proceed as follows:
__ 1. At the spacer panel, remove the 1 RU (rack unit) wide filler panel and
the 2 RU wide filler panel from the spacer panel opening.
The spacer panel opening may also have fiber management spools
installed in the opening. If so, reroute any affected fiber cables and
remove the fiber management spools from the spacer panel opening.
__ 2. Determine where the fiber management troughs are to be located as
follows:
__ 2.1 If the opening in the spacer panel is at the top of the
spacer panel, install the fiber troughs on the edge of the
opening farthest away from the equipment shelf. Refer
to Figure 5.16, page 7-278 and Figure 5.22,
page 7-277.
__ 2.2 If the opening in the spacer panel is at the bottom of the
spacer panel, install the fiber troughs on the edge of the
opening closest to the equipment shelf. Refer to Figure
5.16, page 7-278 and paragraph 5.23, page 7-277
Note: The patch panel kit includes both metric and American Standard screws.
Use the 12 x 24 x 1-inch American Standard screws on NEBS compliant
racks.
__ 3. At the front of the spacer panel, attach a mounting bracket on the
upper edge of the opening in the spacer panel using two screws
provided. Position the mounting bracket as determined in step 2,
page 7-279. Refer to Figure 5.17, page 7-279.
__ 4. At the front of the spacer panel, attach a mounting bracket on the lower
edge of the opening in the spacer panel using two screws provided.
Position the mounting bracket as determined in step 2, page 7-279.
Figure 5.17 Attaching Mounting Brackets and Fiber Troughs to the Spacer Panel
Opening
Page 7-280 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 5. At the front of the spacer panel, attach the fiber trough with the opening
in the sides to the two mounting brackets using one screw for each
bracket. Refer to Figure 5.17, page 7-279 and Figure 5.18,
page 7-281.
__ 6. At the front of the spacer panel, position the fiber trough cover so the
tabs on the cover fit between the retainers built into the fingers of the
fiber trough and snap the cover into place.
__ 7. At the back of the spacer panel, attach the remaining fiber trough to
the two brackets using one screw for each bracket. Refer to Figure
5.18, page 7-281.
__ 8. At the back of the spacer panel, position the fiber trough cover so the
tabs on the cover fit between the retainers built into the fingers of the
fiber trough and snap the cover into place.
__ 9. Orient the patch panel so the LC connectors are numbered in
ascending order from left to right and from top to bottom.
__ 10. At the front of the spacer panel, attach the patch panel to the upper
and lower edges of the opening in the spacer panel using two screws
at the top of the panel and two screws at the bottom of the panel. Refer
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-281
Figure 5.18 Mounting High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel and Fiber Troughs to
Spacer Panel
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
Notes:
1. Install the fiber trough with the openings in the sides on the front of the
spacer panel.
2. The mounting brackets attach to the edge of the spacer panel opening.
3. The fiber troughs attach to the mounting brackets.
4. The fiber trough covers snap onto the fiber troughs.
5. The patch panel mounts beside the fiber troughs and attaches to the
edges of the spacer panel opening.
Note 2
Page 7-282 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP) in the RRS
5.27 The 3RU high-density port shelf patch panel (88CHPP) is typically
installed in the upper opening or lower opening in a 10-inch spacer panel. There is
no fiber trough associated with this patch panel. Fibers are routed in the vertical
fiber ducts which are mounted on the 10-inch spacer panels. Refer to Figure 5.19,
page 7-282.
Figure 5.19 Spacer Panel Mounting Locations for 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP)
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
main shelf
port shelf
(PS-2)
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
D
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
duct with cover
BFAP
duct with cover
HCSS
(PS-3)
HCSS
(PS-4)
HCSS PDU
Fiber spools
can be replaced
with OPSM
patch panels,
fiber troughs, or
Y-Cable patch
panels
rack 1 rack 2
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
2

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
4

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
v
e
r
s
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-283
5.28 The 3RU high-density port shelf patch panel kit (Tellabs part number
81.71S-88CHPP) includes the following pieces:
back of the panel
__ 1 fiber insertion/extraction tool
__ 1 flashlight kit for the fiber insertion/extraction tool
racks. Use the Number 6 metric screws on ETSI compliant racks.
5.29 To install a 3RU high-density port shelf patch panel (88CHPP) perform the
following procedure:
or the 2 RU wide filler panel from the spacer panel opening.
Page 7-284 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.20 Mounting 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP) to
Spacer 10-Inch Spacer Panel
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-285
Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RRS
5.30 The Optical Mux/Demux 88 Channel (OMD88) Patch Panel (Tellabs part
number 81.71S_OMD88) is available in the RDXM Directionless Kit (Tellabs part
number C7100RDXM_KIT). The kit contains one OMD88 patch panel, one
DX RCMM, and one LOAME-88. The OMD88 is used when a degree is configured
as a directionless, add/drop terminal. The OMD88 is typically installed in a spacer
panel.
5.31 Figure 5.21, page 7-286 shows an example of an OMD88 patch panel
mounting location in the rack spacer panels.
5.32 Directionless, add/drop terminals do not use OMD44-x patch panels or
DCMs.
5.33 The RDXM Directionless Kit (Tellabs part number 81.71S_OMD88)
includes the following piece parts:
__ one 81.71S_OMD88, Optical Mux/Demux 88 Channel (OMD88) Patch
Panel with 88 duplex LC/UPC connector adapters on the front and
back of the panel, 1 DWDM LC/UPC connector, and 1 RJ45 connector
__ one 81.71T-DXRCMM Directionless Reconfigurable Channel
__ one 81.71123C Line Output Amplifier Module - Enhanced 88 Channel
(LOAM-E88)
Note: The RCMM-8D88 and LOAM-E88 modules are installed when the system
is acceptance tested.
Page 7-286 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.21 Spacer Panel Mounting Locations with OMD88 Patch Panel
5.34 To install an OMD88 patch panel and fiber management trough on a
spacer panel, proceed as follows:
the 2 RU wide filler panel from the spacer panel opening.
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
R
C
M
M
-
8
D
8
8
D
C
M
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
OMD88
duct with cover
A
-
S
i
d
e

L
I
A
M
-
E
8
8
A
-
S
i
d
e

L
O
A
M
-
E
8
8
A
-
S
i
d
e

R
C
M
M
-
8
D
8
8
C
-
S
i
d
e

L
I
A
M
-
E
8
8
C
-
S
i
d
e

L
O
A
M
-
E
8
8
C
-
S
i
d
e

R
C
M
M
-
8
D
8
8
B
F
M
,

O
F
M
,

M
O
F
M
L
O
A
M
-
E
8
8
B
-
S
i
d
e

R
C
M
M
-
8
D
8
8
B
-
S
i
d
e

L
O
A
M
-
E
8
8
B
-
S
i
d
e

L
I
A
M
-
E
8
8
S
P
M
S
P
M
B
F
M
,

O
F
M
,

M
O
F
M
BFAP
D
W
D
M

I
n
D
W
D
M

O
u
t
D
W
D
M

O
u
t
D
W
D
M

I
n
DWDM Out
D
W
D
M

I
n
RX
DWDM Out
DWDM In
TX
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
8
8
C
H
P
P

(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-287
Figure 5.22 OMD88 Mounting Holes
Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel
5.35 The Y-Cable patch panel provides signal protection on the Tellabs
7100/7100N OTS through paired transponders (HDTGs, TGTM-Es, OTNM-Ds,
FGTMs, FGTM-Ms). The signal is split at the Y-Cable patch panel and each copy
of the signal is directed to a pre-defined facility on each transponder, resulting in a
working signal and a protecting signal. Both signals are forwarded to the DWDM
network in different directions. On the destination side, the signals are received by
the transponder, compared for integrity, and one of the copies is forwarded to the
targeted client. The Y-Cable protection scheme is non-revertive. Refer to Figure
5.23, page 7-288.
Page 7-288 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
5.36 The Y-Cable patch panel is an optional feature that can be installed in the
spacer panels or within cabinets that can be mounted in 19-inch racks, 23-inch
racks, or on the wall. Select one of the following procedures for mounting the
Y-cable patch panel:
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-289
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in a 19-Inch or 23-Inch Rack,
page 7-290
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in a Wall Mount Cabinet, page 7-291
Figure 5.23 Y-Cable Patch Panel With Cabling
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
C
L
E
I

C
O
D
E
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
C
O
D
E
Sync
Fault
Power
OK to Pull
Active
(green)
(red)
TGTM-E
OUT
P
O
R
T
In
In
Line
O
u
t
C
L
E
I

C
O
D
E
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
C
O
D
E
Sync
Fault
Power
OK to Pull
Active
(green)
(red)
TGTM-E
OUT
P
O
R
T
In
In
Line
O
u
t
at the facility patch panel
working
transponder
protecting
transponder
Y-Cable
patch panel
TX
Out
RX
In
T
X
O
u
t
R
X
I
n
cable part
number
155.06xx,
155.0183-xxxx,
cable
part
number
155.0001-xxxx
or
255-0016-Cxxxx
connector
layout
duplex
LC/UPC
connector
layout
LC/UPC
routes to a duplex SC/UPC connection
duplex
or
155.0175-xxx
Note: The FGTM or FGTM-M transponder has simplex SC/UPC connectors so
the transponder to Y-Cable patch panel (duplex LC/UPC connectors)
connection requires two SC/UPC to LC/UPC cables (Tellabs part number
155.03xx or 255-0030-CXXXX).
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-289
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RRS
5.37 The Y-Cable patch panel is an optional feature that can be installed in the
spacer panels.
__ Y-Cable patch panel, Tellabs part numbers:
__ 81.7100PP-Y-SM (single mode fiber)
OR
__ 81.7100PP-Y-MM (multi-mode fiber)
__ Patch Panel Shelf (Tellabs part number 81.071PPSHLF)
81.7100PP-BLK)
number 40.0253)
__ Reuse the existing spool cover that was removed to accommodate the
patch panel
Installing the Y-Cable Patch
Panel
__ 1. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the Y-Cable patch panel.
__ 3. Place the patch panel shelf (Tellabs part number 81.071PPSHLF) into
the rack spacer where you just removed the spool assembly. Orienting
the shelf so that the bottom plate is to the left.
__ 4. Use the screws that are included in the Y-Cable patch panel kit to
attach the Y-Cable patch panel to the front of the rack spacer.
Panel Fiber Trough
__ 1. Install the fiber trough next to the Y-Cable patch panel in the spacer.
Fill any remaining space with a 1 RU blank filler panel.
Page 7-290 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
the patch panel.
page 7-299.
Go to Installing the DCM Chassis in the RRS, page 7-291.
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in a 19-Inch or 23-Inch Rack
5.40 The Y-Cable patch panel is an optional feature that can be installed in a
cabinet within a 19-inch rack or a 23-inch rack. Up to eight Y-Cable patch panels
can be installed within the cabinets.
OR
__ Y-Cable patch panel cabinets, Tellabs part numbers:
__ 81.71YCBL-RMB-23
OR
__ 81.71YCBL-RMB-19
number 40.0253)
Installing a Y-Cable Patch
Panel Cabinet
__ 1. Identify the location on a 19-inch rack or 23-inch rack for the Y-Cable
patch panel cabinet.
__ 2. Align the Y-Cable patch panel cabinet in the desired rack position.
__ 3. Use the screws that are included in the Y-Cable patch panel cabinet
kit to attach the cabinet to the front of the rack.
__ 4. Insert the Y-Cable patch panels as needed.
page 7-299.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-291
Installing Y-Cable Patch Panel in a Wall Mount Cabinet
5.43 The Y-Cable patch panel is an optional feature that can be installed in a
wall mount cabinet. The wall mount cabinet is lockable to restrict access to the fiber
connections.
__ Y-Cable patch panel wall mount cabinet (Tellabs part number
81.71YCBL-WMB)
OR
Installing a Y-Cable Patch
Panel Cabinet
__ 1. Identify the location for the Y-Cable patch panel wall mount cabinet.
__ 2. Use the screws that are included in the wall mount cabinet kit to attach
the cabinet to the wall.
__ 3. Insert the Y-Cable patch panels as needed.
Installing the DCM Chassis in the RRS
5.46 The following materials are required to perform this procedure:
__ quantity and type of DCM chassis as required by the customer NE
configuration (Tellabs part number 81.071DCM-SHLF).
The 81.071DCM_SHLF includes the mounting bracket.
__ quantity and type of DCMs, for a list of available DCMs, refer to the
Tellabs 7100/7100N Software Release Document (SRD)
81.7100DCM-BLK)
part number 40.0167 for NEBS)
__ reuse the existing spool cover that was removed to accommodate the
patch panel
Page 7-292 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the DCM Chassis __ 1. Identify the location on the rack spacer for the DCM chassis. Refer to
Module.
front edge of the shelf. Refer to Figure 5.24, page 7-292.
In this position, the ear of the bracket measures approximately
4 inches from the front lip of the shelf.
Figure 5.24 DCM Shelf Mounting Holes for Spacer Brackets
__ 4. Place the DCM chassis into the rack spacer where you just removed
the spool assembly, orienting the shelf so that the shorter front edge
is to the left.
__ 5. Use the screws that are included in the DCM chassis kit to attach the
DCM chassis to the front of the rack spacer.
Installing the DCM Fiber
Trough
__ 6. Install the fiber trough next to the DCM chassis in the spacer. Fill any
remaining space with a 1 RU blank filler panel.
the patch panel. If desired, attach the optional vinyl pocket to display
the cable running list.
6-inch spacer
mounting holes
shelf front
bracket
4 inches
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-293
Mounting the DCM Chassis
Horizontally
5.48 It is possible to mount the DCM chassis horizontally in the rack below the
lower air baffle for the top shelf only in a Tellabs 7100 OTS with one shelf in the
rack; for example, a Tellabs 7100 OTS OLA configuration may contain only one
shelf in a rack.
5.49 To mount the DCM chassis horizontally in rack, obtain the following
material and complete the procedure.
Materials __ quantity and type of DCM chassis as required by the customer NE
configuration (Tellabs part number 81.071DCM-SHLF). The
81.071DCM_SHLF includes the mounting bracket.
__ One rack adapter:
__ if mounting the DCM without a fiber trough, use one19-23 inch
rack adapter, 1 RU (Tellabs part number 14.9074)
or
__ if mounting the DCM with the fiber trough, use one2 RU adapter
Action 5.50 Follow the same procedure as for mounting vertically in the spacer panel.
Page 7-294 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.25 Horizontal Placement of the DCM Shelf in a Rack with 7100 OLA
Go to Installing the Relay Rack Spacer (RRS) Spool Covers,
page 7-295.
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LIAM-E SPM SPM
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LIAM-E BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM BFMBFMBFM BFM BFM BFM BFMBFMBFM
air baffle
DCM chassis
fiber trough
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-295
Installing the Relay Rack Spacer (RRS) Spool Covers
5.51 Follow these steps to install the RRS spool covers for the fiber
management spools:
__ 2. Remove the spool covers and associated hardware from the shipping
carton.
__ 3. Install the thumbscrews on the fiber management spools that are used
to secure the spool covers.
Note 1: Do not remove the thumbscrews, which are used for hanging and
securing the patch panel cover.
Note 2: The spool covers may be oriented to either the right or the left,
depending on the location (left or right) of the thumbscrews that attach
the cover to the spool.
__ 4. Taking one spool cover at a time, align the holes on the polycarbonate
spool cover over the matching thumbscrews on the fiber management
spools.
__ 5. Carefully position the spool cover into place over the fiber
management thumbscrews. Refer to Figure 5.26, page 7-296.
__ 6. Tighten the thumbscrews to lock the spool cover into place.
page 7-299.
Page 7-296 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.26 Spacer Cover Installation Over Fiber Management Spools
Go to Installing the Patch Panel Top Cover, page 7-296.
Installing the Patch Panel Top Cover
5.52 The patch panel top cover is a clear, polycarbonate panel that covers the
patch panel and the associated fiber trough to protect the fiber cables and
connectors. The top cover may be used with the RCMM patch panel, port shelf
patch panel, OPSM patch panel, and the DCM chassis. Follow these directions for
installing the top cover.
Materials 5.53 Obtain the following materials and follow these steps:
__ top cover kit (Tellabs part number 180.0430) which contains the
following items (refer to Figure 5.27, page 7-297):
__ oneclear plastic top cover
__ twothumbscrews
__ twovinyl pouches to hold the fiber termination list,
__ onethreaded rod on which to suspend the top cover from the
relay rack spacer (used only to attach the top cover to the top
section of the rack spacer)
spacer base
spool cover
spool cover
spool screws
thumbscrew
thumbscrew
thumbscrew
thumbscrew
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-297
Figure 5.27 Components of the Patch Panel Top Cover
Action __ 1. Remove either the right or left bolt from the front of the 1-inch gray pipe
clamp on the relay rack spacer assembly. Refer to Figure 5.28,
page 7-298.
Note: The top and bottom extensions on the patch panel top cover, which attach
to the spacer panel, may be oriented to either the left or right. Remove the
bolt that corresponds to the preferred orientation.
__ 2. Replace the removed bolt with the threaded rod from the top cover kit.
__ 3. Screw one of the thumbscrews into the open end of the threaded rod.
clear
polycarbonate
patch panel
top cover
hex threaded rod
(for top spacer
position only
thumbscrews
clear vinyl
pouches
Warning:
Do not overtighten the rod. Overtightening may strip the threads.
Page 7-298 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.28 Connecting the Threaded Rod to the Top Support (Front View)
__ 4. Orient the top cover over both of the thumbscrews so that the
thumbscrews pass through both holes in the top cover. Allow the top
cover to slide down to rest on the thumbscrews.
__ 5. Apply the vinyl pockets to the front of the patch panel cover. Refer to
__ 6. Insert the printed guides into the vinyl pockets.
top support
rack spacer
1-inch gray pipe
thumbscrew
threaded rod
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-299
Figure 5.29 Patch Panel Top Cover With Vinyl Pockets and Inserts
Installing the DCM Chassis, Patch Panels, and Fiber Management in an
Auxiliary Rack Using a Rack Within a Rack (RWR)
5.55 The DCM chassis, RCMM patch panels (PPs), Port Shelf PPs, OPSM
PPs, High Density PPs, Y-cable PPs, OMD44 PPs, OMD88 PPs, and fiber troughs
are installed in a relay rack adjacent to the Tellabs 7100 OTS ETSI relay racks.
They are mounted in the adjacent relay rack using a Rack Within a Rack (RWR)
Kit (Tellabs part number 179.0398).
Installing a Rack Within a Rack (RWR) Kit, page 7-300
- Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-270
- Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-307
- Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the
RRS, page 7-277
vinyl pockets
patch panel cover
inserts for listing locations
Page 7-300 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
- Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP)
in the RRS, page 7-310
- Installing the OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-312
- Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-313
- Installing DCM Chassis in the RWR, page 7-315
- Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-318
- Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-320
Installing a Rack Within a Rack (RWR) Kit
5.56 Perform the following procedure to install the RWR:
__ 1. Mount the RWR2/N bracket to the relay rack using six rack screws
(Tellabs part number 149.0039). Use the center set of mounting holes.
Figure 5.30 RWR2/N Bracket
__ 2. Mount the RWR1/N bracket to the relay rack 45 cm below the RWR2/N
bracket using four rack screws (Tellabs part number 149.0039). Use
the center set of mounting holes. Refer to Figure 5.31, page 7-301.
center mounting holes center mounting holes
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-301
Figure 5.31 RWR1/N Bracket
__ 3. Attach the 2 RU Fiber Trough to the RWR2/N Bracket using four
screws (Tellabs part number 149.0039). Refer to Figure 5.32,
page 7-302.
45 cm
RWR2/N Bracket
RWR1/N Bracket
center
mounting
holes
center
mounting
holes
Page 7-302 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.32 2 RU Fiber Trough in the RWR2/N Bracket
__ 4. Remove the center two fingers #7 and #8 from the top row of the 1RU
Fiber Trough. This allows room for the RCCM Ribbon Cables.
__ 5. Attach the two adapter clips to the left side of the RWR1/N bracket with
one short Phillips-head screw per Adapter Clip. Refer to Figure 5.33,
page 7-302.
__ 6. Attach the Adapter Clips to the right side of the RWR1/N bracket with
one short Phillips-head screw per Adapter Clip. Refer to Figure 5.33,
page 7-302.
Figure 5.33 1 RU Fiber Trough Adapter Clips
__ 7. Using four long Phillips-head screws, attach the 1 RU Fiber Trough to
the Adapter Clips installed in the RWR1/N Bracket. Refer to Figure
5.34, page 7-303.
screw holes screw holes
RWR2/N Bracket
RWR1/N Bracket
Adapter Clip placement
Adapter Clip placement
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-303
Figure 5.34 1 RU Fiber Trough in the RWR2/N Bracket
__ 8. Using two short Phillips-head screws per Adapter Clip, attach four
Adapter Clips to the RWR2/N Bracket at holes #10 and #12, #16 and
#18, #19 and #21, and #25 and #27. Refer to Figure 5.35, page 7-304.
__ 9. Using two short Phillips-head screws per Adapter Clip, attach four
Adapter Clips to the RWR1/N Bracket at holes #10 and #12, #16 and
#18, #19 and #21, and #25 and #27. Refer to Figure 5.35, page 7-304.
RWR1/N bracket
screw holes screw holes
Page 7-304 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.35 Adapter Clips
__ 10. Using two long Phillips-head screws, attach 1 RU Fiber Trough to both
brackets at the Adapter Clips installed in holes #10 and #12. Refer to
#12
and
#10
#18
and
#16
#21
and
#19
#27
and
#25
#12
and
#10
#18
and
#16
#21
and
#19
#27
and
#25
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-305
Figure 5.36 1 RU Fiber Troughs Installed at Adapter Clips
Select one of the following procedures:
- Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-270
- Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-307
- Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the
RRS, page 7-277
- Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP)
in the RRS, page 7-310
- Installing the OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-312
- Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-313
- Installing DCM Chassis in the RWR, page 7-315
- Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RRS, page 7-273
screw holes
screw holes
Page 7-306 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
- Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-320
- Installing Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment, page 7-323
Installing the RCMM Patch Panel in the RWR
5.57 The RCMM patch panel provides fiber terminations as well as a fiber
trough for fiber management. One RCMM patch panel accommodates 44 port
connections using LC/UPC connectors and 8 cables with MPO/M connectors.
__ RCMM patch panel (Tellabs part number 81.7100PP-R-XM)
Where:
15 m, and 20 m.
number 40.0253)
5.60 Perform the following steps to install the RCCM patch panel in the RWR:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the RCMM patch
panels. Refer to Figure 5.42, page 7-317.
__ 2. Place the RCMM patch panel shelf into the RWR. Orient the panel so
that the cable assembly with eight MPO connectors are at the bottom
of the patch panel. Refer to Figure 5.42, page 7-317.
__ 3. Use four screws to attach the RCMM patch panel to the RWR. Refer
__ 4. Repeat this procedure for each RCCM patch panel required for the
system configuration.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-307
Installing the Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR
5.61 The Port shelf patch panel provides fiber terminations. One Port shelf
patch panel accommodates 44 port connections using LC/UPC connectors.
__ 1 RU Port shelf patch panel kit (Tellabs part number 180.0132)
__ fourrack screws, twelve24 x 5/16 SLT HX WSH SEM (Tellabs part
number 40.0253)
5.64 Perform the following steps to install the Port shelf patch panel in the RWR:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the Port shelf patch
Figure 5.37 RWR Installation Locations
Page 7-308 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 2. Place the Port shelf patch panel shelf into the RWR. Orient the panel
so that the lowest numbers are at the bottom of the patch panel.
__ 3. Use four screws to attach the Port shelf patch panel to the RWR.
__ 5. Repeat this procedure for each Port shelf patch panel required for the
Installing the 2RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel in the RWR
5.65 The High density port shelf patch panel (HD PPP) is 2RU wide and
provides 104 duplex LC connectors for fiber terminations.
__ 2RU High Density patch panel kit (Tellabs part number 180.0611)
Note: Only the patch panel is used in this procedure.
number 40.0253)
5.68 Perform the following steps to install the 2RU HD PPP in the RWR:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the 2RU HD PPP.
__ 2. Place the 2RU HD PPP into the RWR. Orient the panel so that the
lowest numbers are at the bottom of the patch panel.
__ 3. Use four screws to attach the 2RU HD PPP to the RWR.
__ 5. Repeat this procedure for each 2RU HD PPP required for the system
configuration.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-309
Figure 5.38 RWR Installation Locations
H
D
P
P
P
1RU
PP
1RU
PP
H
D
P
P
P
Page 7-310 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the 3RU High-Density Port Shelf Patch Panel (88CHPP) in the RRS
5.69 The 3RU high-density port shelf patch panel kit (Tellabs part number
81.71S-88CHPP) includes the following pieces:
back of the panel
__ 1 fiber insertion/extraction tool
__ 1 flashlight kit for the fiber insertion/extraction tool
racks. Use the Number 6 metric screws on ETSI compliant racks.
__ 3RU High Density patch panel kit (Tellabs part number
81.71S-88CHPP)
number 40.0253)
5.72 Perform the following steps to install the 88CHPP in the RWR:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the 88CHPP. Refer
__ 2. If necessary, reconfigure the 1RU fiber troughs and Adapter Clips to
accommodate the 88CHPP.
__ 3. Place the 88CHPP into the RWR. Orient the panel so that the lowest
numbers are at the top of the patch panel.
__ 4. Use four screws to attach the 88CHPP to the RWR.
__ 6. Repeat this procedure for each 88CHPP required for the system
configuration.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-311
Figure 5.39 3RU RWR Installation Location
1RU
PP
1RU
PP
88CHPP 2RU
PP
Page 7-312 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the OMD44-x Patch Panel in the RWR
5.73 The OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 are used as patch panels for the
RCMM-8D88 to transponder connections. They are typically installed in an
adjacent rack. The OMD44-x patch panels provide fiber terminations as well as a
fiber trough for fiber management. The OMD44-1 patch panel accommodates port
connections 1 through 44. The OMD44-45 accommodates port connections 45
through 88.
or
number 40.0253)
5.76 Perform the following steps to install the OMD44-x patch panel in the
RWR:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the OMD44-x patch
__ 2. Place the OMD44-x patch panel shelf into the RWR. Orient the panel
so that the DWDM port and data port are at the bottom of the patch
panel. Refer to Figure 5.42, page 7-317.
__ 3. Use four screws to attach the OMD44-x patch panel to the RWR. Refer
__ 5. Repeat this procedure for each OMD44-x patch panel required for the
Go to Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RWR, page 7-313.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-313
Installing the OMD88 Patch Panel in the RWR
5.77 The OMD88, when used with the following equipment, allows you to create
a colored, directionless add/drop terminal:
71T-DXRCMM Directionless Reconfigurable Channel Multiplexer
Module - 88 Channel (DX RCMM)
71123C Line Output Amplifier Module - Enhanced 88 Channel
(LOAM-E88)
5.78 Configuration #32 (88-Channel SBOADM using RCMM-8D88s and DX
RCMMs) supports directionless add/drop terminals. In a directionless
configuration, up to seven degrees support directionless add/drop terminals.
These degrees use the DX RCMM instead of the RCMM-8D88 and do not require
an input amplifier or OMD44 patch panels.
__ one C7100RDXM_KIT, RDXM Directionless Kit which contains the
following piece parts:
- 81.71S-OMD88, Optical Mux/Demux 88 Channel Patch Panel
(OMD88)
- 81.71T-DXRCMM Directionless Reconfigurable Channel
- 81.71123C, Line Output Amplifier Module - Enhanced 88 Channel
(LOAM-E88)
number 40.0253)
5.81 Perform the following steps to install the OMD88 patch panel in the RWR:
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the 2RU OMD88
patch panels. Refer to Figure 5.40, page 7-314.
__ 2. Place the OMD88 patch panel shelf into the RWR. Orient the panel so
that the DWDM port and data port are at the bottom of the patch panel.
__ 3. Use four screws to attach the OMD88 patch panel to the RWR. Refer
__ 5. Repeat this procedure for each OMD88 patch panel required for the
Page 7-314 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.40 OMD88 Patch Panel Installation Locations
Go to Installing DCM Chassis in the RWR, page 7-315.
O
M
D
8
8
O
M
D
8
8
1RU
PP
1RU
PP
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-315
Installing DCM Chassis in the RWR
compensation modules (DCMs), and other accessories. These items are installed
in an adjacent relay rack. This equipment rack is installed after the Tellabs 7100
relay rack is installed.
5.83 The following materials are required to perform this procedure:
__ quantity and type of DCM chassis as required by the customer NE
configuration (Tellabs part number 81.071DCM-SHLF, includes the
mounting bracket)
__ quantity and type of DCMs. Refer to quantity and type of DCMs, for a
list of available DCMs, refer to the Tellabs 7100/7100N Software
Release Document (SRD).
81.7100DCM-BLK)
__ 1. Identify the location in the adjacent equipment relay rack for the DCM
chassis. Refer to Figure 5.42, page 7-317.
Module.
front edge of the shelf. In this position, the ear of the bracket measures
approximately 4 inches from the front lip of the shelf. Refer to Figure
5.24, page 7-292.
Page 7-316 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 5.41 DCM Shelf Mounting Holes for Brackets
__ 3. Identify the location in the adjacent relay rack for the DCM Chassis.
__ 4. Place the DCM Chassis into the RWR. Refer to Figure 5.42,
page 7-317.
__ 5. Use four screws, attach the DCM Chassis to the RWR. Refer to Figure
5.42, page 7-317.
__ 7. Repeat this procedure for each DCM Chassis required for the system
configuration.

mounting holes
shelf front
bracket
4 inches
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-317
Figure 5.42 Patch Panels and DCM Chassis
R
C
M
M
A
R
C
M
M
C
R
C
M
M
D
R
C
M
M
B
D
C
M
A
D
C
M
C
D
C
M
B
D
C
M
D
O
M
D
4
4
A
or
O
M
D
4
4
C
O
M
D
4
4
D
O
M
D
4
4
B
or or or
Page 7-318 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the OPSM Patch Panel in the RWR
5.85 When an OPSM is used in the system, one OPSM patch panel is required
for each OPSM. The OPSM patch panel resides in the adjacent relay rack and is
installed in an RWR. The OPSM patch panel provides terminations for four
protection circuits, as well as a fiber trough for fiber management.
__ OPSM patch panel (Tellabs part number 81.7100PP-O-XM)
Where:
15 m, and 20 m.
__ OPSM shelf (Tellabs part number 81.071PP-SHLF)
81.7100PP-BLK)
number 40.0253)
Panel
__ 1. Install an RWR in the adjacent relay rack using the procedure
Installing a Rack Within a Rack (RWR) Kit, page 7-300.
__ 2. Identify the location on the adjacent equipment relay rack for the
OPSM patch panel. Refer to Figure 5.43, page 7-319.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-319
Figure 5.43 OPSM Patch Panels
__ 3. Place the OPSM patch panel shelf into the RWR. Orient the shelf so
that the bottom plate is to the left.
__ 4. Use the screws that are included in the OPSM patch panel kit to attach
the OPSM patch panel to the front of the RWR.
__ 6. Follow company policy to apply the vinyl pockets for the cable running
lists.
Page 7-320 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Y-Cable Patch Panel in the RWR
5.88 The Y-Cable patch panel provides signal protection on the Tellabs
7100/7100N OTS through paired TGTM-Es, OTNM-Ds, FGTMs, FGTM-Ms, and
HDTGs. The signal is split at the Y-Cable patch panel and each copy of the signal
is directed to a pre-defined facility on each transponder, resulting in a working
signal and a protecting signal. Both signals are forwarded to the DWDM network in
different directions. On the destination side, the signals are received by the
transponders, compared for integrity, and one of the copies is forwarded to the
targeted client.
OR
81.7100PP-BLK)
number 40.0253)
Panel
__ 1. Install an RWR in the adjacent relay rack using the procedure
Installing a Rack Within a Rack (RWR) Kit, page 7-300.
__ 2. Identify the location on the adjacent equipment relay rack for the
Y-Cable patch panel. Refer to Figure 5.44, page 7-321.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-321
Figure 5.44 Y-Cable Patch Panels
__ 3. Place the Y-Cable patch panel shelf into the RWR. Orient the shelf so
that the bottom plate is to the left.
__ 4. Use the screws that are included in the Y-Cable patch panel kit to
attach the Y-Cable patch panel to the front of the RWR.
__ 6. Follow company policy to apply the vinyl pockets for the cable running
lists.
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Y-Cable
1
F
W P
Y-Cable
2
F
W P
Y-Cable
3
F
W P
Y-Cable
4
F
W P
Tellabs
Page 7-322 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing the Fiber Cables
Materials __ For the appropriate fiber cables and routing information, refer to
Section 8, Installing Optical Cabling, page 7-408.
__ For more information about routing fibers, refer to Cabling
Methodology, page 7-412.
Action __ 1. Route the fibers to the front of the rack spacer panel for fibers to and
from the RCMM patch panels, the DCM chassis, and the port shelf
patch panel.
__ 2. Route the fibers to the rear of the rack spacer, through the cutouts, for
fibers to and from the transponders and the LGX panel. Use the fiber
spools to guide the fibers. Attach additional edge guards (Tellabs part
number 160.0551) as needed to protect the fibers from sharp metal
edges.
- Installing Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment, page 7-323
- Connecting the System Wiring, page 7-334
Installation 6. Installing Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-323
6. Installing Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment
6.01 This section covers optional hardware installation that may be installed in
an NEBS or ETSI system:
Installing Optional External Amplifier Fuse Panel, page 7-326
Installing Optional External Amplifier Modules (NIR, CRA, and BAMP),
page 7-328
Generic BFAP, page 7-332
6.02 Optional equipment for installing in telco offices are provided in Table 6.1,
page 7-323.
Table 6.1 Accessory Equipment for the Relay Rack Installations
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Network Interfaced Raman (NIR) 81.71125A Provides additional gain to input amplifiers in the
Tellabs 7100/7100N OTS. The NIR is typically
deployed horizontally in the rack.
Each NIR runs on -48 volts and draws 2.6 Amp
minimum.
The power cable (Tellabs part number 180.0823) is
10-foot, contains a DB-15 connector on one end,
and is open-ended on the other end. During
installation, cut the power cable to length.
Terminate the power cable directly to the fuse
panel # 6-32 panhead compression/wire-binding
terminals or use a Spade lug #16-22 AWG for a
#6-8 Terminal Stud (Tellabs part number 52.6077)
suitable for #18 AWG wire for connection at the
fuse panel.
Cables are ordered separately:
Cable Kit, RAMAN Power cables - order 2
Cable Kit, RAMAN Maintenance Port cable
Network Interfaced Raman Fan Filter Refill
(Tellabs part number 81.71125A-FLTR)
ground wire
2-hole ground lug for #10 Studs on 5/8-inch
centers
4 lugs for connection to the open end of the NIR
power cables
6. Installing Optional NEBS and ETSI Equipment Installation
Page 7-324 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Fuse Panel 81.71020FP5-5 Provides power for up to 5 NIR, CRA, or BAMP
modules.
Co-Propagating Raman Amplifier
700 mW (CRA)
81.71125B Provides post-amplification to the outgoing optical
signals. The CRA is typically deployed horizontally
in the rack.
Each CRA runs on -48 volts and draws 2.6 Amp
minimum.
10-foot, contains a DB-15 connector on one end,
and is open-ended on the other end. During
installation, cut the power cable to length.
Terminate the power cable directly to the fuse
panel # 6-32 panhead compression/wire-binding
terminals or use a Spade lug #16-22 AWG for a
#6-8 Terminal Stud (Tellabs part number 52.6077)
suitable for #18 AWG wire for connection at the
fuse panel.
Cable Kit, RAMAN Power cables - order 2
ground wire
centers
4 lugs for connection to the open end of the
CRA power cables
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-325
Booster Amplifier 81.71128A Provides post-amplification to the outgoing optical
signals. The BAMP is typically deployed
horizontally in the rack.
Each BAMP runs on -48 volts and draws 2.6 Amp
minimum.
10 foot, black and red, 16 AWG cable, 3 position
DSUB female connector on one end and open
ended on the other. During installation, cut the
power cable to length. During installation, cut the
power cable to length. Terminate the cable directly
to the fuse panel # 6-32 panhead
compression/wire-binding terminals or use a Ring
Lug #14 - 16 AWG for a #4 - 6 Terminal Stud
(Tellabs part number 52.6073) suitable for #16
AWG wire for connection at the fuse panel.
Cable Kit, BAMP Power cables - order 2
ground wire
centers
(optional) 4 Ring Lug #14 - 16 AWG for a #4 - 6
Terminal Stud (Tellabs part number 52.6073)
for connection to the open end of the BAMP
power cables
Generic Breaker Frame Alarm
Panel (BFAP)
83.71020 Installed at the top of each equipment rack.
Three breaker kits required:
15 Amp Breaker Kit (Tellabs part number
180.0790)
180.0791)
180.0792)
180.0793)
180.0794)
Equipment Part
Tellabs Part
Page 7-326 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Optional External Amplifier Fuse Panel
6.03 The Fuse Panel (Tellabs part number 81.71020FP5-5) is an optional
power source that can be installed to power the external amplifiers (NIR, CRA, or
BAMP). The Fuse Panel provides front panel access for power, power distribution,
external alarm connections, and fault indicators for the external amplifiers. The
Fuse Panel is installed above the external amplifiers in a relay rack. It displays
alarms for loss of power.
6.04 Available fuses for the Fuse Panel are shown in Table 6.2, page 7-326.
Fuses are installed in the procedure, Connecting the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Power
Cables to the Fuse Panel, page 7-396
6.05 When installing an external amplifier, place it as close as possible to the
outside plant fiber. Fiber connectors and LGXs on the network side of the external
amplifier must be minimized. Fiber characterization is required prior to installation.
Attenuation cannot be greater than .27db/Km. For more information on external
amplifiers, refer to individual module practices.
Note: All electrical cables serving the Tellabs 7100N shelves must enter and exit
from the top, right side when viewing the shelf horizontally. Electrical
cables are then routed to the rear of the rack. Electrical cables must never
cross over the shelves or optical cable, or mounting brackets.
6.06 When performing this procedure, perform each step in the order in which
Tools 6.07 The following tools are required to complete this procedure:
Materials 6.08 The following materials vary per installation:
__ Fuse Panel (Tellabs part number 81.71020FP5-5)
__ (optional for 23 racks) one23-inch 1RU NEBS Mounting Adapter Kit
(Tellabs part number 81.73NEBS-B)
__ ground wire for single #10-32 stud
__ oneground wire lug
__ one to tworack screws for the ground wire to rack connection (NEBS
Tellabs part number 40.0167 or ETSI Tellabs part number 140.0039)
Table 6.2 Fuse Panel Fuses
Tellabs Part Number Amperage
63.0129 Fuse Dummy Alarm Indicating
60.0273 Fuse 3.0 A Alarm Indicating (recommended)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-327
6.09 Perform the following procedure to install a Fuse Panel in a Tellabs 7100N
OTS equipment rack or customer supplied equipment rack:
__ 1. Unpack the Fuse Panel (Tellabs part number 81.71020FP5-5).
- The Fuse Panel comes with 19 mounting ears.
- If this is a 23 rack, use the 23-inch 1RU NEBS Mounting Adapter
Kit (Tellabs part number 81.73NEBS-B).
__ 2. Select the correct mounting ears for the Fuse Panel rack (19-inch or
23-inch).
__ 2.1 If 19-inch mounting ears are required, go to step 3,
page 7-327.
__ 2.2 If 23-inch mounting ears are required, remove the
19-inch mounting ears and replace them with the
23-inch mounting ears (Tellabs part number
81.73NEBS-B).
__ 3. Determine the appropriate position in the rack. The Fuse Panel is
typically installed at the top of the rack.
__ 4. Position the Fuse Panel against the rack.
__ 5. Secure the Fuse Panel to the left side of the rack.
__ 6. Secure the Fuse Panel to the right side of the rack.
__ 7. Perform the following substeps to ground the Fuse Panel to the rack:
__ 7.1 Locate the Fuse Panel ground connection in the center
of the panel.
__ 7.2 Attach the ground wire #10 Blade Connector (#10-32
stud) to the end of the ground cable for connection at
the Fuse Panel.
__ 7.3 Attach the ground cable to the Fuse Panel using the
ground screw.
__ 7.4 Attach the ground wire lug (customer supplied) to the
end of the ground cable for connection at the Relay
Rack.
__ 7.5 Determine the point on the rack to attach the ground
cable.
__ 7.6 Prepare the point of connection by removing any paint
or oxidation. Use a nonmetallic product, such as
synthetic steel wool, to prevent an accumulation of steel
fibers that can short-circuit the equipment.
__ 7.7 Place a small amount of oxidative preventative
compound (No-OX) over the prepared area.
__ 7.8 Connect the ground cable to the prepared area on the
rack using rack screw(s) (Tellabs part number 40.0167
or ETSI Tellabs part number 140.0039).
Go to Installing Optional External Amplifier Modules (NIR, CRA, and
BAMP), page 7-328.
Page 7-328 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installing Optional External Amplifier Modules (NIR, CRA, and BAMP)
6.10 This procedures installs the 81.71125A Network Interfaced Raman (NIR),
81.71125B Co-Propagating Raman Amplifier 700 mW (CRA), or 81.71125B,
81.71128A, Booster Amplifier (BAMP) in a rack. Figure 6.1, page 7-328 shows an
example installation.
Figure 6.1 Shelf Level Components - Optional NIR, CRA, or BAMP with Power Source in an Auxiliary Rack
6.11 NIR, CRA, and BAMP external amplifiers should be installed as close to
the plants outside fiber as possible with limited patch panel or LGX equipment
connections between the outside fiber and the external amplifier.
Note: For more information on the NIR, CRA, or BAMP modules, refer to the
individual module practices.
6.12 Before completing the installation procedures contained in this section,
perform the following tasks and ensure that all conditions have been met:
Identify all power sources.
Identify the power source for the external amplifiers. Each NIR, CRA,
and BAMP runs on -48 volts and draws approximately 2.6 Amps.
The NIR and CRA power cable is #18 AWG wire.
The BAMP power cable is #16 AWG wire.
Verify the availability of adequate shelf space, battery power, and
ventilation.
Verify the availability of all electrical and alarm cables listed in the
Materials section of each procedure.
Note: The NIR, CRA, and BAMP modules are referred to as the module in this
procedure.
External
Amplifier
Modules
customer supplied
power source
or
Fuse Panel (Tellabs part
number 81.71020FP5-5)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-329
Note: There can be up to three modules deployed per degree.
__ quantities vary81.71125A Network Interfaced Ramans (NIRs)
__ quantities vary81.71125B Co-Propagating Raman Amplifier 700 mW
(CRA)
__ quantities vary81.71128A, Booster Amplifier (BAMP)
__ oneground cable per NIR, CRA, and BAMP
__ oneground lug per NIR, CRA, and BAMP (2-hole ground lug for #10
Studs on 5/8-inch centers)
__ sixrack screws per device (NEBS Tellabs part number 40.0167 or
ETSI Tellabs part number 140.0039)
__ oneRaman Maintenance Port Cable per module (Tellabs part
number 180.0824)
__ oneEthernet cable per device
__ oneRS-232 cable per device
6.16 Perform the following procedure to install the module (NIR, BAMP, or
CRA) in a Tellabs 7100N OTS equipment rack:
__ 1. Unpack the module.
__ 2. Set aside the cover for use after all cabling is complete.
__ 3. Attach mounting ears:
__ 3.1 Use the screws provided to attach the appropriate
mounting ears to the module (from shortest to longest,
19-inch, ETSI, or 23-inch). For an example, refer to
__ 3.2 Attach the hardware to the mounting ears for the
module cover attachment and/or cable routing.
For the left mounting ear, refer to Figure 6.3,
page 7-330.
For the right BAMP, refer to Figure 6.4, page 7-330.
For the right NIR/CRA, refer to Figure 6.5, page 7-331.
Page 7-330 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 6.2 Mounting Ears (19-Inch)
__ 3.3 For BAMP, use the screws provided to attach the
appropriate mounting ears to the module (from shortest
to longest, 19-inch, ETSI, or 23-inch).
Figure 6.3 Left NIR, CRA and BAMP Mounting Ear
Figure 6.4 Right BAMP Mounting Ear
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-331
__ 4. Position the module in the relay rack while aligning the mounting ears
with the relay rack holes.
__ 5. Use two rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167 or ETSI Tellabs
part number 140.0039) to attach the module to the left side of the rack.
__ 6. Use two rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0167 or ETSI Tellabs
part number 140.0039) to attach the module to the right side of the
rack.
__ 7. Perform the following substeps to ground the module to the rack:
__ 7.1 Locate the modules ground connections. Refer to
__ 7.2 Attach the ground lug to the end of the ground cable.
__ 7.3 Attach the ground cable to the module using the
modules ground screws.
__ 7.4 Determine the point on the rack to attach the ground
cable.
__ 7.5 Prepare the point of connection by removing any paint
or oxidation. Use a nonmetallic product, such as
synthetic steel wool, to prevent an accumulation of steel
fibers that can short-circuit the equipment.
__ 7.6 Place a small amount of oxidative preventative
compound (No-OX) over the prepared area.
__ 7.7 Connect the ground cable to the prepared area on the
rack using two rack screws (Tellabs part number
40.0167 or ETSI Tellabs part number 140.0039).
Figure 6.5 Ground Connections and Mounting Ear Cover Attachment
__ 8. Label both ends of the Raman Maintenance port cable (Tellabs part
number 180.0824) using an indelible marker.
__ 9. Route the Raman Maintenance port cable (Tellabs part number
180.0824).
__ 10. Label both ends of the Ethernet cable using an indelible marker.
__ 11. Route the Ethernet cable per installation plan.
5/8-inch
centers
Page 7-332 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 12. Label the ends of the RS-232 cable using an indelible marker.
__ 13. Route the RS-232 cable per installation plan.
__ 14. Repeat this procedure to install another module.
- Generic BFAP, page 7-332
- Connecting the System Wiring, page 7-334.
Generic BFAP
6.17 A Generic Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (Tellabs part number 83.71020) is
available with the following interchangeable Amp breaker kits (3 kits required per
BFAP):
5 Amp Breaker Kit (Tellabs part number 180.0846)
Figure 6.6 Generic BFAP
Note: For more information refer to the Generic Breaker Frame Alarm Panel
module practice.
6.18 Using configurable breakers in the BFAP allows the customer to use
smaller DC cables and smaller breakers at the BDFB. This reduces the cost of
installation. Refer to Table 6.3, page 7-333.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-333
Note: All breakers (6 total) must be populated on the BFAP to avoid alarm
generation.
Go to Connecting the System Wiring, page 7-334.
Table 6.3 Suggested Generic BFAP Breakers (Tellabs Part Number 83.71020)
Breaker
Position
Standard
BFAP
Breakers SBOADM Configuration OLA Configuration
Top Shelf (2) 60A (2) 40A
Main Shelf with up to 9
transponders
(2-degree node)
(2) 15A
Main Shelf without
transponders
(2) 15A
Bottom Shelf (2) 60A (2) 60A (2) 60A (2) 15A breakers - no
bottom shelf
Fan Tray
(4 fan trays)
(2) 30A (2) 30A (2) 30A
Fan Tray
(2 fan trays)
(2) 15A
7. Connecting the System Wiring Installation
Page 7-334 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
7. Connecting the System Wiring
7.01 This section contains the procedures required to establish the electrical
and alarm connections to the Tellabs 7100 OTS. The following procedures and
guidelines are provided in this section:
Guidelines for Systems Using 7100A/B/C/D-60 Shelves, page 7-335
Connecting the Relay Rack Frame to the Office Ground, page 7-336
Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the BFAP,
page 7-339
Connecting External Alarm Systems, page 7-362
Connecting the AC Power Outlet (Optional), page 7-369
Cabling Between Shelves, page 7-373
Connecting the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Power Cables to the Fuse Panel,
page 7-396
Connecting the Fuse Panel to the BDFB, page 7-400
Connecting the HCSS to the Optional PDU or Equivalent Power
Source, page 7-347
Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the HCSS PDU,
page 7-355
7.02 Before completing the installation procedures contained in this section,
perform the following tasks and ensure that all conditions have been met:
identify all power sources
verify the availability of adequate shelf space, battery power, and
ventilation
verify the availability of all electrical and alarm cables listed in the
Materials section of each procedure
7.03 To prepare for Tellabs 7100 OTS system initialization and testing,
complete the installation and wiring procedures contained in this section.
Installation 7. Connecting the System Wiring
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-335
Guidelines for Systems Using 7100A/B/C/D-60 Shelves
7.04 On the BFAP, the power terminal blocks are sized for a 2-hole lug with
inch holes on inch center spacing. Maximum lug width is .69 inches. The largest
power cable that can terminate at the BFAP is #2 AWG.
7.05 Tellabs recommends the following guidelines for systems using the
7100A/B/C/D-60 shelves:
Terminate power cable runs (A and B Feeds) for every shelf in the
relay rack, with a maximum of 6 run per bay.
Use a minimum of #6 AWG power cable for breaker position #1 and a
minimum #4 AWG power cable for breaker positions #2 and #3.
Note: A power cable run is considered a cable for a -48V battery and a cable for
the battery return.
If the power cable runs are engineered for cable larger than a #2 AWG,
H-taps are used to transition from the larger AWG cable down to
#4 AWG to terminate the cables at both the 7100 BFAP and the
customers' power source. Refer to Guidelines for Using an H-tap for
Shelves, page 7-335.
Guidelines for Using an H-tap for Shelves
7.06 If H-tap connections are required, there is a maximum of 2 H-taps per
cable. It is recommended to make all taps within 10 feet of the termination points,
either BFAP or BDFB.
7.07 Figure 7.1, page 7-335 shows an example of using an H-tap with 2/0 to #4
AWG cable. For more information about heat shrink, refer to Figure 7.5,
page 7-343.
Figure 7.1 Example Using an H-tap to Bring #2/0 AWG Power Cable to BFAP
#2/0 AWG
from BDFB breaker
#2/0 AWG
to BDFB return bus
heat shrink
#2 AWG
BFAP return feed
H-taps with covers
#2 AWG
BFAP power input
cable sized by
BDFB breaker size
BDFB feeds
cable sized by BDFB
breaker size
BDFB feeds
cable sized by BDFB
breaker size
Page 7-336 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Connecting the Relay Rack Frame to the Office Ground
7.08 This section describes connecting the relay rack to the office ground.
Note 1: ETSI installations require a green wire with a yellow strip for the ground
wire.
Note 2: The relay rack ground is separate from the battery return.
Requirements 7.09 To perform this procedure, the following requirements must be met:
__ Ensure that all appropriate cabling is brought to the equipment relay
rack before performing the installation procedures.
__ crimper for a number 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) two-hole lug
Note: Tellabs requires the use of Tellabs recommended crimping tools. Other
equally acceptable tools are available, respective to their manufacturer.
__ H-tap crimper
__ heat gun
__ torque wrench (1-150 inch/pounds)
__ indelible marker (black)
Materials 7.11 The following materials are required to perform this procedure:
__ A 1/4 inch two-hole lug with 5/8 inch spacing. The lug must be
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Listed, and Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) certified or have certification under the C-UL
program.
For a UL approved two-hole grounding lug, refer to Figure 7.2,
page 7-337.
Examples of UL approved two-hole grounding lugs include:
__ Tellabs 52.6121, or equivalent
__ Tellabs 52.6151, or equivalent
__ An appropriate length of cable with 6 AWG conductor with 600 V-rating
and green insulation. This cable must be UL Listed or UL Recognized
and CSA certified or have certification under the C-UL program.
Tellabs offers a prefabricated 5 foot (1524 mm) 6 AWG ground cable
with two-hole lug assembly (Tellabs part number 50.2057 [green] or
50.2056 [gray]).
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-337
Note: Outside North America, a green and yellow wire must be used to comply
with the European Standard 60950 requirements (EN60950) and
International Electrotechnical Commission 60950 requirements
(IEC60950).
__ Fastening hardware, consisting of:
__ two hex head rack screws (Tellabs part number 40.0253)
__ A copper lug H-Tap (Tellabs part number 52.6060) and H-Tap cover
(CFO-FR) (Tellabs part number 52.6053)
__ Oxidative preventative compound (NO-OX) (Tellabs part number
173.0031)
__ Clear heat shrink wrap (Tellabs part number 46.0136)
Figure 7.2 UL Listed Grounding Lug
Action 7.12 Equipment relay racks are grounded on the zinc plated mounting surface
on the back of the relay rack. Follow these steps to connect the relay rack to the
office ground:
__ 1. Observe the Equipment Measurements, page 7-5 and Installing
Optical Cabling, page 7-408.
__ 2. If the area has been prepared (that is, paint or oxidation has been
removed from the point of connection), go to step 3, page 7-337.
If not, then prepare the point of connection by removing any paint or
oxidation. Use a nonmetallic product, such as synthetic steel wool, to
prevent an accumulation of steel fibers that can short-circuit the
equipment.
__ 3. Place a small amount of oxidative preventative compound (No-OX)
over the prepared area.
1/2 inch (12.19 mm)
5/8 inch (15.88 mm)
window
Warning:
Sanding dust and paint scrapings can damage circuit modules. Use a drop cloth
to protect the shelves below when performing the following steps.
Page 7-338 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
If the customer has ordered prefabricated cable, go to step 14,
page 7-339.
If not, go to step 5, page 7-338.
__ 5. Remove the outer jacket from one end of the ground cable.
Verify that the exposed cable fits snugly into the barrel of the lug which
will later be crimped over the exposed cable end.
__ 6. Slide a 3-inch piece of clear heat shrink wrap over the exposed section
of the copper wire and two-hole lug.
__ 7. Apply a thin film of oxidative preventive compound (No-OX) over the
exposed cable end.
__ 8. Position the barrel of the two-hole crimping lug over the exposed
section of the copper wire and crimp according to the manufacturers
recommendations.
__ 9. Slide the piece of clear heat shrink wrap over the crimped section of
the barrel and stop at the window. Refer to Figure 7.3, page 7-338.
Figure 7.3 Applying Heat Shrink Wrap to the Grounding Lug
__ 10. Use the heat gun to shrink the clear heat shrink wrap securely over the
crimped area.
__ 11. Connect the two-hole lug to the prepared area of the rack (one of the
provided ground points located on the back of the relay rack).
__ 12. Torque all grounding rack screws according to the specifications
outlined in Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
__ 13. Using the indelible marker, draw a line over the screw head and onto
the chassis to indicate where the screw was torqued.
DANGER:
Improper connection of the equipment to a power source can be hazardous to
personnel and equipment. Therefore, be certain to connect the equipment to a
-48 Vdc supply source that is electrically isolated from the AC source. The
-48 Vdc supply must be reliably connected to earth ground.
clear heat shrink wrap
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-339
__ 14. Using an H-Tap or C-Tap, connect the other end of the cable to the
aisle ground.
__ 15. Crimp the H-Tap or C-Tap according to the manufacturers
recommendation.
Go to Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the BFAP,
page 7-339.
Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the BFAP
7.13 This section describes how to connect the 48 Vdc office battery supply to
the Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (BFAP).
7.14 Tellabs 7100 OTS equipment shelves require three redundant,
independently-fused 48 Vdc power inputs (feeds 1A, 2A, 3A and 1B, 2B, and 3B)
from a 48 Vdc power source. The 48 Vdc power source provides power for all
plug-in modules and common equipment in the network element (NE).
7.15 There are two versions of the breaker frame alarm panel (BFAP), which
terminates the power supply for each rack. Verify the type and part number of the
BFAP at your location and follow the appropriate cabling scheme. There are
important differences in the locations and purpose of power connectors.
__ Do not begin the subsequent procedure until the current installation
procedure has been successfully completed. Place a check mark on
the line beside the step number of the procedure as each step is
completed.
Warning:
Do not excessively torque grounding connections. This can strip the threads on
the bolt or relay rack.
DANGER:
-48 Vdc source must be reliably connected to ground.
Page 7-340 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ To prevent personal injury or equipment damage, always observe all
applicable electrostatic discharge (ESD), equipment handling, and
power precautions.
__ Verify that the relay rack is connected to the office ground.
__ Verify that all circuit breakers on the BFAP and customer power
distribution frame are all in the OFF position.
__ The Tellabs 7100 equipment relay rack requires six independently
fused office battery fuses, 1A, 2A, 3A and 1B, 2B, 3B. Use a separate
battery fuse for each feed.
__ flat-head and Phillips-head screwdrivers
__ insulated nut driver set
__ crimping tool
__ wire cutters
__ heat gun
__ digital multimeter
Materials 7.18 To perform this procedure the following materials are required:
__ six sets of up to a #2 AWG copper conductor wire (for the A and B
power leads) that are supplied by the Deployment Engineer when they
observe the aisle ground feeder size at the time of the Site Survey. A
corresponding H or C tap cover is also ordered at that time.
__ a quantity of twelve 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) two-hole terminal lugs with 3/4
inch (19.05 mm) spacing (Tellabs part number 52.6168)
__ lacing cord
__ clear heat shrink wrap the same diameter as the AWG wire and long
enough to cover the lug barrel and cable entering the barrel
DANGER:
An ungrounded frame is a potential electric shock hazard. Verify that the frame
ground has been connected to the building common ground point (office ground)
before starting this procedure.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-341
Action 7.19 Follow these steps to connect the 48 Vdc office battery supply to the
Tellabs 7100 BFAP:
__ 1. Observe the Equipment Measurements, page 7-5.
__ 2. Locate the 48 Vdc office battery distribution point and verify that no
fuses are populated in the A and B power feed fuse locations.
Do not reinsert the fuses until step 33, page 7-345 for the A power feed
and step 38, page 7-346 for the B power feed are complete.
__ 3. Verify that no power cables are terminated in the assigned positions.
__ 4. Verify that the shelf power breakers are turned off at the BFAP. Refer
Figure 7.4 Power Output Connectors on the 83.71020 BFAP Rev. A or later and 82.71020C BFAP Rev. B or later
with Appropriate Cables
__ 5. Run up to six sets of power cables for the A and B feeds, each of which
contains both a Power and Return cable, for a total of 12 cables.
DANGER:
An ungrounded equipment shelf or relay rack is a potential electric shock hazard.
Before applying power, always verify that the shelf is grounded to the equipment
relay rack, and that the ground for the equipment relay rack is connected to the
building common ground (office ground).
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Power Distribution Side A Power Distribution Side B
power outputs - A
not used
not used
Upper 48V
Upper Return
Lower 48V
Lower Return
power outputs - B
not used
not used
Upper 48V
Upper Return
Lower 48V
Lower Return
power
cables to
shelves
150.1138
2 cables for
upper/lower
power
cables to
shelves
150.1138
2 cables for
upper/lower
Page 7-342 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Note: All battery return cables should be taped at both ends.
__ 6. Route the cables from the office battery distribution point to the top of
the equipment relay rack (RR).
__ 7. Label each end of the corresponding power cable ends with
information leading to the opposite end termination point as illustrated
in the example below,
Where:
XXX.xx = Represents the rack number.
YY = Signifies the breaker position.
Labels at the office battery supply termination point might read as
follows:
Labels at the BFAP termination point might read as follows:
__ 8. Repeat the labeling for each set of power feed cables, including 1A,
1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B where applicable.
__ 9. Route all of the cables on the front of the relay rack to their respective
power terminals located on the BFAP, refer to Figure 7.4, page 7-341.
__ 10. Preform cables to their respective termination points, then cut the
cables.
__ 11. At the BFAP, slide pieces of clear heat shrink over the A and B power
leads. Slide the clear heat shrink back so that the leads can be
stripped.
__ 12. Strip the ends of the A and B power leads.
__ 13. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the exposed ends.
__ 14. Crimp on two-hole lugs according to the manufacturers
recommendations.
the two-hole lug and the copper wire jacket. Refer to Figure 7.5,
page 7-343.
1A Power Feed -48 Vdc
to BFAP in RR XXX.xx
1A Power Return
to BFAP in RR XXX.xx
to Battery Supply in RR XXX.xx, Position #YY
1A Power Return
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-343
Figure 7.5 Applying Heat Shrink Wrap to Grounding Lug
__ 16. Use the heat gun to shrink the clear heat shrink wrap over the crimped
area.
__ 17. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the two hole lug and connect the
two-hole lug of the 1A power Return to the terminal on the BFAP
labeled 48 V 1A Return. For the 83.71020 BFAP or 82.71020C BFAP
Rev. B, refer to Figure 7.4, page 7-341.
two-hole lug of the 1A Power feed to the terminal on the BFAP labeled
48 V 1A Feed.
__ 19. Repeat steps 17, page 7-343 through 18, page 7-343 for each set of
power feed cables, including 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B where
applicable.
__ 20. Torque all two-hole lugs on the BFAP input power terminals according
to the recommended torque requirements provided in Torquing Force
Tables, page 7-22.
the chassis to indicate where the screw is torqued.

Warning:
Do not excessively torque power terminal connections. This can strip the threads
on the stud or nut.
Caution:
After the installation of the power wiring is complete, any nuts left loose on the
terminal strip on the BFAP A and B input feeds may cause later service
disruptions. Use extreme caution to ensure that nuts are tight but not stripped
and that sufficient clearance is maintained around all lugs and wire to prevent a
short circuit.
Caution:
Protect against overcurrent short-circuits and earth faults when installing by
providing a readily accessible circuit breaker or fuse rated for a maximum of 60
amperes. For recommended fuse values, refer to Table 7.1, page 7-346.
Page 7-344 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 22. At the 48 Vdc office battery distribution point, route the power feed
cables to their respective Power Feed and Return connection points.
Note: On the shelves, verify that the black wire is closest to the front of the rack,
and the red wire is closest to the rear of the rack. Refer to Figure 7.6,
page 7-344.
Figure 7.6 Attaching the Power Cables to the Shelves
__ 23. Conduct a continuity check with a digital multimeter to ensure that the
power cables (48 Vdc and return) are not reversed.
Note: Improper connection of the Tellabs 7100 OTS to a power source can trip
the assigned power breakers on the customers battery distribution panel.
__ 24. Allow cable slack sufficient enough to dress the cables, then cut the
cables to their respective termination points.
__ 25. At the battery distribution panel slide pieces of clear heat shrink wrap
over the A and B Power Feeds and Returns. Slide the clear heat shrink
wrap back so that the leads can be stripped.
__ 26. Taking one cable at a time, strip the ends of the A and B Power Feeds
and Return leads and crimp on lugs that comply with the customer
power distribution plant connection points. Slide the piece of clear heat
shrink over the crimped section of the two-hole lug and the copper wire
jacket.
left side of shelf
A power feed
right side of shelf
B power feed
shelf
power
red
cable
black
cable
red
cable
black
cable
shelf
power
F
R
O
N
T
O
F
S
H
E
L
V
E
S
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-345
__ 27. Use the heat gun to shrink the clear heat shrink over the crimped area.
__ 28. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the 1A power Return lead and connect
the lug to the appropriate return terminal on the office battery
distribution point.
__ 29. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the lug of the 1A Power feed and
connect the lug to the appropriate breaker position on the 48 Vdc
office battery distribution panel.
__ 30. Repeat step 28, page 7-345and step 29, page 7-345 for each set of
power feed cables, including 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B where
applicable.
__ 31. Torque all two-hole lugs on the office battery distribution power
terminals to the appropriate inch/pounds (5 inch/pound), according to
the requirements provided in Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
__ 33. Install the fuses and turn on the breaker for the A power feeds at the
office battery distribution point. For fuse requirements, refer to Table
7.1, page 7-346.
Note 1: If currently installing fewer than the maximum number of shelves that is
allowed in the rack (2 for 82.7100A/B-60 shelves), but want to allow for
growth to the maximum number of shelves, Tellabs recommends
providing fuses for the maximum number of shelves.
Note 2: If installing a two-shelf configuration, but using only one shelf, as in a
one-shelf OLA with the second shelf currently unused, Tellabs
recommends using a blank fuse (Tellabs part number 63.0129) for the
two fuses designated for the unused shelf to reduce power consumption.
If a shelf is powered but not used, the fans run at high speed.
Warning:
on the stud or nut.
Page 7-346 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
7.20 The electrical characteristics for a Tellabs 7100 OTS at a worst case draw,
using 82-issue SSM-D or SSM-X, are identified in Table 7.1, page 7-346.
__ 34. Measure and record the voltage at the office power source
(BDFB/PDF). Verify that the measurements correspond to the values
that are displayed in Table 7.2, page 7-346.
__ 35. Use a digital multimeter to measure the voltage at the relay rack
between the 48 V terminal and the battery return terminal of all power
feeds, including 1A and 2A.
__ 36. Record the corresponding values in Table 7.3, page 7-346.
__ 37. If the voltage is within the range specified in step 34, page 7-346 go to
step 38, page 7-346.
If the voltage is not within the range specified in Table 7.2, page 7-346
check the wiring polarity and voltage at the office battery distribution
point. Notify the Tellabs site contact of any discrepancies.
__ 38. Remove power from the A-side power feeds.
__ 39. Repeat steps 28, page 7-345 through 37, page 7-346 for B-side
power cabling.
Go to Connecting External Alarm Systems, page 7-362.
Table 7.1 Tellabs 7100 OTS Electrical Characteristics
Equipment
Power
Dissipation at
-48 Vdc
(Watts)
List 1 Current
Drain at -48
Vdc (Amps)
List 2 Current
Drain
1
at -42.5
Vdc (Amps)
1. The shelf values are taken for a fully populated shelf, worst case scenario. Each module within the shelf has its own fuse and has
been sized according to Telcordia Technologies, Inc. standards (List 2 Current Drain * 1.25). The shelf values are a culmination of all
of the modules worst case current drains. The BFAP size is determined through protective device coordination between the module
fuse and the worst case current drain of the shelf. Fans are operating at high speed.
BFAP
Breaker
Size
(Amps)
Recommended
BDFB/PDF Protective
Device Size (Amps)
Main Shelf 1555.2 32.4 32.7 60 70
Port Shelf 2294.4 47.8 54.5 60 70
Fan Tray
and AIP
984 20.5 22.9 30 40
Table 7.2 Voltage Feed Polarity and Voltage Range
Power Feed A Power Feed B
1 Vdc from reading at BFDB/PDF 1 Vdc from reading at BFDB/PDF
Table 7.3 Voltages for Relay Racks Containing System Shelves
Power Feed 1A Power Feed 1B Power Feed 2A Power Feed 2B
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-347
Connecting the HCSS to the Optional PDU or Equivalent Power Source
7.21 The HCSSs require four A-side power feeds per shelf and four B-side
power feeds per shelf. The 82.71020H HCSS power distribution unit (PDU)
provides power distribution to the HCSSs. Refer to Figure 7.7, page 7-347. The
HCSS PDU can be equipped with up to 12 power distribution circuit breakers. The
HCSS configuration only uses eight power distribution circuit breakers. Circuit
breaker positions 3A, 4A, 3B, and 4B are not used.
7.22 Tellabs recommends that a rack equipped with two HCSSs have an HCSS
PDU installed at the top of the rack. The HCSS PDU should have eight 60 Ampere
circuit breakers installed (Tellabs part number 180.0794):
A-side circuit breakers 1A, 2A, 5A and 6A
B-side circuit breakers 1B, 2B, 5B, and 6B
1A2A3A4A5A6A
returns
A-side
1A2A3A4A5A6A
power inputs
A-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
power inputs
B-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
returns
B-side
1A2A3A4A5A6A
1A2A3A4A5A6A 1B2B3B4B5B6B 1B2B3B4B5B6B
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
returns
A-side
power outputs
A-side
power outputs
B-side
returns
B-side
to shelves
Page 7-348 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ oneHCSS Power Cable Kit (Tellabs part number 81.71HCSS-CBL).
Each kit includes two sets of 4 cables:
__ 250-0106, power cable (upper set of 4)
__ 250-0107, power cable (lower set of 4)
7.25 Perform the following steps to connect the HCSS power cables to the rear
of the HCSS, route them up to the front of the HCSS PDU and connect them to the
HCSS PDU:
__ 1. Visually verify that all shelf breakers are OFF on the 82.71020H PDU.
__ 2. Determine which set of power cables, upper or lower, is required for
the HCSS. Refer to Materials above.
__ 3. Take the 4 cables to the rear of the HCSS.
__ 4. Remove the clear power terminal block cover over the power terminal
blocks at the rear of each HCSS.
__ 5. Set the clear power terminal block cover and screws aside for use later
in this procedure.
__ 6. Select the cable to be routed. Refer to Table 7.4, page 7-348 and
Table 7.5, page 7-349
Table 7.4 Power Cabling for Upper HCSS
Shelf Terminal
Connects to PDU
Terminal Cable Color
Check Off Each Cable
When Completed
Upper shelf 48VDC A1 48 V 1A red
48RTN A1 RET 1A black
48VDC A2 48 V 2A red
48VDC B1 48 V 1B red
48RTN B1 RET 1B black
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-349
__ 7. Use the indelible marker to label the power cable.
__ 8. Connect the HCSS power cable to the HCSS power filtered terminal
block. Refer to Table 7.4, page 7-348 and Figure 7.7, page 7-347
through 7.12, page 7-352:
__ 8.1 Remove the nut and washer from the each post on the
filtered terminal block.
__ 8.1.1 Set the nut and washers aside for later
use.
__ 8.2 Place the power cable dual-holed lug over the filtered
terminal block posts.
__ 8.3 Secure the cable lug to the filtered terminal block posts
using the previously removed washers and nuts. Refer
__ 8.4 Torque all nuts on the HCSS PDU filtered terminal block
posts to a value of 30 at 3 inch/pound.
Figure 7.8 Filtered Terminal Block Washers and Nut Sequence
Table 7.5 Power Cabling for Lower HCSS
Shelf Terminal
Connects to PDU
Terminal Cable Color
Check Off Each Cable
When Completed
Lower shelf 48VDC A1 48 V 5A red
48VDC A2 48 V 6A red
flat washer
conical washer
nut
Page 7-350 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.9 83.07100B-60 HCSS Rear Power Connections on Lower Shelf
Figure 7.10 Power Cables From the Lower 83.07100B HCSS Shelf to the 82.7100H HCSS PDU
air baffle
A-side
power
B-side
power
power cables
250.0107
B-side
power
A-side
power
front of rack back of rack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-351
Figure 7.11 83.07100B-60 HCSS Rear Power Connections on Upper Shelf
Page 7-352 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.12 Power Cables From the Upper 83.07100B HCSS Shelf to the 82.7100H HCSS PDU
A-side
power
B-side
power
B-side
power
A-side
power
back of rack
front of rack
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-353
Figure 7.13 Power Cables on HCSS Shelf - Two Shelves in a Rack
__ 9. Route the power cable up to the top of the rack, lace the power cable
to the rack and to the support bars as you route the cable:
__ 9.1 Lower HCSS: Route the lower HCSS power cable up
the side of the rack, then route the power cable through
the opening above the air baffle and below the HCSS
PDU. Refer to Figure 7.9, page 7-350 and Figure 7.10,
page 7-350.
The A1 and A2 power cables run up the back left side of
the rack.
The B1 and B2 power cables run up the back right side
of the rack.
__ 9.2 Upper HCSS: Route the upper HCSS power cable up
the center of the HCSS, then route the power cable
through the opening above the air baffle and below the
HCSS PDU. Refer to Figure 7.11, page 7-351 and
The A1 and A2 power cables are routed up through the
center of the shelf in between the EMI Cable Duct work.
front of rack
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
-48V A1
red cables
black cables
A-side
power
B-side
power
-48V RET A1
-48V A2
-48V RET A2
-48V A1
-48V RET A1
-48V A2
-48V RET A2
-48V B1
-48V RET B1
-48V B2
-48V RET B2
-48V B1
-48V RET B1
-48V B2
-48V RET B2
back of rack
power cables
250.0106
power cables
250.0107
Page 7-354 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 10. Secure the Power cable to the HCSS PDU:
__ 10.1 Remove the nut and washer from the HCSS PDU
terminal block posts.
__ 10.1.1 Set the nut and washer aside for later
use.
__ 10.2 Place the power cable dual-holed lug over the terminal
block posts.
__ 10.3 Secure the power cable dual-holed lug to the HCSS
PDU terminal block posts using the previously removed
washer and nuts.
__ 11. In Table 7.4, page 7-348, check off the cable that is complete.
__ 12. Perform one of the following substeps:
__ 12.1 Repeat this procedure for each HCSS power cable (4
power cables per shelf).
__ 12.2 If all power cables (4 per shelf) are attached and routed,
go to step 13, page 7-354.

__ 13. Torque all two-hole lugs on the HCSS PDU input power terminals
according to the recommended torque requirements provided in
__ 15. Attach the clear power terminal block cover over the power terminal
blocks at the rear of each HCSS.

Warning:
on the stud or nut.
Caution:
terminal strip on the HCSS PDU A and B input feeds may cause later service
short circuit.
Caution:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-355
Connecting the 48 Vdc Office Battery Supply to the HCSS PDU
7.26 This section describes how to connect the 48 Vdc office battery supply to
the HCSS PDU.
7.27 Tellabs 7100 OTS equipment shelves require three redundant,
independently-fused 48 Vdc power inputs (feeds 1A, 2A, 3A and 1B, 2B, and 3B)
from a 48 Vdc power source. The 48 Vdc power source provides power for all
plug-in modules and common equipment in the network element (NE).
completed.
power precautions.
__ Verify that all circuit breakers on the HCSS PDU and customer power
distribution frame are all in the OFF position.
__ The Tellabs 7100 equipment relay rack requires eight independently
fused office battery fuses, 1A, 2A, 5A, 6A and 1B, 2B, 5B, 6B. Use a
separate battery fuse for each feed. Refer to Figure 7.14, page 7-357.
__ crimping tool
__ wire cutters
__ heat gun
DANGER:
-48 Vdc source must be reliably connected to ground.
DANGER:
Page 7-356 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ eight sets of up to a #2 AWG copper conductor wire (for the A and B
power leads) that are supplied by the Deployment Engineer when they
observe the aisle ground feeder size at the time of the Site Survey. A
corresponding H or C tap cover is also ordered at that time.
__ a quantity of sixteen 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) two-hole terminal lugs with 3/4
inch (19.05 mm) spacing (Tellabs part number 52.6168)
__ lacing cord
__ clear heat shrink wrap the same diameter as the AWG wire and long
enough to cover the lug barrel and cable entering the barrel
Action 7.31 Follow these steps to connect the 48 Vdc office battery supply to the
Tellabs 7100 HCSS PDU:
__ 2. Locate the 48 Vdc office battery distribution point and verify that no
fuses are populated in the A and B power feed fuse locations.
Do not reinsert the fuses until step 33, page 7-345 for the A power feed
and step 38, page 7-346 for the B power feed are complete.
__ 3. Verify that no power cables are terminated in the assigned positions.
__ 4. Verify that the shelf power breakers are turned off at the HCSS PDU.
DANGER:
An ungrounded equipment shelf or relay rack is a potential electric shock hazard.
Before applying power, always verify that the shelf is grounded to the equipment
relay rack, and that the ground for the equipment relay rack is connected to the
building common ground (office ground).
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-357
Note: HCSS PDU circuit breaker positions 3A, 4A, 3B, and 4B are not used.
__ 5. Run up to eight sets of power cables for the A and B feeds, each of
which contains both a Power and Return cable, for a total of 16 cables.
Note: All battery return cables should be taped at both ends.
__ 6. Route the cables from the office battery distribution point to the top of
the equipment relay rack (RR).
1A2A3A4A5A6A
returns
A-side
1A2A3A4A5A6A
power inputs
A-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
power inputs
B-side
1B2B3B4B5B6B
returns
B-side
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
returns
A-side
power outputs
A-side
power outputs
B-side
returns
B-side
to shelves
Page 7-358 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 7. Label each end of the corresponding power cable ends with
information leading to the opposite end termination point as illustrated
in the example below,
Where:
XXX.xx = Represents the rack number.
YY = Signifies the breaker position.
Labels at the office battery supply termination point might read as
follows:
Labels at the HCSS PDU termination point might read as follows:
__ 8. Repeat the labeling for each set of power feed cables, including 1A,
2A, 5A, 6A and 1B, 2B, 5B, 6B where applicable.
__ 9. Route all of the cables on the front of the relay rack to their respective
power terminals located on the HCSS PDU. Refer to Figure 7.14,
page 7-357.
__ 10. Preform cables to their respective termination points, then cut the
cables.
__ 11. At the HCSS PDU, slide pieces of clear heat shrink over the A and B
power leads. Slide the clear heat shrink back so that the leads can be
stripped.
__ 12. Strip the ends of the A and B power leads.
__ 13. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the exposed ends.
__ 14. Crimp on two-hole lugs according to the manufacturers
recommendations.
the two-hole lug and the copper wire jacket. Refer to Figure 7.15,
page 7-359.
to HCSS PDU in RR XXX.xx
1A Power Return
to HCSS PDU in RR XXX.xx
1A Power Return
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-359
Figure 7.15 Applying Heat Shrink Wrap to Grounding Lug
__ 16. Use the heat gun to shrink the clear heat shrink wrap over the crimped
area.
two-hole lug of the 1A power Return to the terminal on the HCSS PDU
labeled 48 V 1A Return. Refer to Figure 7.14, page 7-357.
two-hole lug of the 1A Power feed to the terminal on the PDU HCSS
labeled 48 V 1A Feed.
__ 19. Repeat steps 17, page 7-359 through 18, page 7-359 for each set of
power feed cables, including 1A, 2A, 5A, 6A and 1B, 2B, 5B, 6B where
applicable.
__ 20. Torque all two-hole lugs on the PDU HCSS input power terminals
according to the recommended torque requirements provided in

Warning:
on the stud or nut.
Caution:
terminal strip on the HCSS PDU A and B input feeds may cause later service
short circuit.
Caution:
Page 7-360 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 22. Conduct a continuity check with a digital multimeter to ensure that the
power cables (48 Vdc and return) are not reversed.
Note: Improper connection of the Tellabs 7100 OTS to a power source can trip
the assigned power breakers on the customers battery distribution panel.
__ 23. Allow cable slack sufficient enough to dress the cables, then cut the
cables to their respective termination points.
__ 24. At the battery distribution panel slide pieces of clear heat shrink wrap
over the A and B Power Feeds and Returns. Slide the clear heat shrink
wrap back so that the leads can be stripped.
__ 25. Taking one cable at a time, strip the ends of the A and B Power Feeds
and Return leads and crimp on lugs that comply with the customer
power distribution plant connection points. Slide the piece of clear heat
shrink over the crimped section of the two-hole lug and the copper wire
jacket.
__ 26. Use the heat gun to shrink the clear heat shrink over the crimped area.
__ 27. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the 1A power Return lead and connect
the lug to the appropriate return terminal on the office battery
distribution point.
__ 28. Apply a thin coat of NO-OX to the lug of the 1A Power feed and
connect the lug to the appropriate breaker position on the 48 Vdc
office battery distribution panel.
__ 29. Repeat step 28, page 7-345 and step 29, page 7-345 for each set of
power feed cables, including 1A, 2A, 5A, 6A and 1B, 2B, 5B, 6B where
applicable.
__ 30. Torque all two-hole lugs on the office battery distribution power
terminals to the appropriate inch/pounds (5 inch/pound), according to
the requirements provided in Torquing Force Tables, page 7-22.
__ 32. Install the fuses and turn on the breaker for the A power feeds at the
office battery distribution point. For fuse requirements, refer to Table
7.1, page 7-346.
Warning:
on the stud or nut.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-361
Note 1: If currently installing fewer than the maximum number of shelves that is
allowed in the rack (2 for 83.7100A/B-60 HCSSs), but want to allow for
growth to the maximum number of shelves, Tellabs recommends
providing fuses for the maximum number of shelves.
Note 2: If installing a two-shelf configuration, but using only one shelf, with the
second shelf currently unused, Tellabs recommends using a blank fuse
(Tellabs part number 63.0129) for the fuses designated for the unused
shelf to reduce power consumption. If a shelf is powered but not used,
the fans run at high speed.
7.32 The electrical characteristics for a Tellabs 7100 OTS HCSS at a worst
case draw, using 82-issue SSM-D or SSM-X, are identified in Table 7.6,
page 7-361.
__ 33. Measure and record the voltage at the office power source
(BDFB/PDF). Verify that the measurements correspond to the values
that are displayed in Table 7.7, page 7-361.
__ 34. Use a digital multimeter to measure the voltage at the relay rack
between the 48 V terminal and the battery return terminal of all power
feeds, including 1A and 2A.
__ 35. Record the corresponding values in Table 7.8, page 7-361.
Table 7.6 Tellabs 7100 OTS Electrical Characteristics
Equipment
Power
Dissipation at
-48 Vdc
(Watts)
List 1 Current
Drain
1
at -48
Vdc (Amps)
1. Fans are operating at normal speed.
List 2 Current
Drain
2
at -42.5
Vdc (Amps)
2. The shelf values are taken for a fully populated shelf, worst case scenario. Each module within the shelf has its own fuse and has
been sized according to Telcordia Technologies, Inc. standards (List 2 Current Drain * 1.25). The shelf values are a culmination of all
of the modules worst case current drains. The BFAP size is determined through protective device coordination between the module
fuse and the worst case current drain of the shelf. Fans are operating at high speed.
HCSS
PDU
Breaker
Size
(Amps)
3
3. The 71020 HCSS PDU provides four breakers per shelf.
Recommended
BDFB/PDF Protective
Device Size (Amps)
Port Shelf 2654.4 55.3 74.2 60 70
Table 7.7 Voltage Feed Polarity and Voltage Range
Power Feed A Power Feed B
1 Vdc from reading at BFDB/PDF 1 Vdc from reading at BFDB/PDF
Table 7.8 Voltages for Relay Racks Containing HCSSs
Power
Feed
1A
Power
Feed
1B
Power
Feed
2A
Power
Feed
2B
Power
Feed
5A
Power
Feed
5B
Power
Feed
6A
Power
Feed
6B
Page 7-362 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 36. If the voltage is within the range specified in step 33, page 7-361 go to
step 37, page 7-362.
If the voltage is not within the range specified in Table 7.7, page 7-361
check the wiring polarity and voltage at the office battery distribution
point. Notify the Tellabs site contact of any discrepancies.
__ 37. Remove power from the A-side power feeds.
__ 38. Repeat steps 28, page 7-345 through 37, page 7-346 for B-side
power cabling.
Connecting External Alarm Systems
7.33 This section describes how to install the cables from a Tellabs 7100 OTS
to the office alarm system.
7.34 The following alarm connection procedures are provided as referenced
below:
Connecting the Alarm Interface Panel to Central Office Alarm,
page 7-363
Wiring the BFAP to the Central Office Alarm Connections, page 7-367
7.35 All connections for the alarms are made through wire wrap connections.
The alarms use Form C relay contacts wired in Normally Open (NO) or Normally
Closed (NC) positions.
7.36 Output terminations located on the Alarm Interface Panel (AIP) are used
to activate external visual, audible, and telemetry alarm devices. The alarm
devices are used to indicate critical, administrative processor, major, and minor
alarms on the Tellabs 7100 OTS. The terminations consist of two sets of relay
contacts that appear on the wire wrap side of two 56-pin card-edge connectors that
are located on the AIP.
7.37 External alarms are grouped into two categories, including:
1. site and central office (CO) alarms
2. shelf alarms
Note: The alarm outputs from each Tellabs 7100 NE can be daisy-chained and
taken to the end-of-aisle alarm box mounted on the upright of the
end-of-aisle relay rack in the row.
completed.
power precautions.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-363
__ wire strippers
__ wire cutters
__ wire wrapping tool
__ antistatic wrist strap or static-dissipating floor mat
__ 22 to 26 AWG tinned solid twisted pair wire
__ clear heat shrink wrap or electrical tape to wrap the cable sheath
where it is stripped back to access individual cable pairs
Connecting the Alarm Interface Panel to Central Office Alarm
7.41 Follow these steps to connect the Tellabs 7100 AIP to the office alarm
system:
__ 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and plug it into the wrist
strap jack, located on the front of either of the air baffles. Alternately,
use an ESD foot strap and ESD protective flooring. To ensure a good
discharge path, make sure that the ESD protective flooring is always
kept clean.
DANGER:
Warning:
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage sensitive electronic components
resulting in a traffic-affecting condition. Ensure that plug-in modules are stored
in static preventive material. Do not touch any components on the modules.
Handle modules by the edges or front panel. Always wear a properly grounded
wrist strap when handling, removing, or inserting a module and when touching
the equipment shelves or cables. ESD protective flooring, used with proper ESD
footwear, may be used as an alternative to a wrist strap. ESD wrist straps and
footwear should be checked daily to verify performance.
Page 7-364 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 3. Route each 22/26 AWG cable from the termination points in the office
to the Tellabs 7100 AIP.
Note: Cable only those alarms identified in the alarm plan and follow all
applicable alarm specifications.
__ 4. Allow enough cable slack to dress the cables, then cut the cables.
__ 5. At the AIP, remove the cable sheath while leaving sufficient length on
the individual wires to connect to any of the wire wrap pins.
__ 6. Wire wrap the wires to the alarm contact pins on the AIP using a wire
wrap tool. Follow all applicable local procedures.
__ 7. At the office alarm system or the end of aisle alarm panel, make the
corresponding alarm connections following all applicable local
requirements.
For wire wrapping block locations, refer to Figure 7.16, page 7-364.
For pin assignments, refer to Table 7.9, page 7-365. Refer to these
symbols:
| = Input, when the alarm originates outside of the NE and is
routed to the AIP
O = Output, when the alarm originates inside the NE and is routed
from the AIP to the CO Alarm
= Ground
Go to Wiring the BFAP to the Central Office Alarm Connections,
page 7-367.
Figure 7.16 Detail of Alarm Interface Panel
Alarm Connections to Central Office
Alarm System (wire wrap pins)
AIP Connection
to HDP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
56-pin Edge Connector Location on the AIP
Power
Connections
Power
Connections
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-365
Table 7.9 Connector Pin Out
Pin Signal Type Input/Output Description
1 48VRET - ENV1_RET
2 I ENV_1
3 48VRET - ENV2_RET
4 I ENV_2
5 48VRET - ENV3_RET
6 I ENV_3
7 48VRET - ENV4_RET
8 I ENV_4
9 48VRET - ACO_REM_RET
10 I ACO_REM
11
12
13 O Telemetry_Critical_Alarm_NO
14 O Visible_Critical_Alarm_NO
15 O Telemetry_Critical_Alarm_COM
16 O Visible_Critical_Alarm_COM
17 O Telemetry_Critical_Alarm_NC
18 O Visible_Critical_Alarm_NC
19 O Telemetry_Major_Alarm_NO
20 O Visible_Major_Alarm_NO
21 O Telemetry_Major_Alarm_COM
22 O Visible_Major_Alarm_COM
23 O Telemetry_Major_Alarm_NC
24 O Visible_Major_Alarm_NC
25 O Telemetry_Minor_Alarm_NO
27 O Telemetry_Minor_Alarm_COM
29 O Telemetry_Minor_Alarm_NC
31 O EXT1_NO
Page 7-366 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
32 O Audible_Critical_Alarm_NO
33 O EXT1_COM
34 O Audible_Critical_Alarm_COM
35 O EXT1_NC
36 O Audible_Critical_Alarm_NC
37 O EXT2_NO
38 O Audible_Major_Alarm_NO
39 O EXT2_COM
40 O Audible_Major_Alarm_COM
41 O EXT2_NC
42 O Audible_Major_Alarm_NC
43 O EXT3_NO
44 O Audible_Minor_Alarm_NO
45 O EXT3_COM
46 O Audible_Minor_Alarm_COM
47 O EXT3_NC
48 O Audible_Minor_Alarm_NC
49 O EXT4_NO
50
51 O EXT4_COM
52
53 O EXT4_NC
54
55
56
Table 7.9 Connector Pin Out (Continued)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-367
Wiring the BFAP to the Central Office Alarm Connections
7.42 To connect the Tellabs 7100 BFAP to the office alarm system, follow these
steps:
__ 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and connect it to the wrist
strap jack, located on the front of either air baffle. Alternately, use an
ESD foot strap and ESD protective flooring. Be sure the ESD
protective flooring is kept clean to ensure a good discharge path.
__ 3. Route each 22/26 AWG cable from the termination points in the office
to the Tellabs 7100 BFAP.
__ 4. Allow enough cable slack to adequately dress the cables, then cut the
cables.
__ 5. At the BFAP, remove the cable sheath and leave sufficient length on
the individual wires to connect to any of the wire wrap pins.
__ 6. Wire wrap the wires to the alarm contact pins on the BFAP using a wire
wrap tool. Follow all applicable local procedures. Refer to Figure 7.17,
page 7-368.
Warning:
Page 7-368 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.17 Breaker Frame Alarm Panel (BFAP) For Use With 82.7100A/B/C/D-60 Shelves
Note: Figure 7.18, page 7-368 shows the CO alarm pins and locations and
illustrates the pin assignments.
Figure 7.18 CO Alarm Connections on the BFAP
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Alarm Module
CO Alarm
Fan Trays / AIP
Lower Shelf
Upper Shelf
not used
B-side
fan/AIP output
B-side
fan/AIP fuses
A-side
fan/AIP fuses
A-side
fan/AIP output
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
1A
RTN 48V
Fan/AIP Fuses - B Fan/AIP Outputs -B
10 Amps
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
1A
RTN 48V
Fan/AIP Fuses - A Fan/AIP Outputs - A
AIP
Bottom Fan
Upper Shelf
Upper Fan
Upper Shelf
Bottom Fan
Lower Shelf
Upper Fan
Lower Shelf
AIP
Bottom Fan
Upper Shelf
Upper Fan
Upper Shelf
Bottom Fan
Lower Shelf
Upper Fan
Lower Shelf
AIP
Bottom Fan
Upper Shelf
Upper Fan
Upper Shelf
Bottom Fan
Lower Shelf
Upper Fan
Lower Shelf
AIP
Bottom Fan
Upper Shelf
Upper Fan
Upper Shelf
Bottom Fan
Lower Shelf
Upper Fan
Lower Shelf
Max. Output
10 Amps
Max. Output
CO Alarms are a combination alarm
for all shelf and fan alarms and is typically
wired to the central office aisle alarm
NC1 COM1 NO1
82.71020C BFAP
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-369
__ 7. At the office alarm system or the end of aisle alarm panel, make the
corresponding alarm connections according to local requirements.
Go to Connecting the AC Power Outlet (Optional), page 7-369.
Connecting the AC Power Outlet (Optional)
7.43 This section provides procedures for connecting an alternating current
(AC) power outlet to the NE using a rear AC utility outlet box kit or front AC utility
outlet box kit
7.44 Connecting the alternating current (AC) power outlet to the NE is an
optional procedure, which is used only for North American relay rack installations.
completed.
power precautions.
__ 3/8 inch open ended wrench
__ Tellabs 149.0261 AC Outlet Kit (the same outlet kit is used for both the
front and rear of rack)
DANGER:
Page 7-370 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Note: To obtain additional information regarding installation procedures or the
optional utility outlet box kits, follow your company's prescribed procedures
for obtaining technical assistance or call Tellabs Technical Assistance at
1.800.443.5555 (North America) or 1.630.798.7070 (outside North
America).
Action 7.48 To connect the alternating current (AC) power to the NE follow these steps:
__ 2. Determine and obtain the proper number of AC Outlet Kits required:
One kit is required for the front of the rack and a second kit for the rear
of the rack.
__ 3. Verify the contents of each AC Outlet Kit. Refer to Figure 7.19,
page 7-370.
Figure 7.19 AC Outlet Kit Contents
DANGER:
RISK OF SHOCK: Before beginning any installation procedure, verify that the
AC Power to the circuit in question is disconnected.
AC outlet
AC outlet cover plate
4" x2 x2 electrical box
L-Bracket
panhead screws
star washers & lock nuts
Flat head Phillips-head screws
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-371
__ 4. If this is at the rear of an HCSS rack, remove the top cover of the
HCSS rear base extender and install the outlet kit in the HCSS rear
base extender using the following steps.
__ 5. Remove the guard cover from the front base of the equipment rack
using the #1 Phillips-head screwdriver.
__ 6. Using the #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove and dispose of the
blank cover plate from the guard cover exposing the cut out for the AC
outlet.
__ 7. Locate the L-bracket and two flat head Phillips-head screws with
beveled sides.
__ 8. Secure the L-bracket to the base of the equipment rack. Place the
vertical portion of the L toward the inside of the rack as shown in
Figure 7.20 AC Outlet Kit Mounting
__ 9. Locate the 4" x 2" x 2" electrical box and two pan head screws, star
washers and lock nuts.
__ 10. Attach the electrical box to the Vertical portion of the L-bracket using
the hardware provided.
Two pan head screws, both of which contain a star washer, are
inserted inside of the electrical box and the lock nuts are used outside
of the box to secure the box to the L-bracket.
__ 11. Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver and 3/8 open ended wrench,
tighten the nut and bolt making the box fit securely to the L-bracket.
panhead screw locations
used to secure the
electrical box
locations for
flathead Phillips-head screws
Page 7-372 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 12. If a second AC outlet is required on the rear of the rack, repeat steps
3, page 7-370 through 11, page 7-371 on the rear of the relay rack.
__ 13. Attach electrical conduit(s) and install AC wiring to the electrical
boxes).
__ 14. Connect the AC power wiring to the AC outlet making sure that proper
polarity is observed. (Black 120VAC feed connected to copper colored
terminal and white neutral connected to the silver colored terminals.)
__ 15. Install the AC outlet into the electrical box such that the round ground
lug is facing to the left as you look at the outlet.
__ 16. Secure the AC outlet to the electrical box with the two Phillips-head
screws provided on the AC outlet.
__ 17. Once the AC outlet has been secured in place, attach the AC cover
plate over the AC outlet and electrical box. Secure the AC cover plate
to the AC outlet using the single Phillips-head screw that is attached
to the AC cover plate.
__ 18. If a second AC outlet is required on the rear of the rack repeat steps
3, page 7-370 through 17, page 7-372 on the rear of the relay rack.
__ 19. Apply power to the AC circuit and test the outlet for proper voltage
polarity.
__ 20. Place the guard cover over the base of the rack covering the AC outlet
and cover plate. If this is at the rear of an HCSS rack, replace the top
cover of the HCSS rear base extender.
__ 21. Secure the guard cover to the base of the rack using the two
Phillips-head screws.
__ 22. If an AC outlet is required on the rear of the rack, repeat steps 3,
page 7-370 through 21, page 7-372 on the rear of the relay rack.
Go to Cabling Between Shelves, page 7-373.
DANGER:
RISK OF SHOCK: Before beginning any installation procedure, verify that the
AC Power to the circuit in question is disconnected.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-373
Cabling Between Shelves
7.49 Communication between shelves in the same rack, or between shelves in
different racks, is through 100BaseT Ethernet. The 82.07100A/C-60 main shelf
and 82.07100B/D-60 port shelf Ethernet connections are managed using the
horizontal distribution panels (HDPs). The 83.07100B-60 High Capacity Switch
Shelf (HCSS) Ethernet connections are managed using the HCSS Passive
Distribution Panel (PDP).
7.50 The HDPs are located above each 82.07100A/C-60 main shelf and
82.07100B/D-60 port shelf and are composed of one passive module and two
control and timing modules. Refer to Figure 7.21, page 7-374.
7.51 The PDPs are part of the 83.07100B-60 HCSS. They are located below the
shelf and are composed of an A-side and a B-side. Refer to Figure 7.21,
page 7-374.
7.52 There is only 1 second main shelf (MS-15) allowed per NE. MS-15 is
typically located in either bay 1 in the lower shelf position, or bay 2 in the upper
shelf position. The port shelf switch setting F is only used when MS-15 is used. The
NE allows port shelves in positions PS-2 through PS-13.
Note 1: The first port shelf that is closest to the controlling main shelf is shelf 2
to correspond to the actual shelf number. Subsequent shelves are
numbered sequentially from 3 to 13. For port shelf and HCSS quantities,
refer to Table 1.1, page 7-1.
Note 2: The Tellabs 7100 OTS relay rack is shipped with the main shelves and
port shelves installed. Fan alarm wiring is performed in the factory.
Note 3: The LAN cabling between the main shelf and MS-15 or a port shelf in the
same rack is installed in the factory. If installing a system with two or
more racks, follow these procedures to install the red and blue LAN
cables connecting the port rack shelves to the main rack main shelf HDP
or HCSS rack shelves PDP to the main rack main shelf HDP.
Page 7-374 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.21 Main and Port Horizontal Distribution Panel (HPD) and HCSS Passive Distribution Panel (PDP)
Connections
USS Shelf
Switch
Setting
HCSS
LED Shelf
Number
EMS Label
for Each Shelf
Connection to Main Shelf
Control and Timing HDP
Connection to Port Shelf
Control and Timing
HDP/PDP
1 not applicable MS-1 not applicable not applicable
2 2 PS-2 1 1
3 3 PS-3 2 1
4 4 PS-4 3 1
5 5 PS-5 4 1
6 6 PS-6 5 1
7 7 PS-7 6 1
8 8 PS-8 7 1
9 9 PS-9 8 1
A not applicable PS-10 9 1
B not applicable PS-11 10 1
C not applicable PS-12 11 1
D not applicable PS-13 12 1
F not applicable MS-15 13 1
passive HDP module control and timing
HDP module - side A
control and timing
HDP module - side B
HCSS PDP
C
T
1
1 2
L T L T
C
T
2
1 2
L T L T
B-side
Control and Timing
jacks, located
on side of PDP
A-side
Control and Timing
jacks located,
on side of PDP
shelf ID
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-375
7.53 Go to one of the following topics for connecting the cabling between
shelves:
Installing Horizontal Distribution Panel RT-1 to RT-2 Looping
Cable, page 7-375
Bay Communication LAN Cables From 82.07100A/C-60 Main
Shelves to 82.07100B/D-60 Port Shelves, page 7-375
LAN Cables for Connecting A-side and B-side of Port Shelf and
Main in Same Rack, page 7-380
Routing Cabling from First Main Shelf to Second Main Shelf,
page 7-392
Installing Horizontal Distribution Panel RT-1 to RT-2 Looping Cable
7.54 If the main shelf HDP RT-1 and RT-2 jacks are not used to provide OSC
connectivity between co-located NEs, install an Ethernet looping cable (Tellabs
part number 150.1189) between the RT-1 and RT-2 jacks of main shelf 1 HDP and,
if applicable, main shelf 15. The looping cable is used to prevent RT-1 and RT-2
conditions being generated if the RT-1/RT-2 feature is not used. Refer to Figure
7.22, page 7-375.
Figure 7.22 Looping Cable Installed in Main Shelf HDP-P Module
Bay Communication LAN Cables From 82.07100A/C-60 Main Shelves to 82.07100B/D-60
Port Shelves
7.55 Gray Bay Communication (Bay Comm) LAN cables are not required for
83.07100B-60 HCSSs.
Page 7-376 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
7.56 When two or more racks are installed, the racks need to communicate
BFAP, fan, and other alarms from remote port shelves to the main shelf, where the
subsystems that control the entire system are located. With a one rack system, the
Bay Comm cables are pre-wired. With a two rack system and two shelves per rack,
order one additional cable (refer to Materials, page 7-376) for each additional rack.
7.57 The maximum length of a single segment of Bay Comm cabling is
200 meters (656.2 feet) when connecting two shelves and when daisy-chained
from main shelf to first port shelf to second port shelf, etc., the maximum aggregate
cable length is 800 meters (2624 feet).
7.58 Follow these procedures to connect the gray Bay Comm LAN cables which
communicate information between the shelves.
Requirements 7.59 To perform this procedure:
__ Prevent personal injury or equipment damage by consistently
adhering to all applicable electrostatic discharge (ESD), equipment
handling, and power precautions.
__ Inspect all optical cables and optical connectors for signs of physical
damage before installing the optical cables.
Note: The Tellabs 7100 relay rack is shipped with the shelves populated. Bay
communication cabling between shelves in the same rack is installed in the
factory. Follow these procedures for cabling between two or more racks.
Materials 7.60 For this procedure, use the following cable assembly for each Bay Comm
connection:
__ oneGray LAN cable (Tellabs part number 150.1700-XXX)
Where:
XXX = Length in feet (1 to 30 in 1 foot increments, 35 to
100 in 5 foot increments, 110 to 300 in 10 foot
increments).
Note: A general rule of thumb is when two racks are immediately adjacent, a
15 foot cable is used.
Action 7.61 Follow these steps to install fiber optic cables for bay communication:
__ 1. Inspect all cables and connectors for signs of physical damage before
installing the cables.
Note: Immediately report cable damage according to the applicable company
procedures.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-377
Connecting the LAN Between
the Shelves in the Same
Rack
__ 2. Obtain a (gray) LAN cable assembly (Tellabs part number
150.1700-XXX) to connect the top shelf HDP in the second rack and
the lower shelf HDP in the main rack.
Where:
increments).
Note 1: The term main rack mentioned in these procedures defines the rack
with the controlling system shelf (MS-1) that contains the SPMs, RCMMs
or OADM88s, and other controller modules and may contain port shelf
(PS-2).
Note 2: The term second rack defines the rack that contains port shelves and
port shelf modules, such as transponders, or may contain the second
main shelf (MS-15) and other port shelves.
__ 3. On the top shelf HDP of the second rack, locate the passive module
for the Bay Comm connections. Refer to Figure 7.23, page 7-378.
__ 4. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the connector labeled Bay
Comm IN on the upper shelf HDP.
__ 5. Route the cable above the cable hooks on the upper shelf HDP to the
left side of the rack. Use the fiber management spools as necessary
to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the lower shelf.
__ 6. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the lower shelf HDP.
__ 7. Connect the other end of the LAN cable into the connector labeled
Bay Comm OUT on the lower shelf HDP of the main rack.
Warning:
Page 7-378 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.23 LAN Bay Comm Cabling Between Shelves in the Same Rack
Note: NEBS and ETSI baffle installations are different.
Connecting the LAN Between
Shelves in Different Racks
__ 8. Obtain a LAN cable to connect the lower shelf HDP and upper shelf
HDP in a different rack, and using a (gray) LAN cable assembly
(Tellabs part number 150.1700-XXX), complete the following steps.
Where:
increments).
Note: This cable is typically installed before shipping
__ 9. On the lower shelf HDP, locate the passive module for the Bay
Comm connections. Refer to Figure 7.24, page 7-379.
__ 10. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the connector labeled Bay
Comm IN on the lower shelf HDP.
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Bay
COMM
Out
Bay
COMM In
LAN cable
150.1700-XXX
Main Shelf HDP
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-379
__ 11. Route the cable above the cable hooks on the lower shelf HDP to the
to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the next rack
to its upper shelf.
__ 12. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the upper shelf HDP.
__ 13. Connect the other end of the LAN cable into the connector labeled
Bay Comm OUT on the upper shelf HDP.
Figure 7.24 LAN Bay Comm Cabling for Connecting Shelves Between Different Racks
Go to LAN Cables for Connecting A-side and B-side of Port Shelf and
Main in Same Rack, page 7-380.
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
Bay
COMM
Out
Bay
COMM In
LAN cable
150.1700-XXX
Continue the
daisy chain
using same
type of
LAN cable
150.1700-XXX
(routed as
shown in the
previous
figure)
Continue
cabling to
the next
rack
Main Shelf HDP
Continue the
daisy chain
using same
type of LAN
cable
150.1700-XXX
(routed as
shown at left)
Page 7-380 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
LAN Cables for Connecting A-side and B-side of Port Shelf and Main in Same Rack
7.62 LAN cables connect the A-side (red), and the B-side (blue), of every
Tellabs 7100 shelf in the system to communicate updates to shelf configurations,
module status, and provisioning data.
Each 82.07100A/C-60 main shelf and 82.07100B/D-60 port shelf HDP
has two control and timing modules, A and B, each with 12 RJ-45
jacks. Refer to Figure 7.21, page 7-374.
Each 83.07100B-60 HCSS PDP has an A-side and B-side control and
timing area. Refer to Figure 7.21, page 7-374.
7.63 For cables connecting between racks, Inter-shelf LAN Cabling for Port
Shelves or HCSSs in Separate Rack than Main Shelf, page 7-385.
Note: The LAN cabling between shelves in the same rack is installed in the
factory. If installing a system with two or more racks, follow these
procedures to remove the red and blue LAN cables on the port rack and
replace them with new cables connecting the port/HCSS rack shelves to
the main rack main shelf HDP.
Requirements 7.64 To perform this procedure:
__ Inspect all cables and connectors for signs of physical damage before
Note 1: A SBOADM configuration can support two main shelves and up to 8 port
shelves, including the 83.07100B-60 HCSS. If only using
82.07100B/D-60 port shelves, there can be up to 12 port shelves. Refer
to Table 1.1, page 7-1.
In these procedures, the first port shelf that is closest to the controlling
Main Shelf is referred to as port shelf 1 (which is also called PS-2),
with each subsequent port shelf numbered sequentially from 3 to 13.
With an 8-degree system, the second main shelf (MS-15) may be
located either under the first main shelf (MS-1) in the same rack or in the
upper location on rack 2. The first port shelf (PS-2) may be located in the
next available shelf.
Note 2: The Tellabs 7100 relay rack is shipped with the shelves populated. Fan
alarm wiring is done in the factory.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-381
Materials 7.65 For this procedure, select one of the following cable assemblies for each
shelf connection. Refer to Table 7.10, page 7-381 and Table 7.11, page 7-381.
Action 7.66 Follow these steps to install LAN cables between the main shelf and one
port shelf:
Note: Typically, this is already completed before shipping. These procedures are
included here for your information.
procedures.
Connecting the A-side LAN
for Port Shelf
__ 2. Remove any existing LAN cables from the port rack only, if applicable.
__ 3. Obtain a (red) LAN cable assembly, refer to Tables 7.10, page 7-381
and Table 7.11, page 7-381.
__ 4. On the A-side of the main shelf HDP, locate the control and timing
module for the A-side connections. Refer to Figure 7.25, page 7-382.
Table 7.10 LAN Cable Assemblies (NEBS)
Cable Description Tellabs Part Number
LAN cable for port shelf Side A, red, intra-rack 150.1364
LAN cable for port shelf Side B, blue, intra-rack 150.1254
Table 7.11 LAN Cable Assemblies (ETSI)
LAN cable for port shelf Side A, red, intra-rack 150.1372
LAN cable for port shelf Side B, blue, intra-rack 150.1262
Warning:
Page 7-382 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.25 LAN Cabling for Connecting A-side of 7100A-60 Main Shelf to 7100B-60 First Port Shelf (PS-2)
__ 5. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the connector labeled 1 on the
main shelf HDP/control and timing side-A. It has a black square to
identify the port.
Note: Connect the LAN on every main shelf HDP to the number that corresponds
to the port shelf number minus 1.
__ 6. Route the cable above the cable hooks on the main shelf HDP to the
to manage the cable and continue to route the cable to the lower port
shelf.
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RJ-45
Connectors
for A-side
LANs
LAN
cable
150.13xx
(red) for
A-side
Main Shelf HDP - Side A
Port Shelf HDP - Side A
Note 1: This cabling is typically completed before shipping.
Note 2: NEBS and ETSI baffle installations are different.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-383
__ 7. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the port shelf HDP.
__ 8. Connect the other end of the LAN cable into the port labeled 1 on the
port shelf HDP/control and timing side-A. It has a black square to
identify the port. Refer to Figure 7.25, page 7-382.
Note: Connect the LAN on every port shelf to port 1" on the port HDP. Only
Port 1 has the correct cross-over.
Connecting the B-side LAN
for Port Shelf
__ 9. Obtain a (blue) LAN cable assembly, refer to Tables 7.10, page 7-381
and Table 7.11, page 7-381.
__ 10. On the B-side of the main shelf HDP, locate the control and timing
module for the B-side connections. Refer to Figure 7.26, page 7-384.
Page 7-384 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.26 LAN Cabling for Connecting B-side of 7100A-60 Main Shelf to 7100B-60 First Port Shelf (PS-2)
__ 11. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the connector labeled 1 on the
main shelf HDP/control and timing side-B. It has a black square to
identify the port.
to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the port shelf.
__ 13. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the port shelf HDP.
port shelf HDP/control and timing side-B. It has a black square to
identify the port. Refer to Figure 7.26, page 7-384.
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RJ-45
Connectors
for B-side
LANs
LAN
cable
150.12xx
(blue) for
B-side
Main Shelf HDP - Side B
Port Shelf HDP -
Side B
Note 1: This cabling is typically completed before shipping.
Note 2: NEBS and ETSI baffle installations are different.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-385
Note: Connect the LAN on every port shelf to port 1" on the port HDP. Only
Port 1 has the correct cross-over.
Go to Inter-shelf LAN Cabling for Port Shelves or HCSSs in Separate
Rack than Main Shelf, page 7-385.
Inter-shelf LAN Cabling for Port Shelves or HCSSs in Separate Rack than Main Shelf
7.67 For inter-bay port shelf cabling, use the cables in Table 7.12, page 7-385,
which are ordered to the specific length needed to reach between bays and
shelves:
Note: The maximum cable length for each connection from the main shelf to the
remote shelf is 100 meters.(328.1 feet).
Table 7.12 Port Shelf Cables
Rack-to-rack port shelf
cabling, side A
Side A, red
XX = length in inches
150.13XX
Side A, red
XX = length in feet
150.1600-XX
cabling, side B
Side B, blue
150.12XX
Side B, blue
XX = length in feet
150.1500-XX
Rack-to-rack HCSS
cabling, side A
A-side, red
xxxx = length in feet
250-0104-Fxxxx
Rack-to-rack HCSS
cabling, side B
B-side, blue
xxxx = length in feet
250-0103-Fxxxx
Page 7-386 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
7.68 Perform the following procedure to connect the LAN cables for Port
Shelves or HCSSs:
Note 1: Connect the LAN on every port shelf to port 1" on the port HDP. Connect
the LAN on every HCSS to port 1" on the HCSS PDP. Only Port 1 has
the correct cross-over.
Note 2: Connect the LAN on every main shelf HDP to the number that
corresponds to the port shelf number minus 1. For example, the main
shelf port 1 goes to Port shelf 2 port 1, the main shelf port 2 goes to port
shelf 3, port 1. Only Port 1 has the correct cross-over.
for Port Shelves or HCSSs
procedures.
__ 2. Obtain a (red) LAN cable assembly. Refer to Table 7.12, page 7-385.
__ 3. On the A-side of the main shelf HDP, locate the control and timing
module for the A-side connections. Refer to Figure 7.27, page 7-387
and Figure 7.28, page 7-388.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-387
Figure 7.27 LAN Cabling for Connecting A-Side of 7100A/C-60 Main Shelf to 83.07100B-60 HCSS
(This Example Shows HCSS as PS-4)
C
T
1
1 2
L T L T
front of rack
air baffle
Criti cal Major Minor
ACO
Lamp Test
Power Acti ve Enable Enabl e
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
HCSS PDP -
Side A
LAN cable (red)
250-0104-Fxxxx
On every main shelf HDP,
connect cable 250-0104-Fxxxx to
the number that corresponds to
the port shelf number minus 1.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A-side
Control and Timing
jacks located,
on side of PDP
MS-1
PS-2
PS-3
PS-4
Page 7-388 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.28 LAN Cabling for Connecting A-side of 7100A-60 Main Shelf to 7100B-60 Port Shelves 3 Through 13
(This Example Shows Port Shelf 3)
__ 4. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the connector labeled with the
number of the port shelf minus 1 on the main shelf HDP/control and
timing side A.
Note: Connect the LAN on every main shelf HDP to the number that corresponds
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RJ-45
Connectors
for A-side
LANs
LAN cable
150.1600-XX
(red) for
A-side
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
Port Shelf 3 HDP - Side A
On every port shelf, connect
cable 150.1600-XX to Port [1]
on the port shelf HDP, as
shown
connect cable 150.1600-XX to
Port Shelf #n in Rack #n
may be on top shelf or
lower shelf (shown)
position
Main Shelf in Rack 1
Note: NEBS and ETSI baffle
installations are different.
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-389
to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the next
sequential port shelf or HCSS.
__ 6. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the next sequential
82.07100B/D-60 port shelf HDP or 83.07100B-60 HCSS PDP.
__ 7.1 For HCSSConnect the other end of the LAN cable into
the port labeled 1 on the HCSS PDP/control and timing
side-A. Refer to Figure 7.27, page 7-387.
__ 7.2 For Port ShelfConnect the other end of the LAN cable
into the port labeled 1 on the port shelf HDP/control and
timing side-A. It has a black square to identify the port.
Note: Connect the LAN on every port shelf to port 1" on the port HDP. Connect
the LAN on every HCSS to port 1" on the HCSS PDP. Only Port 1 has the
correct cross-over.
for Port Shelves or HCSSs
__ 8. Obtain a (blue) LAN cable assembly. Refer to Table 7.12, page 7-385.
__ 9. On the B-side of the main shelf HDP, locate the control and timing
module for the B-side connections. Refer to Figure 7.29, page 7-390
and Figure 7.30, page 7-391.
Page 7-390 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 7.29 LAN Cabling for Connecting B-Side of 7100A/C-60 Main Shelf to 83.07100B-60 HCSS
(This Example Shows HCSS as PS-4)
front of rack
air baffle
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LAN cable (blue)
250-0103-Fxxxx
HCSS PDP -
Side B
connect cable 250-0103-Fxxxx
to the number that corresponds
ACO
ACO
Lamp Test
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
B-side
Control and Timing
jacks, located
on side of PDP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
C
T
2
1 2
L T L T
MS-1
PS-2
PS-3
PS-4
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-391
Figure 7.30 LAN Cabling for Connecting B-side of 7100A-60 Main Shelf to 7100B-60 Port Shelves 3 Through 13
(This Example Shows Port Shelf 3)
__ 10. Connect one end of the main shelf LAN cable to the connector labeled
with the number of the port shelf minus 1 on the main shelf
HDP/control and timing side B.
to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the next
sequential port shelf.
__ 12. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the next sequential
82.07100B/D-60 port shelf HDP or 83.07100B-60 HCSS PDP.
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 LAN cable
150.1500-XX
(blue) for
B-side
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
Main Shelf HDP - Side B
Port Shelf 3 HDP - Side B
On every port shelf, connect
cable 150.1500-XX to Port [1]
on the port shelf HDP, as
shown
Port Shelf #n in Rack #n
may be on top shelf or
lower shelf (shown)
position
Main Shelf in Rack 1
RJ-45
Connectors
for B-side
LANs
connect cable 150.1500-XX to
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-392 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 13.1 For HCSSConnect the other end of the LAN cable into
the port labeled 1 on the HCSS PDP/control and timing
side-B. Refer to Figure 7.29, page 7-390.
__ 13.2 For Port ShelfConnect the other end of the LAN cable
into the port labeled 1 on the port shelf HDP/control and
timing side-B. It has a black square to identify the port.
Go to Routing Cabling from First Main Shelf to Second Main Shelf,
page 7-392.
Routing Cabling from First Main Shelf to Second Main Shelf
7.69 Follow this procedure when running fiber cabling from the first main shelf
to the second main shelf (for Configuration #32, #42, or #46). Cabling the second
main shelf is similar to cabling a port shelf in another bay.
7.70 For inter-bay main shelf cabling, use the cables in Table 7.13, page 7-392,
which are ordered to the specific length needed to reach between bays and
shelves:
Note: Connect the LAN on the first main shelf HDP to port 2. Connect the LAN
on the second main shelf to port 1" on the main HDP. Only Port 1 has the
correct cross-over.
7.71 Perform the following steps to connect the LAN cables from the main shelf
to the secondary main shelf:
for Second Main Shelf
procedures.
Table 7.13 Main Shelf Cables
cabling, side A
Side A, red
150.13XX
Side A, red
XX = length in feet
1
1. The maximum cable length for each connection from the main shelf to the remote shelf is
100 meters.(328.1 feet).
150.1600-XX
cabling, side B
Side B, blue
150.12XX
Side B, blue
XX = length in feet
:
150.1500-XX
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-393
__ 2. Obtain a red LAN cable to connect the first main shelf and the second
main shelf A-side. Refer to Table 7.13, page 7-392.
__ 3. On the A-side of the first main shelf HDP, locate the control and timing
module for the A-side connections. Refer to Figure 7.31, page 7-394.
__ 4. Connect one end of the first main shelf LAN cable to the connector
labeled with port 12 on the first main shelf HDP/control and timing
side A.
__ 5. Route the cable above the cable hooks on the first main shelf HDP to
the left side of the rack. Use the fiber management spools as
necessary to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the
second main shelf.
__ 6. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the second main shelf HDP.
second main shelf HDP/control and timing side-A. It also has a black
square to identify the port.
Note: Connect the LAN from port 12 on the first main shelf HDP to port number
1 on the second main shelf. Only port 1 has the correct cross-over.
for Second Main Shelf
__ 8. Obtain a blue LAN cable to connect the first main shelf and the second
main shelf B-side. Refer to Table 7.13, page 7-392.
__ 9. On the B-side of the first main shelf HDP, locate the control and timing
module for the B-side connections. Refer to Figure 7.32, page 7-395.
__ 10. Connect one end of the first main shelf LAN cable to the connector
labeled with port 12 on the first main shelf HDP/control and timing
side B.
__ 11. Route the cable above the cable hooks on the first main shelf HDP to
the left side of the rack. Use the fiber management spools as
necessary to manage the cable, and continue to route the cable to the
second main shelf.
__ 12. Route the cable over the cable hooks on the second main shelf HDP.
second main shelf HDP/control and timing side-B. It also has a black
square to identify the port.
Warning:
Page 7-394 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Note: Connect the LAN from port 12 on the first main shelf HDP to port number
1 on the second main shelf. Only port 1 has the correct cross-over.
Figure 7.31 LAN Cabling for Connecting A-side of First Main Shelf to Second Main Shelf
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RJ-45
connectors for
A-side LANs
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
First Main Shelf HDP - Side A
Second Main Shelf HDP - Side A
On the second main shelf, connect
cable 150.1600-XX to Port [1] on the
second main shelf HDP, as shown
On the first main shelf HDP,
connect cable 150.1600-XX
to port 12.
Second Main Shelf
First Main Shelf
LAN cable
150.1600-XX
(red) for
A-side
ACO
Lamp Test
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-395
Figure 7.32 LAN Cabling for Connecting B-side of First Main Shelf to Second Main Shelf
Go to Connecting the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Power Cables to the Fuse
Panel, page 7-396.
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LAN cable
150.1500-XX
(blue) for
B-side
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
First Main Shelf HDP - Side B
Second Main Shelf HDP - Side B
On the second main shelf, connect
cable 150.1500-XX to Port [1] on the
second main shelf HDP, as shown
On the first main shelf
HDP, connect cable
150.1500-XX to
port 12.
Second Main Shelf
First Main Shelf
RJ-45
Connectors
for B-side
LANs
ACO
Lamp Test
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-396 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Connecting the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Power Cables to the Fuse Panel
7.72 The 1 RU Fuse Panel (Tellabs part number 81.71020FP5-5) provides front
panel access for power, power distribution, external alarm connections, and fault
indicators for the NIR, BAMP, or CRA modules. The Fuse Panel is typically
installed above the modules in a relay rack. It displays alarms for the modules
within the rack when a fault occurs. Refer to Figure 7.33, page 7-396.
Figure 7.33 Fuse Panel (Tellabs Part Number 81.71020FP5-5)
Power Cables to a NIR or
CRA
7.73 Each NIR and CRA run on -48 volts and draw 2.6 Amp minimum. Two
power cables are required for each NIR or CRA module. Use the Raman Power
Cable Kit (Tellabs part number 180.0823). Each Raman Power Cable Kit contains
one power cable. The power cable is 10-foot, contains a DB-15 connector on one
end, and is open-ended on the other end. During installation, cut the cable to
length. Terminate the cable directly to the Fuse Panel # 6-32 panhead
compression/wire-binding terminals or use a Spade lug #16-22 AWG for a #6-8
Terminal Stud (Tellabs part number 52.6077) suitable for #18 AWG wire for
connection at the fuse panel.
Power Cables to a BAMP 7.74 Each BAMP runs on -48 volts and draw 2.6 Amp minimum. Two power
cables are required for each BAMP module. Use the BAMP Power Cable Kit
(Tellabs part number 180.0934). Each BAMP Power Cable Kit contains one power
cable. The power cable is 10-foot, contains a 3 position DSUB connector on one
end, and is open-ended on the other end. During installation, cut the cable to
length. Terminate the cable directly to the Fuse Panel # 6-32 panhead
compression/wire-binding terminals or use a Ring Lug #14 - 16 AWG for a #4 - 6
Terminal Stud (Tellabs part number 52.6073) suitable for #16 AWG wire for
connection at the fuse panel.
7.75 3.0 Amp fuses (Tellabs part number 60.0273) are recommended when
connecting the NIR, CRA, or BAMP to the Fuse Panel (Tellabs part number
82.71020FP5-5). Verify that Dummy Fuses (Tellabs part number 63.0129) are
installed in any unused fuse holders. The Fuse Panel is shipped with Dummy
Fuses in all fuse holders.
7.76 The Fuse Panel LEDs show power (green) or loss of power (red) to the
PDU.
Available Fuse Panel Fuses 7.77 Available fuses for the Fuse Panel are shown in Table 7.14, page 7-396.
Table 7.14 Fuse Panel Fuses
Tellabs Part Number Amperage
63.0129 Fuse Dummy Alarm Indicating
60.0273 Fuse 3.0 A Alarm Indicating (recommended)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-397
NIR/CRA Power Cable Pin
Out
7.78 The NIR and the CRA use the same power cables (Tellabs part number
180.0823). Table 7.15, page 7-397 shows the power cable pin outs.
BAMP Power Cable Pin Out 7.79 Table 7.16, page 7-397 shows the BAMP power cable (Tellabs part
number 180.0934) pin outs.
Note: The NIR, CRA, and BAMP modules are referred to as the module in this
procedure.
Table 7.15 NIR and CRA DB-15 Power Cable Pin Out
Pin Color
1 black -48 RTN
2 black -48 RTN
3 not connected
4 not connected
5 red -48V
6 red -48V
7 not connected
8 not connected
9 not connected
10 not connected
11 yellow/green shield ground
12 yellow/green shield ground
13 not connected
14 not connected
15 not connected
Table 7.16 BAMP Power Cable Pin Out
Pin Color
1 red -48V
2 not connected
3 black -48 RTN
Page 7-398 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Materials 7.82 The following materials are required to perform this procedure per device:
__ twoNIR Raman Power Cable Kits (Tellabs part number 180.0823)
__ (optional) fourSpade lug #16-22 AWG for a #6-8 Terminal Stud
(Tellabs part number 52.6077) per device suitable for 18 AWG
cable
or
__ twoCRA Raman Power Cable Kits (Tellabs part number 180.0823)
__ (optional) fourSpade lug #16-22 AWG for a #6-8 Terminal Stud
(Tellabs part number 52.6077) per device suitable for 18 AWG
cable
or
__ twoBAMP Power Cable Kits (Tellabs part number 250-0109)
__ (optional) fourRing lug #14 - 16 AWG for a #4 - 6 Terminal Stud
(Tellabs part number 52.6073) per device suitable for #16 AWG
cable
7.83 After the module is installed in the rack, the power cables are connected
to the Fuse Panel or a customer supplied power source. Perform the following
procedure to connect the modules two power cables to the Fuse Panel:
__ 1. Throughout this procedure follow your company procedures for
connecting power.
__ 2. Verify that the Fuse Panel has two available power connections
(terminal posts). Each module requires two power connections, A-side
and B-side.
Power A Cable __ 3. Obtain a power cable for the module.
__ 4. Optionally crimp a lug to each open end of the cable.
__ 5. Connect the power cable to the Power A connector.
__ 6. Route the power cable to the rear of the rack and up to the Fuse Panel.
__ 7. Lace the power cable to the rack as you go.
__ 8. Label the Power A cable. Follow company policy when labeling power
cables.
__ 9. Attach the red and black ends of the cable to the Fuse Panel. Refer to
Table 7.17, page 7-399.
Power B Cable __ 10. Obtain a power cable for the module.
__ 11. Optionally crimp a lug to each open end of the cable.
__ 12. Connect the power cable to the Power B connector.
__ 13. Route the power cable to the rear of the rack and up to the Fuse Panel.
__ 14. Lace the power cable to the rack as you go.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-399
__ 15. Label the Power B cable. Follow company policy when labeling power
cables.
__ 16. Attach the red and black ends of the cable to the Fuse Panel. Refer to
Table 7.17, page 7-399.
__ 17. Select one of the following substeps:
__ 17.1 Repeat this procedure to add power cables for another
module.
__ 17.2 Go to Connecting the Fuse Panel to the BDFB,
page 7-400.
Table 7.17 Power Connections from Fuse Panel to BDFB
Fuse Panel
A Side Return
Fuse Panel
A Side
Battery
Fuse Panel
B Side
Battery
Fuse Panel
B Side Return
module 1 terminal post 1
Page 7-400 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Connecting the Fuse Panel to the BDFB
__ wire stripper
__ cutter
__ lug crimper (Burndy Y8MRB-1)
__ heat gun
__ #8-10 2-hole lugs with 5/8-inch spacing
__ clear heat shrink wrap (Tellabs part number 46.0136)
7.87 Perform the following procedure to connect the shelf power cables from
the Fuse Panel to the BDFB. Throughout this procedure refer to Table 7.17,
Figure 7.34 Fuse Panel
Note: If the power cable runs are engineered for cable larger than a 6 AWG,
H-taps are used to transition from the larger AWG cable down to
#10-#6 AWG to terminate the cables at both the Tellabs 7100N PDU and
the customers' power source. Refer to Guidelines for Using an H-tap for
Shelves, page 7-335.
__ 1. Perform the following substeps for the Battery and Return cables from
the Fuse Panel to the BDFB:
__ 1.1 Determine the correct cable length from the PDU to the
BDFB.
__ 1.2 Label each cable. Follow company policy when labeling
cables.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-401
__ 1.3 Cut the cable to the correct length allowing for lug
attachment and bend radius.
__ 1.4 Strip the ends of the cable.
__ 1.5 Attach a #8-10 2-hole lug with 5/8-inch spacing and
clear heat shrink tubing at the fuse panel end of the
cable (grey) for -48 Vdc and -48 RTN. Ensure that the
stripped wire can be viewed through each lug window.
__ 1.6 Crimp each lug to each wire.
__ 1.7 Heat the clear shrink tubing over the end of the lug and
the end of the cable with a heat gun.
__ 1.8 Use a 5/16-inch nut driver to attach the -48 Vdc wire to
the fuse panel.
__ 1.9 Use a 5/16-inch nut driver to attach the -48 RTN wire to
the fuse panel.
__ 1.10 Attach the appropriate lug on the -48 Vdc and -48 RTN
at the BDFB.
__ 1.11 Crimp each lug to each wire.
__ 1.12 Heat the clear shrink tubing over the end of the lug and
the end of the cable with a heat gun.
__ 1.13 Use a 5/16-inch nut driver to attach the -48 Vdc wire to
the BDFB.
__ 1.14 Use a 5/16-inch nut driver to attach the -48 RTN wire to
the BDFB.
__ 1.15 Repeat steps 1, page 7-400 through substep 1.14,
page 7-401 for the B Feed.
Go to Wiring the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Maintenance Port to the AIP,
page 7-401
Wiring the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Maintenance Port to the AIP
7.88 This section contains the procedures required to connect the Maintenance
Port on the NIR, CRA, or BAMP modules to the Tellabs 7100 OTS AIP. You can
establish a control path and alarm monitoring connection between the Tellabs
7100 OTS Main Shelf and each NIR or CRA Maintenance port. This connection
requires a 6-wire cable with a DB-25 connector (Tellabs part number 180.0824)
which is connected to the NIR or CRA Maintenance port and terminated at the
Tellabs 7100 OTS AIP Wire-Wrap Panel. The wire-wrap panel is connected to the
Tellabs 7100/7100N OTS Main Shelf Alarms IN port and Alarms OUT port.
Note: For more information on the NIR, CRA, or BAMP modules, refer to the
individual module practices.
Page 7-402 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ one Raman Maintenance Cable Kit (Tellabs part number 180.0824),
order one kit per module.
7.92 Perform the following procedure to connect the Raman Maintenance
Cable from a NIR or CRA to the Tellabs 7100 OTS AIP:
__ 2. Install the Raman Maintenance Cable (Tellabs part number 180.0824)
into the NIR, CRA, or BAMP Maintenance port connector.
__ 3. Route the Raman Maintenance Cable to the AIP of the main shelf.
__ 4. Lace the cable as you go.
__ 5. Using an indelible marker, label the ends of the cable.
__ 6. Wire-wrap the Raman Maintenance Cable to the Tellabs 7100 OTS
AIP wire-wrap panel. Refer to Table 7.18, page 7-402 through 7.23,
__ 7. Repeat this procedure to connect another module to the AIP wire-wrap
panel.
Table 7.18 Maintenance Port Connections
Maintenance Port
Maintenance Cable Pin
Wire Color
(Tellabs Part Number
180.0824) AIP AIP Signal
Shutdown Contact Alarms Out
Pin 2 Manual Shutdown and Restart WHITE/BLUE Pin 31 EXT1_NO
Pin 14 Common Ground BLUE/WHITE Pin 33 EXT1_COM
Fault Alarm Alarms In
Pin 10 Warning Alarm WHITE/ORANGE Pin 2 ENV_1
Pin 25 Common Ground GREEN/WHITE Pin 1 ENV1_RET
Warning Alarm Alarms In
Pin 9 Warning Alarm WHITE/GREEN Pin 4 ENV_2
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-403
Table 7.19 Degree A Maintenance Port Connections
Maintenance Port - Degree A
Wire Color
Pin 2 Manual Shutdown and Restart WHITE/BLUE 31 EXT1_NO
Pin 14 Common Ground BLUE/WHITE 33 EXT1_COM
Pin 10 Fault Alarm WHITE/ORANGE Pin 2 ENV_1
Pin 9 Warning Alarm WHITE/GREEN This alarm not supported when
three or external amplifiers are
installed.
Pin 25 Common Ground GREEN/WHITE
Table 7.20 Degree B Maintenance Port Connections
Maintenance Port - Degree B
Wire Color
Pin 2 Manual Shutdown and Restart WHITE/BLUE 37 EXT2_NO
Pin 14 Common Ground BLUE/WHITE 39 EXT2_COM
installed.
Page 7-404 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Table 7.21 Degree C Maintenance Port Connections
Maintenance Port - Degree C
Wire Color
installed.
Table 7.22 Degree D Maintenance Port Connections
Maintenance Port - Degree D
Wire Color
installed.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-405
Figure 7.35 AIP Wire Wrap Panel
Table 7.23 Connector Pin Out
1 48VRET - ENV1_RET
2 I ENV_1
3 48VRET - ENV2_RET
4 I ENV_2
5 48VRET - ENV3_RET
6 I ENV_3
7 48VRET - ENV4_RET
8 I ENV_4
9 48VRET - ACO_REM_RET
10 I ACO_REM
11
12
13 O Telemetry_Critical_Alarm_NO
14 O Visible_Critical_Alarm_NO
15 O Telemetry_Critical_Alarm_COM
16 O Visible_Critical_Alarm_COM
Alarm Connections to Central Office
Alarm System (wire wrap pins)
AIP Connection
to HDP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
56-pin Edge Connector Location on the AIP
Power
Connections
Power
Connections
Page 7-406 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
17 O Telemetry_Critical_Alarm_NC
18 O Visible_Critical_Alarm_NC
19 O Telemetry_Major_Alarm_NO
21 O Telemetry_Major_Alarm_COM
23 O Telemetry_Major_Alarm_NC
25 O Telemetry_Minor_Alarm_NO
27 O Telemetry_Minor_Alarm_COM
29 O Telemetry_Minor_Alarm_NC
31 O EXT1_NO
32 O Audible_Critical_Alarm_NO
33 O EXT1_COM
34 O Audible_Critical_Alarm_COM
35 O EXT1_NC
36 O Audible_Critical_Alarm_NC
37 O EXT2_NO
38 O Audible_Major_Alarm_NO
39 O EXT2_COM
40 O Audible_Major_Alarm_COM
41 O EXT2_NC
42 O Audible_Major_Alarm_NC
43 O EXT3_NO
44 O Audible_Minor_Alarm_NO
45 O EXT3_COM
46 O Audible_Minor_Alarm_COM
47 O EXT3_NC
48 O Audible_Minor_Alarm_NC
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-407
49 O EXT4_NO
50
51 O EXT4_COM
52
53 O EXT4_NC
54
55
56
8. Installing Optical Cabling Installation
Page 7-408 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
8. Installing Optical Cabling
8.01 This section contains the following topics:
Requirements and Safety Information, page 7-408
Cable Connector Types, page 7-410
Cabling Methodology, page 7-412
Routing Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and Cross-Connects,
page 7-439
Routing Cables From the Customer Termination to the Transponder
Modules, page 7-442
Routing Pass-through Cables Between Two Peer Transponder
Modules, page 7-447
Routing Optical Cables for Optional External Amplifiers (NIR, CRA,
BAMP), page 7-449
Routing OMD88 Patch Panel Cables for Directionless Add/Drop
Terminals, page 7-455
Installing Customer Terminal Cabling, page 7-462
Applying Identification Labels, page 7-464
Requirements and Safety Information
8.02 Follow all applicable bend radius constraints for every optical cable
installation. Before starting any procedures, review the constraints by referring to
Bend Radius Constraints, page 7-409 for more information.
8.03 Prevent personal injury or equipment damage by consistently adhering to
all applicable electrostatic discharge (ESD), equipment handling, and power
precautions. Refer to Tools, page 7-409 and Precautions, page 7-409.
8.04 Inspect all optical cables and optical connectors for signs of physical
damage before installing the optical cables. Refer to Precautions, page 7-409.
Engineering.
Note 2: While the Installer may place the optic fiber cables, all fiber terminations
should be completed by qualified technicians authorized to perform
system testing procedures.
Installation 8. Installing Optical Cabling
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-409
Tools
8.05 The following tools are required to all procedures that require handling
system modules and other electronic equipment:
__ an antistatic wrist strap or static-dissipating floor mat
Precautions
8.06 Follow these steps to install fiber optic cables for all procedures:
__ 1. Inspect all optical cables and optical connectors for signs of physical
damage before installing the optical cables.
Note: Immediately report cable damage following all applicable company
procedures.
__ 2. Ensure that all optical connector dust covers are securely in place.
__ 3. Label cables as required by company mandates. Refer to Applying
Identification Labels, page 7-464.
strap jack located on the front of either air baffle. Alternately, use an
Bend Radius Constraints
8.07 The bend radius of a fiber cable at either cable termination is measured as
illustrated in Figure 8.1, page 7-410. The cable manufacturer allows a one inch
(25.40 mm) minimum bend radius after installation; however, a bend radius of as
little as 0.63 inches (16.00 mm) is allowed during the installation process on all
cables that are not already carrying traffic.
8.08 All fiber that is terminated on a Tellabs 7100 OTS shelf must be a 2.0 mm
jacketed fiber cable assembly. After installation, the bend radius should be as large
as possible. Tellabs 7100 equipment configurations typically provide for a bend
radius of 1.5 inches (38 mm).
Warning:
Page 7-410 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 8.1 Minimum Bend Radius Measurement
8.09 The exception to the typical 1.5 inch bend radius are the Raman
equipment E-2000 cables. The following precautions must be met when using the
E-2000 cables:
Cable routing must be as direct as possible with as few bends as
possible.
The cable bends must be made and maintained with a bend radius
2 inches or greater.
The both ends of the fiber connectors must be as clean as possible.
Cable Connector Types
8.10 For an illustration of the types of fiber optic cables used in the installation
procedures contained in this manual, refer to Figure 8.2, page 7-411.
1.5 inch
radius = 1 inch 2mm jacketed fiber
cable assembly
Warning:
Long vertical cable runs cause considerable stress on the cable and may result
in fiber breakage. To prevent cable damage, support the cable at regular
intervals along the run in accordance with the recommendations supplied by the
cable manufacturer.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-411
Figure 8.2 Tellabs 7100 OTS Cable Connectors
SFP/XFP Cable Connector Types
8.11 Some of the transponder modules use Small Form Pluggable (SFP)
modules and 10G Small Form Pluggable (XFP) modules to connect to customer
facilities. Figure 8.3, page 7-412 shows the connectors for the different types of
SFP/XFP modules.
Note: Connectors on the modules that use SFPs or XFPs are OUT on the LEFT,
and IN on the RIGHT, which is opposite from the typical Tellabs 7100
module without SFP or XFP connectors. Refer to Figure 8.3, page 7-412.
MPO-APC
Dual Simplex SC/APC
Duplex LC/UPC
Simplex SC/UPC
Page 7-412 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 8.3 SFP and XFP Connectors
Cabling Methodology
8.12 Cabling can be routed to the Tellabs 7100 OTS from the overhead cable
trough or from the sub flooring fiber duct, or both, depending upon the local cable
requirements. Figure 8.4, page 7-413 shows this cabling methodology for both an
overhead rack environment and a sub-floor environment. Note that the power is run
vertically at the farthest point from the rack, while the fiber cable is run closest to
the rack.
Line
In
SMTM-X
Static
Sensitive
Eject
(green)
Fault
Power
(red)
Active
C
L
E
I C
O
D
E
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
C
O
D
E
REV CODE
MFG DATE
Sync
Line
Out
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
SFP/XFP Orientation
1
1. The SFP/XFP latches from LEFT to RIGHT.
Connector Fiber Mode Description
Port 1 In/Out
or
Ports 1 to 14
In/Out
single mode
fiber
Dual LC/UPC
multimode fiber Dual LC/PC
Ethernet RJ-45
Line In/Out single mode
fiber
Duplex SC/APC
Line In/Out
2
2. The Line Out connector is not used on the SMTM-UniD module.
single mode
fiber
Duplex LC/UPC
IN
(RX)
OUT
(TX)
P
O
R
T
#
Out
In
C
L
E
I C
O
D
E
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
C
O
D
E
Sync
Fault
Power
OK to Pull
Active
(green)
(red)
TGTM-E
OUT
P
O
R
T
In
In
Line
O
u
t
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-413
Figure 8.4 Overhead Fiber Trough and Sub Flooring Fiber Duct Cabling Methodologies
Go to Transmit (Out) and Receive (In) Methodology, page 7-414.
pylons cement floor
fiber
sub flooring fiber duct
overhead fiber
troughs
fiber
raised computer
floor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
LOAM RCMM LIAM TGTM TGTMTGTM TGTMTGTM OPSM SPM LIAM SPM RCMM TGTM TGTMTGTM LOAM
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
power
power
Page 7-414 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Transmit (Out) and Receive (In) Methodology
8.13 When interconnecting transmit (Out) and receive (In) ports from one
module on one rack (Rack-A) to the transmit and receive ports on the module of
another rack (Rack-B), each of the ports must cross over. In other words, the two
transmit ports must not be connected to each other and the two receive ports must
not be connected to each other.
8.14 The OUT (Tx) port on Rack-A must connect to the IN (Rx) port on Rack-B
and the IN (Rx) port on Rack-A must connect to the OUT (Tx) port on Rack-B. Refer
Figure 8.5 Transport/Tx and Receive/Rx Crossover Methodology
Go to Guidelines for Routing Cables, page 7-414.
Guidelines for Routing Cables
8.15 The following guidelines are intended to aid in measuring fiber optical
cables that are used in the system. Route cables either to the front or the rear of
the spacer panel, as follows:
Slots 1 through 8 to the LEFT: Route cables to and from modules
located in slots 1 through 8 through the fiber guides in the fiber trough
under each shelf to the left side of the rack and up the left spacer
panel.
Slots 9 through 19 to the RIGHT: Route cables to and from modules
located in slots 9 through 19 through the fiber guides in the fiber trough
under each shelf to the right side of the rack and up the right side
spacer panel.
Route facility cables to BACK: All facility cabling should be routed to
the back of the rack and routed through the holes in the rack spacer.
Route patch panel/DCM cables to FRONT: All patch panel and DCM
cabling should be routed on the front of the rack spacer.
Fiber Trough and Fiber
Guides
8.16 The first area of fiber management is the fiber trough and fiber guides that
are located at the bottom of every shelf in the system. Refer to Figure 8.6,
page 7-415.
Rack-B Rack-A
Out (Tx)
In (Rx)
Out (Tx)
In (Rx)
system
module
- minimum signal loss
- most efficient
crossover methodology:
transmit/OUT and receive/IN
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-415
Figure 8.6 Tellabs 7100 Fiber Trough and Fiber Guides
8.17 In most installations that require a Relay Rack Spacer (RRS) installation
scenario, vertical relay rack spacers with fiber management spools are installed
along both sides of the relay rack, providing additional fiber management support.
Note: Intra-rack, intra-system and customer termination fiber cables are run to
both the left and right of the Tellabs 7100 OTS shelves as follows: for slots
1 to 8, the fiber cables are run down the left side of the rack; and, for slots
9 to 16, the fiber cables are run down the right side of the rack.
In addition, cables that connect to any type of Tellabs 7100 OTS patch
panels or the DCM chassis are run vertically through the front of the 6-inch
spacer panel.
Facility cables that connect between Tellabs 7100 OTS modules and the
customer termination panel (LGX) are run vertically through the rear of the
6-inch spacer panel.
Cable Routing Examples
8.18 The following cabling routing examples are available:
Routing Cables from Transponders in Port Shelves to 2RU HD PPPs,
page 7-417
Routing Cables from Transponders in HCSSs to 3RU High Density
Port Shelf Patch Panels (88CHPPs), page 7-418
Routing Cables for Directionless Add/Drop Terminal Configuration
(OMD88), page 7-419
Routing Cables from 82-Issue OPSM to 2RU HD PPP, page 7-420
Routing Cables from 81-Issue OPSM to OPSM Patch Panel,
page 7-422
Routing Cables from Transponder to Y-Cable Patch Panel,
page 7-423
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
Modules
Fiber Cables Slots 18 routed to left side RRS
cables exiting the Tellabs system port shelf
Fiber Cables Slots 916 routed to right side RRS
cables exiting the Tellabs system port shelf
Page 7-416 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Y-Cable Assembly from Transponder to Facility Patch Panel,
page 7-424
Routing Cables from RCMM PP to Transponder in Another Rack,
page 7-425
Routing Cables from Transponders in Main Shelf to HD PPP,
page 7-429
Routing Cables from RCMMs to the DCM Shelf, page 7-430
Routing Cables from OADM88 to DCMs, page 7-431
Routing Cables from RCMM PP to RCMM PP in Another Rack,
page 7-432
Routing Cables from LGX Panel to Transponders, page 7-433
Routing Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to RCMM-8D88s,
page 7-435
Routing Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to OADM88-xR Modules,
page 7-436
8.19 Also refer to Routing 2 mm and 3 mm Jacketed Fiber Cables in Fiber
Troughs, page 7-438.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-417
Routing Cables from Transponders in Port Shelves to 2RU HD PPPs
8.20 Figure 8.7, page 7-417 illustrates how to route the cable from the
transponder to the 2RU high density port shelf patch panel (HD PPP) when the
module is in a port shelf in the same rack in which the patch panel is located.
Figure 8.7 Routing Fiber Cable from Transponders in Port Shelves to HD PPP (Front View)
fiber trough
fiber cable from transponder
to patch panel
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
fiber spools are not used
for routing cables from
transponders to the patch
panel
HD PPP
port shelf 3
port shelf 4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-418 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cables from Transponders in HCSSs to 3RU High Density Port Shelf Patch
Panels (88CHPPs)
8.21 Figure 8.8, page 7-418 illustrates how to route the cable from the
transponder to the 3RU high density port shelf patch panel (88CHPP) when the
module is in an HCSS in the same rack in which the patch panel is located.
Figure 8.8 Routing Fiber Cable from Transponders in HCSSs to 88CHPPs (Front View)
air baffle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
air baffle
fiber cable from transponder to patch panel
fiber spools are not used
for routing cables from
transponders to the patch
panel
88CHPP
(3RU HD PPP)
fiber ducts fiber ducts
10-inch
spacer
10-inch
spacer
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-419
Routing Cables for Directionless Add/Drop Terminal Configuration (OMD88)
Note: Cable colors in this graphic are used to show the cable routing.
8.22 Figure 8.28, page 7-458 shows how to route the cables from the OMD88
patch panel to configure a Directionless Add/Drop Terminal.
8.23 This example shows Degree D as the Directionless Add/Drop Terminal.
Figure 8.9 Routing Fiber Cable to the OMD88 Patch Panel
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
D
X

R
C
M
M
8
8
C
H
P
P
(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
D
C
M
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
OMD88
duct with cover
L
O
A
M
-
E
8
8
BFAP
D
W
D
M

I
n
D
W
D
M

O
u
t
D
X

O
u
t
D
X

I
n
DWDM Out
D
W
D
M

I
n
RX
DWDM Out
DWDM In
TX
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
8
8
C
H
P
P
(
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
)
Page 7-420 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cables from 82-Issue OPSM to 2RU HD PPP
8.24 Figure 8.10, page 7-420 shows how to route the cable from 82-Issue
OPSM modules that are located in different racks to the 2RU high-density port shelf
patch panel (HD PPP). Figure 8.10, page 7-420 shows the front of the system and
Figure 8.11, page 7-421 shows routing cables to the rear of the system.
Figure 8.10 Routing Fiber Cable from OPSM Module to HD PPP (Front View)
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
route the fiber cable
from the fiber trough
through the cutout in
the spacer panel to
the rear
= fiber cable from transponder to patch panel
Key
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-421
8.25 To route the fiber cable from the OPSM, pass the fiber cable through the
lowest keyhole in the spacer panel from the front to the rear of the system. Route
the fiber cable up through the patch panel fiber trough fingers and connect the fiber
cable to the rear of the high-density port shelf patch panel (HD PPP). Refer to
Figure 8.11 Routing Fiber Cable from OPSM Module to HD PPP (Rear View)
facility
working
protection
4 3 2 1
facility
working
protection
1 2 3 4
route the fiber cable
from the fiber trough
the spacer panel to
the rear
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
OPSM 1
OPSM 2
Page 7-422 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cables from 81-Issue OPSM to OPSM Patch Panel
8.26 Figure 8.12, page 7-422 illustrates how to route the cables from the
TGTM-E modules to the OPSM patch panel.
Figure 8.12 Routing Fiber Cable from OPSM Module to OPSM Patch Panel (Front View)
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
P
o
r
t

S
h
e
l
f

P
P
4 x 4 horizontal fiber duct
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
D
C
M
-
A

D
C
M
-
C
O
P
S
M

P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
P
o
r
t

S
h
e
l
f

P
P
The facility port from
the OPSM patch
panel is jumpered to
the port shelf patch
panel for connection
to the customers
facility. As an
alternative, the
facility port can be
directly connected to
the customers
facility.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-423
Routing Cables from Transponder to Y-Cable Patch Panel
8.27 Figure 8.13, page 7-423 illustrates how to route the cables from the
transponder modules (FGTM, FGTM-M, TGTM-E, OTNM-D, and HDTG) to the
Y-Cable patch panel.
Figure 8.13 Routing Fiber Cable from TGTM-E Module to Y-Cable Patch Panel (Front View)
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
P
o
r
t

S
h
e
l
f

P
P
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
D
C
M
-
A

D
C
M
-
C
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
P
o
r
t

S
h
e
l
f

P
P
The facility port from
the Y-cable patch
panel is jumpered to
the port shelf patch
panel for connection
to the customers
facility. As an
alternative, the
facility port can be
directly connected to
the customers
facility.
Page 7-424 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Y-Cable Assembly from Transponder to Facility Patch Panel
8.28 Figure 8.14, page 7-424 illustrates how to route the Y-Cable assembly
from the transponder modules (FGTM, FGTM-M, TGTM-E, OTNM-D, and HDTG)
to the facility patch panel.
Figure 8.14 Routing Y-Cable Assembly from TGTM-E Module to Facility Patch Panel (Front View)
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
P
a
t
c
h

P
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
P
a
t
c
h

P
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
route the Y-Cable
assembly fibers from
the transponders to
the fiber troughs,
down to the
horizontal fiber duct,
then route the
remaining two fibers
the spacer panel to
the rear and then to
the facility fiber panel
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
D
C
M
-
A

D
C
M
-
C
O
P
S
M

P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e

P
P
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-425
Routing Cables from RCMM PP to Transponder in Another Rack
8.29 To route the fiber cable from the RCMM patch panel (PP) to a transponder
in another rack, route the fiber cable through the fiber trough associated with the
RCMM PP in the first rack. Route the fiber cable up through the overhead fiber
management system and drop the fiber cable to the rear of the spacer panel.
8.30 Refer to Figure 8.15, page 7-425 which illustrates routing cables to the
other rack. Figure 8.16, page 7-426 illustrates routing cables to the rear of the
system, with the option to use the fiber spools from the rear cover panel kit. Figure
8.17, page 7-427 illustrates passing the cabling to the front of the rack to connect
to the transponder.
8.31 Figure 8.17, page 7-427 shows cable routing using horizontal and vertical
fiber ducts.
Figure 8.15 Routing Fiber Cable from RCMM Patch Panel to Transponders in the Another Rack (Front View1)
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RCMM LIAM-E BFM SPM LIAM-E SPM RCMM LOAM-E RCMM RCMM LOAM-E LOAM-E LIAM-E LIAM-E LOAM-E
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
route fiber cables to rear of spacer panel
main shelf 1
(MS-1)
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
port shelf 3
(PS-4)
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
D
C
M
-
A

D
C
M
-
C
O
P
S
M

P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e

P
P
Page 7-426 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 8.16 Routing Fiber Cable from RCMM Patch Panel to Transponders in Another Rack (Rear View2)
port shelf 4
port shelf 3
route fiber cables
through keyhole
in spacer panel
cables from
RCMM patch
panel in
another rack
inside of spacer
routing cables using
optional fiber spool
from rear cover
panel assemblies
fiber spool
cutout
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-427
Figure 8.17 Routing Fiber Cable from RCMM Patch Panel to Transponders in the Another Rack (Front View3)
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
route fiber cables
through cutout in
spacer panel to
RCMM patch
panel
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
port shelf 3
(PS-4)
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
Page 7-428 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 8.18 Routing Fiber Cable from RCMM Patch Panel to Transponders in the Another Rack Using Fiber Ducts
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
A

D
C
M
-
C
O
P
S
M

P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e

P
P
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
route fiber cables down the vertical fiber ducts into the horizontal
fiber duct then over to the transponder
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
2

x

2

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
D
C
M
-
A

D
C
M
-
C
O
P
S
M

P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
D
C
M
-
B
D
C
M
-
D
Y
-
C
a
b
l
e

P
P
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
ACO
LampTest
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
port shelf 1
(PS-2)
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
port shelf 3
(PS-4)
port shelf 2
(PS-3)
main shelf 1
(MS-1)
4

x

4

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
2

x

2

v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

f
i
b
e
r

d
u
c
t
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-429
Routing Cables from Transponders in Main Shelf to HD PPP
8.32 For a SBOADM configured with transponders in the main shelf
(Configurations # 40 and # 44
1
), route the cabling from a transponder to the right
side high-density port patch panel (HD PPP). Use the fiber spools to guide the
cabling. Refer to Figure 8.19, page 7-429.
Figure 8.19 Routing Fiber Cable from Transponders In Main Shelf to HD PPP (Front View)
1.
The configuration numbers in this section correspond to the configurations that are described
in the ED-NE command section of the TL1 Command Reference Manual.
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
p
o
r
t

s
h
e
l
f

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-430 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cables from RCMMs to the DCM Shelf
8.33 Route cabling from the RCMMs to the fiber spool directly above the DCM
shelf. Use the fiber spool to support the cabling, then route the cables down
through the fiber trough in the DCM shelf to the appropriate DCM module. Refer to
Figure 8.20 Cabling the RCMMs to the DCM Modules
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
D
C
M
D
C
M
D
C
M
D
C
M
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-431
Routing Cables from OADM88 to DCMs
8.34 The 88 Channel Optical Add/Drop Module (OADM88) is a 2-slot module
that integrates an input amplifier, an output amplifier, the interleaver function, and
a wave-length selective switch. The OADM88-IR supports medium spans (0 to 18
dB) and the OADM88-LR supports long spans (14 to 26 dB). Up to 3 OADM88s
can be interconnected to support up to 3 degrees.
8.35 TheOADM88 input amplifiers are equipped with DCM In/Out connectors
on the front panel.
8.36 The DCM In/Out connector is in series with the input to the amplifier to
place the DCM in an external configuration to the amplifier.
8.37 The OADM88s are also equipped with optional RJ-45 LAN cable
connections for connecting between the OADM88 DCM COMM connectors and
the 82 issue DCM COMM connectors. These COMM connections allow the NE to
auto-discover the DCMs and to include them in the database equipment inventory.
8.38 DCM to the OADM88 cables:
__ 155.03xx, duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex SC/UPC cable
assembly where xx indicates cable length from 16 to 216 inches
in 4 inch increments [40 cm to 550 cm in 10 cm increments]
__ 255-0030-Cxxxx. dual simplex LC/UPC to dual simplex SC/UPC
cable assembly where xxxx indicates cable length from 40 cm to
550 cm in 10 cm increments
__ Cat 5E Ethernet LAN cable with RJ-45 connectors on each end
(shown in green).
Figure 8.21 OADM88 DCM Optical and LAN Cabling
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OADM88 BFM SPM
C-side DCM
A-side DCM
B-side DCM
BFM BFM OADM88 BFM SPM BFM OADM88 BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM
Page 7-432 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cables from RCMM PP to RCMM PP in Another Rack
8.39 To route the fiber cable from the RCMM patch panel (PP) to another
RCMM patch panel (PP) in another rack, route the fiber cable through the fiber
trough associated with the RCMM patch panel in the first rack. Route the fiber
cable up through the overhead fiber management system and drop the fiber cable
to the front of the spacer panel. This connects the first main shelf (MS-1) to the
second main shelf (MS-15) in an 8-degree SBOADM. Refer to Figure 8.22,
page 7-432.
Figure 8.22 Routing Fiber Cables from RCMM Patch Panel to RCMM PP in the Another Rack (Front View)
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RCMM LIAM-E BFM SPM LIAM-E SPM RCMMLOAM-E RCMM RCMM LOAM-E LOAM-E LIAM-E LIAM-E LOAM-E
R
C
M
M
-
A
R
C
M
M
-
C
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
B
R
C
M
M
-
D
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
RCMM LIAM-E BFM SPM LIAM-E SPM RCMMLOAM-E RCMM RCMM LOAM-E LOAM-E LIAM-E LIAM-E LOAM-E
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
route fiber cables to front
of spacer panel
main shelf 1
port shelf 2 port shelf 4
main shelf 15
R
C
M
M
-
E
R
C
M
M
-
G
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M
-
F
R
C
M
M
-
H
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-433
Routing Cables from LGX Panel to Transponders
8.40 To route the fiber cable from the telco LGX panel to a transponder, route
the fiber cable through the fiber trough associated with the transponder. Route the
fiber cable down through the overhead fiber management system and drop the
fiber cable to the rear of the spacer panel.
8.41 Figure 8.23, page 7-433 shows routing cables rear of the system with the
option to use the fiber spools from the rear cover panel kit. Figure 8.24, page 7-434
shows passing the cabling to the front of the rack to connect to the transponder.
Figure 8.23 Routing Fiber Cable from LGX Panel to Transponders (Rear View - 1)
port shelf
main shelf or
port shelf
route fiber cables
through keyhole
in spacer panel
cables from
RCMM patch
panel in
another rack
inside of spacer
routing cables using
optional fiber spool
from rear cover
panel assemblies
fiber spool
cutout
Page 7-434 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 8.24 Routing Fiber Cable from LGX Panel to Transponders (Front View - 2)
H
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
hH
D

P
P
P
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
Critical MajorMinor
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
route fiber cables
through cutout in
spacer panel
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
R
C
M
M

p
a
t
c
h

p
a
n
e
l
port shelf
main shelf or
port shelf
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-435
Routing Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to RCMM-8D88s
8.42 Each RCMM-8D88, when configured for up to 44 add/drop channels
requires one OMD44-1 patch panel. When configured for more than 44 add/drop
channels an OMD44-45 patch panel is also required.
8.43 The OMD44-x patch panels multiplex and demultiplex sets of 44 optical
channels to provide per channel access for connecting to transponders, OPSMs,
or other patch panels. Refer to Figure 8.25, page 7-435.
Figure 8.25 Routing Fiber Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to RCMM-8D88s
8.44 Tellabs part numbers for OMD44 patch panels used with RCMM-8D88s:
__ 81.714144 Optical Mux/Demux - Channels 1 to 44 (OMD44-1)
8.45 For 88-channel operation, each RCMM-8D88 may have up to four
connections to the OMD44-x patch panels, two optical fiber connections and two
RJ45 cable connections as follows:
optical connection between RCMM-8D88, Ports 1-44 In/Out connector
and OMD44-1, DWDM connector
optical connection between RCMM-8D88, Ports 45-88 In/Out
connector and OMD44-45, DWDM connector
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
A-side or E-side
OMD44-1
C-side or G-side
OMD44-1
A-side and C-side
DCMs
patch panel
patch panel
A-side or E-side
OMD44-45
C-side or G-side
OMD44-45
spacer fiber
trough
patch panel
patch panel
B-side or F-side
OMD44-1
D-side or H-side
OMD44-1
B-side and D-side
DCMs
patch panel
patch panel
B-side or F-side
OMD44-45
D-side or H-side
OMD44-45
spacer fiber
trough
patch panel
patch panel
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-436 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
(optional) RJ45 connection between RCMM-8D88, OMD-1 COMM
port and OMD44-1, COMM port
(optional) RJ45 connection between RCMM8D88, OMD-45 COMM
8.46 In 44-channel applications that use the RCMM-8D88 channel multiplexer,
only the connections between the RCMM-8D88 and OMD44-1 are required for
add/drop channels.
Routing Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to OADM88-xR Modules
8.47 Each OADM88-xR, when configured for up to 44 add/drop channels
requires one OMD44-1 patch panel. When configured for more than 44 add/drop
channels an OMD44-45 patch panel is also required.
8.48 The OMD44-x patch panels multiplex and demultiplex sets of 44 optical
channels to provide per channel access for connecting to transponders, OPSMs,
or other patch panels. Refer to Figure 8.25, page 7-435.
8.49 Tellabs part numbers for OMD44 patch panels used with OADM88-xR
modules:
8.50 For 88-channel operation, each OADM88-xR may have up to four
connections to the OMD44-x patch panels, two optical fiber connections and two
RJ45 cable connections as follows:
optical connection between OADM88-xR, Ports 1-44 In/Out connector
and OMD44-1, DWDM connector
optical connection between OADM88-xR, Ports 45-88 In/Out
connector and OMD44-45, DWDM connector
(optional) RJ45 connection between OADM88-xR, OMD-1 COMM
(optional) RJ45 connection between OADM88-xR, OMD-45 COMM
8.51 In 44-channel applications that use the OADM88-xR channel multiplexer,
only the connections between the OADM88-xR and OMD44-1 are required for
add/drop channels.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-437
Figure 8.26 Routing Fiber Cables from OMD44 Patch Panels to OADM88-xR Modules
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
OADM88 BFM SPM BFM BFM OADM88 BFM SPM BFM OADM88 BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM
A-side
OMD44-1
C-side
OMD44-1
A-side and C-side
DCMs
patch panel
patch panel
A-side
OMD44-45
C-side
OMD44-45
spacer fiber
trough
patch panel
patch panel
B-side
OMD44-1
B-side
DCMs
patch panel
B-side
OMD44-45
spacer fiber
trough
patch panel
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Page 7-438 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing 2 mm and 3 mm Jacketed Fiber Cables in Fiber Troughs
8.52 Due to the cable thickness that must be considered when routing fiber
optical cabling, Tellabs recommends the following routing guidelines:
route the 2 mm single fiber cable into the fiber trough along the inside
of the trough, and then between a single set of routing fingers to the
patch panel.
route the 3 mm jacketed fiber cable along the outside of the fiber
trough opposite the patch panel, and then between both sets of routing
fingers to the patch panel.
Route the cables down to the lower fiber duct then up to the patch
panel.
Figure 8.27 Routing 2 mm and 3 mm Jacketed Cables to Patch Panels
Go to Routing Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and
Cross-Connects, page 7-439.
routing 2mm jacketed
single fiber cable
routing 3mm jacketed
fiber cable
fiber trough fiber trough
2RU high-density port shelf
patch panel (HD PPP)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-439
Routing Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and Cross-Connects
8.53 Cabling for all types of patch panels, the DCM chassis and
cross-connections between modules that are located in different racks are routed
to the FRONT of the rack. The procedures that follow are for cabling these items
to the front of the rack and the rack spacer panel.
Note: For procedures to route cross-connects in a SBOADM between modules
in the same rack (without using a patch panel), refer to Tellabs 7100
SBOADM Acceptance Testing.
Materials 8.54 Table 8.1, page 7-439 shows a list of the appropriate cables for each
procedure. Also refer to Tellabs 7100 System Engineering for a list of all available
Tellabs cables or other transponder types.
Note 1: If configuring Line Side Protection among the RCMM, the OPSM, port
shelf patch panel and a transponder, follow the procedures in Dressing
the Cables, page 7-445.
Note 2: If the port side interfaces on two transponders are cabled together, the
Transmit (Tx or OUT) level of one transponder should not exceed the
Receive (Rx or IN) level of the peer transponder. If this is not the case,
then attenuators must be added to equalize the Tx and Rx levels.
Table 8.1 Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and Cross-Connects to Transponder Modules
Connections From/To Cable Type / Notes Tellabs Part Number
transponders
(duplex LC/UPC)
port shelf patch
panel (simplex
SC/UPC)
Single Mode fiber: Duplex LC/UPC to dual
simplex SC/UPC with removable duplex
coupler and 2 mm Zip Cord Jacketing.
Length: 40 to 5000 centimeters in 10
centimeter increments up to 550
centimeters, then the next length is 600
centimeters with 100 centimeter
increments thereafter.
255-0071-Cxxxx
1
82-Issue OPSM
(LC/UPC
connector)
port shelf patch
panel
(simplex SC/UPC)
duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex SC/UPC
connectors
2 meters to 50 meters long in 1 meter
increments. Single mode fiber.
155.0001-XXXX
DCM
(duplex LC/UPC)
amplifier module
(duplex SC/UPC)
cable. 2 meters to 50 meters long in 1
meter increments. Multimode fiber.
155.0175-XXXX
Transponder
(duplex SC/UPC
connectors)
RCMM patch
panel in another
rack
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
multimode fiber:
duplex LC/PC connector to dual simplex
SC/PC connectors
IN and OUT ports transposed at cable
ends lengths:16 to 164 inches in 4 inch
increments
155.09XX
Page 7-440 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
RCMM patch
panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
port shelf patch
panel
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
length: 16 inches to 164 inches in 4 inch
increments
155.03XX
Y-Cable patch
panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
customer facility
termination
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
bend insensitive
2
dual simplex LC/UPC to
dual simplex SC/UPC cable, 40 cm to 550
cm in 10 cm increments.
255-0030-CXXXX
RCMM patch
panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Transponder in
another rack
(duplex SC/APC
connectors)
dual LC/UPC to duplex SC/APC cable with
DST jacketing. 4 to 22 meters in 1-meter
increments.
when installing fiber cabling on
overhead ladder racks
cabling RCMM patch panel to Line side
port transponder in another rack
155.0438-XXXX
FGTM
(simplex SC/APC)
Y-Cable patch
panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
RCMM-8D88 or
OADM88 PORTS
1-44
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
OMD44-1, DWDM
port
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Single Mode fiber: Duplex LC/UPC to
duplex LC/UPC with removable duplex
255-0070-Cxxxx
1
RCMM-8D88 or
OADM88 PORTS
44-88
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
OMD44-45,
DWDM port
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Duplex LC/UPC to duplex LC/UPC. 16 to
216 inches long in 4 inch increments (40
cm to 550 cm in 10 cm increments).
155.06xx
RCMM or
OADM88 Express
cross-connects
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
RCMM or
OADM88 Express
cross-connects
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
duplex LC/UPC to duplex LC/UPC cable. 1
meter to 50 meters in 1 meter increments
155.0183-XXXX
3
FGTM-M, HDTG,
OTNM-D, and
TGTM-E
transponders
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Y-Cable patch
panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
bend insensitive
2
dual simplex LC/UPC cable, 40 cm to 550
cm in 10 cm increments
255-0016-CXXXX
RCMM-8D88 or
OADM88 PORTS
1-44
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
OMD44-1, DWDM
port
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Table 8.1 Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and Cross-Connects to Transponder Modules (Continued)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-441
Go to Dressing the Cables, page 7-445.
Transponder Line
Side
(dual simplex
SC/APC
connector)
High-density port
shelf patch panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Single Mode fiber: Duplex LC/UPC to a
staggered dual simplex SC/APC with
removable duplex coupler and 2 mm Zip
Cord Jacketing.
255-0072-Cxxxx
1
duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex SC/APC
cable. 16 to 216 inches long in 4 inch
increments.
155.02XX
bend insensitive
2
dual simplex SC/APC cable, 40 cm to 550
cm in 10 cm increments.
255-0029-CXXXX
duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex SC/APC. 2
meters to 99 meters long in 1 meter
increments.
155.0189-XXXX
FGTM or
FGTM-M
(SC/UPC)
Port Shelf patch
panel (SC/UPC)
dual fiber SC/UPC simplex to SC/UPC
simplex
155.0157-XXXX
Y-Cable patch
panel
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
LGX panel/
termination point
Y-Cable 5-Meter Single Mode Fiber Cable
Provides a single optical splitter used in
conjunction with the Y-Cable patch panel
where one end connects to the patch panel
and the other end connects to a
transponder or LGX panel/termination
point.
81.71YCBL-SM-5M
Y-Cable 5-Meter Multi-Mode Fiber Cable
Provides a single optical splitter used in
conjunction with the Y-Cable patch panel
where one end connects to the patch panel
and the other end connects to a
transponder or LGX panel/termination
point.
81.71YCBL-MM-5M
1. This cable series has a removable clip on the LC connector that allows duplex LC operation or dual simplex operation as required.
2. The bend insensitive fiber connectors have a rotatable boot with a 40 degree bend. The bend keeps the fiber closer to the face of
the module which helps control the fiber bend radius. The boot is rotatable so that the key on the optical connector can be aligned to
the key on the optical port.
3. This is applicable to an SBOADM where the RCMM-4D/8Ds may be in different racks, especially in an 8-degree SBOADM
configuration with 8 RCMM-8Ds.
Table 8.1 Cables for Patch Panels, DCM Chassis, and Cross-Connects to Transponder Modules (Continued)
Page 7-442 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cables From the Customer Termination to the Transponder Modules
8.55 This section provides the procedures for routing customer termination
cabling to the transponder modules. Also included in these procedures are steps
to connect cables for line-side protection. All cabling for the customer terminations
is routed to the REAR of the spacer panel.
8.56 For illustrations of routing the fiber cabling, refer to Guidelines for Routing
Cables, page 7-414.
Materials 8.57 Table 8.2, page 7-442 shows a list of the appropriate cables for each
procedure. Also refer to Tellabs 7100/7100N System Engineering for a list of all
available Tellabs cables or other transponder types.
Table 8.2 Cables for Cabling Customer Terminations to Transponder and Amplifier Modules
Connections From/To Cable Type Tellabs Part Number
Transponder
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
Customer Fiber
Termination
Panel
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
connectors
255-0071-Cxxxx
1
155.0001-00XX
2
multimode duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex
SC/UPC connectors
155.0175-XXXX
Transponders
(duplex SC/UPC
connector)
Directly to
Customer
Equipment
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
dual simplex SC/UPC to dual simplex
SC/UPC connectors
155.0157-XXXX
155.0184-XXXX
connectors
255-0071-Cxxxx
155.0001-00XX
multimode duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex
SC/UPC connectors
155.0175-XXXX
Cat 5E electrical LAN cable; 1 foot to 30 feet
long in 1 foot increments, 35 feet to 100 feet
long in 5 foot increments, 110 feet to 300
feet long in 10 foot increments
150.1700-XXX
Cat E5 electrical LAN cable; for use when
lengths greater than 100 feet are required.
Available in 10-foot increments, where XX
equals cable length in feet divided by 10
50.271XX
multimode fiber:
duplex LC/PC connector to dual simplex
SC/PC connectors
IN and OUT ports transposed at cable ends
lengths:16 to 164 inches in 4 inch
increments
155.09XX
HDTG, TGTM-E,
TGIM-P, SSM-X,
or SSM-D
Transponders
(duplex LC/PC
connector)
customer
connection
(dual simplex
SC/PC
connectors)
multimode fiber: Duplex LC/PC to dual
simplex SC/PC.
2.0mm Zip cord type construction
length: 1 to 50 meters in 1-meter increments
255-0041-Mxxxx
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-443
HDTG, TGTM-E,
TGIM-P, SSM-X,
or SSM-D
Transponders
(duplex LC/PC
connector)
customer
connection
(duplex LC/PC
connectors)
multimode fiber: Duplex LC/PC to duplex
LC/PC.
length: 1 to 50 meters in 1-meter increments
(52 meter and 60 meter also available)
255-0042-Mxxxx
HDTG, TGTM-E,
TGIM-P, SSM-X,
or SSM-D
transponders
(duplex LC/PC
connector)
customer
connection
(dual simplex
SC/PC
connectors)
Single Mode fiber: Duplex LC/UPC to a
staggered dual simplex SC/APC with
removable duplex coupler and 2 mm Zip
Cord Jacketing.
centimeters with 100 centimeter increments
thereafter.
255-0072-Cxxxx
HDTG, TGTM-E,
TGIM-P, SSM-X,
or SSM-D
transponders
(duplex LC/PC
connector)
customer
connection
(duplex LC/PC
connectors)
Single Mode fiber: Duplex LC/UPC to
duplex LC/UPC with removable duplex
thereafter.
255-0070-Cxxxx
Port Shelf patch
panel
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
use these
procedures
for setting up
Line Side
Protection
Customer Fiber
Termination
Panel
SC/APC connectors
length: 16 inches to 164 inches in 4 inch
increments
155.07XX
Single Mode fiber: Dual simplex SC/UPC to
dual simplex staggered SC/APC with 2 mm
Zip Cord Jacketing.
thereafter.
255-0074-Cxxxx
If configuring Line Side Protection among the RCMM, the OPSM,
port shelf patch panel, and a transponder, follow the procedures
in Dressing the Cables, page 7-445.
This procedure covers cabling between transponders and the port
shelf patch panel when they are not in the same rack, within close
proximity. If connecting an OPSM to the port shelf patch panel
using cable assembly Tellabs part number 155.0170.
If the port side interfaces on two transponders are cabled together,
the Transmit (Tx) level of one transponder should not exceed the
Receive (Rx) level of the peer transponder. If this is not the case,
then attenuators must be added to equalize the Tx and Rx levels.
Table 8.2 Cables for Cabling Customer Terminations to Transponder and Amplifier Modules (Continued)
Page 7-444 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Transponders
(duplex SC/UPC
connector)
RCMM Patch
Panel in Another
Rack
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
connectors
255-0071-Cxxxx
155.0001-XXXX
the Transmit (Tx or OUT) level of one transponder should not
exceed the Receive (Rx or IN) level of the peer transponder. If this
is not the case, then attenuators must be added to equalize the Tx
and Rx levels.
Transponders
(duplex SC/UPC
connector)
OMD44-x Patch
Panel in Another
Rack
(duplex LC/UPC
connectors)
connectors
255-0071-Cxxxx
155.0001-XXXX
the Transmit (Tx or OUT) level of one transponder should not
exceed the Receive (Rx or IN) level of the peer transponder. If this
is not the case, then attenuators must be added to equalize the Tx
and Rx levels.
Cable Assemblies for Connecting Input Amplifier Modules
Customer Fiber
Termination
Panel
LIAM-E.
LIAM-E88
single fiber simplex SC/UPC to simplex
SC/UPC connectors
155.05XX
LRAM-E,
ELRAM-E,
LRAM-E88,
ELRAM-E88
connectors
255-0071-Cxxxx
155.0001-XXXX
MOFM
for storing line side fiber cables from the
RCMM patch panel: Duplex LC/UPC to 2
simplex SC/UPC connectors
for storing facility side fiber cables: Dual
LC/UPC connectors
255-0071-Cxxxx
155.0001-XXXX
155.0183-XXXX
FGTM/FGTM-M
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
Port Shelf patch
panel
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
SC/UPC Connectors
255-0073-Cxxxx
155.11XX
FGTM/FGTM-M
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
customer
equipment
SC/UPC.
255-0073-Cxxxx
155.0184-XXXX
LGX Port Shelf patch
panel
(simplex SC/UPC
connectors)
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-445
Go to the installation procedures Dressing the Cables, page 7-445.
Dressing the Cables
__ 1. Follow all safety and anti-static precautions. Refer to Requirements
and Safety Information, page 7-408.
__ 2. On the Rack#1 side, determine the cable length required to route the
cable from the overhead fiber trough (or sub flooring fiber duct) to the
specific module and its shelf/slot position.
__ 3. Route the fiber down the rear of the rack spacer and through the
keyhole in the rack spacer.
__ 4. From the module port optical connectors, measure out this
pre-determined length.
NIR DWDM LINE
IN Port
(E-2000
connector)
outside plant fiber
or fiber
termination panel
(SC/UPC)
Single Mode fiber: 2mm jacket, simplex
E2000 PC/UPC to simplex SC/UP
Lengths: 1 meter to 50 meters (1 meter
increments)
255-0046-Mxxxx
CRA DWDM
LINE OUT Port
(E-2000
connector)
BAMP DWDM
LINE Out port
(E2000
connector)
NIR DWDM LINE
IN Port
(E-2000
connector)
outside plant fiber
or fiber
termination panel
(FC/UP)
E2000 PC/UPC to simplex FC/UP
Lengths: 1 meter to 50 meters (1 meter
increments)
255-0047-Mxxxx
CRA DWDM
LINE OUT Port
(E-2000
connector)
BAMP DWDM
LINE Out port
(E2000
connector)
BAMP DWDM
Line Out port
(E-2000
connector)
CRA DWDM Line
In
(LC/UPC
E2000 PC/UPC to simplex LC/UPC
Length: 1 meter
255-0068
2. Where XXXX = length in inches or meters.
Page 7-446 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 5. Mark this point for subsequent use as the entry guide mark into the
fiber trough (or fiber duct).
__ 6. Place the cable into the fiber trough (or fiber duct) at the entry guide
mark so that the pre-measured (Rack#1) connector end remains free
from the fiber trough (or fiber duct) for the subsequent fiber
identification labeling procedure.
__ 7. The Rack#1 portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
identification purposes to reflect the far-end termination point.
__ 8. Route the remaining portion of the fiber cable through the overhead
fiber trough (or sub flooring fiber duct) to the termination point at the
opposite rack (Rack#2).
__ 9. At the termination point (Rack#2 cable side), determine the distance
from the overhead trough (or sub flooring fiber duct) to the specific
module and its shelf/slot position.
__ 10. Measure out the specified length of the cable from the optical
connectors and temporarily mark this point as a guide for the exit point
from the fiber trough (or fiber duct).
__ 11. Store any excess cable length that remains between the entry and exit
guide marks into the overhead cable trough (or sub flooring fiber duct)
according to all applicable local regulations.
__ 12. Position the Rack#2 portion of cable into the exit point of the fiber
trough (or sub flooring fiber duct) at the exit guide mark so that the
pre-measured (Rack#2) connector end remains free from the fiber
trough (or fiber duct) for the subsequent fiber identification labeling
procedure.
__ 13. Route the fiber cables as follows:
For routing cables to the DCM and patch panels, route the fiber
to the REAR of the rack spacer and through the keyhole in the
rack spacer to the shelf.
For routing cables to transponders and the customer facility
termination panel, route the fiber to the FRONT of the rack
spacer and through the keyhole in the rack spacer to the shelf.
__ 15. Repeat Dressing the Cables, page 7-445 for each cable for modules
located on different racks.
__ 16. Following the completion of the installation procedure and in
anticipation of Acceptance Testing procedures, the fiber optic cables
must be properly stored. To prevent incidental damage, the optical end
of the cable must be completely removed from the office floor and
stored securely while respecting the applicable cable bend radius
constraints.
Warning:
Never store the fiber optic cable on the floor or in a manner that exceeds the
authorized cable bend radius. Fiber optic cables are easily damaged.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-447
Routing Pass-through Cables Between Two Peer Transponder
Modules, page 7-447
Installing Customer Terminal Cabling, page 7-462
Installing Timing Cabling, page 7-467.
Cabling LAN and Communication Connections, page 7-470
Routing Pass-through Cables Between Two Peer Transponder Modules
8.59 This section provides the procedures required to route channel
pass-through cables between two peer transponder modules, such as HDTGs,
SMTM-xs, SSM-Ds, SSM-Xs, and OTNM-Ds. Follow these steps to install fiber
optic cables for two peer modules located on two different racks.
Note 1: Intra-rack, intra-system, and customer termination fiber cables are run to
both the left and right of the shelf as follows:
- Port shelf slots 1 to 8, the fiber cables are to be run down the left
hand side of the rack
- Port shelf slots 9 to 16, the fiber cables are to be run down the right
hand side of the rack.
- HCSS slots 2 to 8, the fiber cables are to be run down the left hand
side of the rack
- HCSS slots 12 to 18, the fiber cables are to be run down the right
hand side of the rack.
Note 2: A rack spacer involving any type of patch panel cannot be used for
channel pass-through cabling. The connection between two
pass-through modules must be direct and may not include any
connections via a patch panel.
Note 3: Transponders that are compatible with the HCSS are the HDTG,
SSM-D, SSM-X, OTNM-D, TGTM-E, FGTM, and FGTM.
Page 7-448 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Materials 8.60 For this procedure, select one of the following cable assemblies for each
transponder connection:
Dressing the Cables for
Modules in Different Racks
mark so that the premeasured (Rack#1) connector end remains free
premeasured (Rack#2) connector end remains free from the fiber
procedure.
Table 8.3 Cables for Cabling Customer Terminations to Transponder Modules
Transponder cross-connects
between two relay racks
dual simplex fiber LC/UPC to LC/UPC simplex
255-0070-Cxxxx
1
155.06XX
2
255-0016-CXXX
3

(bend insensitive)
4
2. where XX = 16 to 164 inches in 4-inch increments.
3. where XXX=40 cm to 550 cm in 10-cm increments.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-449
__ 13. Route the fiber to the front of the rack spacer to the other module.
__ 15. Repeat Dressing the Cables for Modules in Different Racks,
page 7-448 for each cable for modules located on different racks.
constraints.
Routing Optical Cables for Optional External Amplifiers (NIR, CRA, BAMP)
8.61 The following procedures are available for cabling optional external
amplifiers:
Optional NIR Amplifier, page 7-451
Optional CRA Amplifier, page 7-452
Optional BAMP, page 7-454
8.62 For external amplifier (NIR, CRA, BAMP) cables, refer to Table 8.4,
page 7-449.
Warning:
Table 8.4 External Amplifier Cables (NIR, CRA, BAMP Modules)
Tellabs
Part Number
Cable
Description
255-0076-Cxxxx Single Mode fiber: Simplex LC/UPC to simplex SC/UPC.
Where xxx is the length in centimeters (50, 110, 170, then
the next length is 200 centimeters with 100 centimeter
increments up to 1000).
input amplifier DWDM In (SC/UPC) to the NIR amplifier
DWDM Out (LC/UPC)
fiber distribution panel transmit Out (SC/UPC) to the
OADM88 DWDM Out (LC/UPC)
input amplifier DWDM In (SC/UPC) to the CRA amplifier
DWDM IN (LC/UPC)
input amplifier DWDM In (SC/UPC) connector to the
BAMP DWDM IN (LC/UPC)
Page 7-450 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
255-0077-Cxxxx Single Mode fiber: Simplex LC/UPC to simplex LC/UPC.
Where xxx is the length in centimeters (50, 110, 170, then
the next length is 200 centimeters with 100 centimeter
increments up to 1000).
OADM88 DWDM In (LC/UPC) to the NIR amplifier
DWDM Out (LC/UPC)
OADM88 DWDM In (LC/UPC) to the CRA amplifier
DWDM IN (LC/UPC)
OADM88 DWDM In (LC/UPC) connector to the BAMP
DWDM IN (LC/UPC)
255-0046-Mxxxx Cable: SM 2mm jacket, simplex E2000 PC/UPC to simplex
SC/UP
Lengths: 1 meter to 50 meters (1 meter increments)
NIR DWDM Line In port (E2000 PC/UPC) to outside
plant fiber or fiber termination panel (SC/UPC)
BAMP Line Out port (E2000 PC/UPC) to outside plant
fiber or fiber termination panel (SC/UPC)
CRA DWDM Line Out port (E2000 PC/UPC) to outside
plant fiber or fiber termination panel (SC/UPC)
255-0047-Mxxxx Cable: SM, 2mm jacket, simplex E2000 PC/UPC to
simplex FC/UP
Lengths: 1 meter to 50 meters (1 meter increments)
NIR DWDM Line In port (E2000 PC/UPC) to outside
plant fiber or fiber termination panel (FC/UP)
BAMP DWDM Line Out port (E2000 PC/UPC) to
outside plant fiber or fiber termination panel (FC/UP)
CRA DWDM Line Out port (E2000 PC/UPC) to outside
plant fiber or fiber termination panel (FC/UP)
255-0068 Cable: SM, 2mm jacket, simplex E2000 PC/UPC to
simplex LC/UPC
Length: 1 meter
BAMP DWDM Line Out port (E2000 PC/UPC) to CRA
DWDM Line In (LC/UPC)
155.05XX SM, simplex SC/UPC to simplex SC/UPC
Length: 16 to 216 inches in 4-inch increments, also a 236
inch length is available
input amplifier DWDM Out (SC/UPC) to the fiber
distribution panel Out (transmit) SC/UPC connector
Table 8.4 External Amplifier Cables (NIR, CRA, BAMP Modules) (Continued)
Tellabs
Part Number
Cable
Description
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-451
Routing Optical Cables Between Input Amplifier or OADM88 and Optional NIR Amplifier
8.63 To install the input amplifier or OADM88 to NIR amplifier optical cables,
perform the following procedure:
__ 2. Refer to Table 8.4, page 7-449 to determine the cables required.
__ 3. Determine the cable length required from the input amplifier or
OADM88 DWDM In connector location to the NIR amplifier the DWDM
Out connector location:
__ 4. Route the cable from the input amplifier DWDM In (SC/UPC) or
OADM88 DWDM In (LC/UPC) connector location to the NIR amplifier
the DWDM Out LC/UPC connector location.
__ 5. Label the cable ends. Tape off the extra cable fibers.
__ 6. Store any excess cable length that remains according to all applicable
local regulations.
__ 7. Determine the cable length required from the input amplifier or
OADM88 DWDM Out connector to the fiber distribution panel Out
(transmit) connector.
__ 8. Route the cable from the input amplifier DWDM Out (SC/UPC) or
OADM88 DWDM Out connector location to the fiber distribution panel
Out (transmit) SC/UPC connector location.
local regulations.
Note: In the following steps the cable is connected at the outside plant fiber or
fiber termination panel.
__ 11. Determine the cable length required from the NIR amplifier DWDM
Line In (E-2000) connector to the outside plant fiber or fiber
termination panel.
Warning:
When routing the cable from the NIR DWDM Line In port to the outside plant fiber
or fiber termination panel, the following precautions must be met:
Cable routing must be as direct as possible with as few bends as possible.
The cable bends must be made and maintained with a bend radius greater
than 2 inches.
The fiber connectors (E-2000 and SC) must be free of contaminants.
Failure to meet these conditions may result in damage to the fiber cable or NIR
amplifier due the strong laser signal emitted from the NIR toward the remote site.
Page 7-452 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 12. Route the cable with the E-2000 connector at the NIR amplifier DWDM
Line In connector location to the outside plant fiber location or fiber
termination panel.
__ 13. Label the cable ends.
local regulations.
Go to Installing Customer Terminal Cabling, page 7-462.
Routing Optical Cables Between Input Amplifier or OADM88 and Optional CRA Amplifier
8.64 To install the input amplifier or OADM88 to CRA amplifier optical cables,
perform the following procedure:
__ 3. Determine the cable length required from the input amplifier DWDM In
or OADM88 DWDM In connector location to the CRA amplifier the
DWDM IN connector location.
__ 4. Route the cable from the input amplifier DWDM In (SC/UPC) or
OADM88 DWDM In (LC/UPC) connector location to the CRA amplifier
the DWDM IN (LC/UPC) connector location.
local regulations.
Warning:
Warning:
When routing the cable from the CRA DWDM Line OUT port to the outside plant
or fiber termination panel, fiber the following precautions must be met:
than 2 inches.
Failure to meet these conditions may result in damage to the fiber cable or CRA
amplifier due the strong laser signal emitted from the CRA toward the remote
site.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-453
__ 7. Determine the cable length required from the input amplifier DWDM
Out or OADM88 DWDM Out connector to the fiber distribution panel
Out (transmit) connector.
__ 8. Route the cable from the input amplifier DWDM Out (SC/UPC) or
OADM88 DWDM Out (LC/UPC) connector location to the fiber
distribution panel Out (transmit) connector location.
local regulations.
__ 11. Determine the cable length required from the CRA amplifier DWDM
Line Out (E-2000) connector to the outside plant fiber or fiber
termination panel.
__ 12. Route the cable with the E-2000 connector at the CRA amplifier
DWDM Line Out connector location to the outside plant fiber location
or fiber termination panel.
local regulations.
Warning:
Page 7-454 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Optical Cables Between Input Amplifier or OADM88 and Optional BAMP
8.65 To install the input amplifier or OADM88 to Booster Amplifier (BAMP)
optical cables, perform the following procedure:
__ 3. Determine the cable length required from the input amplifier DWDM In
or OADM88 DWDM In connector location to the BAMP DWDM IN
connector location.
__ 4. Route the cable from the input amplifier DWDM In or OADM88 DWDM
In connector location to the BAMP DWDM IN LC/UPC connector
location.
local regulations.
__ 7. Determine the cable length required from the input amplifier DWDM
Out connector to the fiber distribution panel Out (transmit) connector.
__ 8. Route the cable from the input amplifier DWDM Out (SC/UPC)
connector location to the fiber distribution panel Out (transmit)
connector location.
local regulations.
__ 11. Determine the cable length required (customer provided cable with
E-2000 connector) from the BAMP DWDM Line Out E-2000
connector to the outside plant fiber or fiber termination panel.
Warning:
When routing the cable from the BAMP DWDM Line OUT port to the outside
plant or fiber termination panel, fiber the following precautions must be met:
than 2 inches.
Failure to meet these conditions may result in damage to the fiber cable or CRA
amplifier due the strong laser signal emitted from the CRA toward the remote
site.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-455
__ 12. Route the cable with the E-2000 connector at the BAMP DWDM Line
Out connector location to the outside plant fiber location or fiber
termination panel.
local regulations.
Routing OMD88 Patch Panel Cables for Directionless Add/Drop Terminals
8.66 Configuration #32 (88-Channel SBOADM using RCMM-8D88s and DX
RCMMs) supports directionless add/drop terminals. In a directionless
configuration, up to seven degrees support directionless add/drop terminals.
These degrees use the DX RCMM instead of the RCMM-8D88 and do not require
an input amplifier or OMD44 patch panels.
8.67 The following procedures are available:
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the DX RCMM, page 7-460
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the Transponder,
page 7-461
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the LOAM-E88, page 7-460
Routing Cabling Between the DX RCMM and the LOAM-E88,
page 7-461
Warning:
Page 7-456 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
8.68 For cabling graphics, refer to Figure 8.28, page 7-458 and Figure 8.29,
page 7-459:
the OMD88 DWDM Out port is connected to the DX RCMM DX In port
the LOAM-E88 DWDM In port is connected to the DX RCMM DX Out
port
the LOAM-E88 DWDM Out port is connected to the OMD88 DWDM In
port
the OMD88 Comm port is connected to the DX Comm port on the
DX RCMM (refer to Cabling LAN and Communication Connections,
page 7-470)
the OMD88 Rx port is connected to the transponder DWDM Out port
the OMD88 Tx port is connected to the transponder DWDM In port
Note 1: Input amplifiers are not installed in the slots associated with the
directionless add/drop degrees.
Note 2: DX RCMM modules that are used in directionless add/drop
configurations do not connect to the OMD44-1 or OMD44-45 patch
panels.
Materials 8.69 Refer to Table 8.5, page 7-456 for a list of the appropriate cables for a
directionless add/drop terminal. Also refer to Tellabs 7100 System Engineering for
a list of all available Tellabs cables.
Table 8.5 OMD88 Directionless Add/Drop Cables
Connections
Tellabs Part
Number Construction When Used
Transponder
DWDM In/Out
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
OMD88 patch
panel (duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
255-0070-Cxxxx
1
Single Mode fiber: Duplex
LC/UPC to duplex LC/UPC
with removable duplex
coupler and 2 mm Zip Cord
Jacketing.
Length: 40 to 5000
centimeters in 10 centimeter
increments up to 550
centimeters, then the next
length is 600 centimeters with
100 centimeter increments
thereafter.
Transponder
DWDM In/Out
LC/UPC to
OMD88 In/Out
ports
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-457
Transponder
DWDM In/Out
(duplex SC/PC
connector)
OMD88 patch
panel (duplex
LC/UPC
connectors)
255-0072-Cxxxx
1
Single Mode fiber: Duplex
LC/UPC to a staggered dual
simplex SC/APC with
removable duplex coupler
and 2 mm Zip Cord Jacketing.
Length: 40 to 5000
centimeters in 10 centimeter
increments up to 550
centimeters, then the next
length is 600 centimeters with
100 centimeter increments
thereafter.
Transponder
DWDM In/Out
SC/PC to OMD88
In/Out ports
LOAM-E88
DWDM In
(simplex SC/PC
connector)
DX RCMM DX
Out (simplex
LC/UPC
connector)
255-0076-Cxxxx Single Mode fiber: Simplex
LC/UPC to simplex SC/UPC.
Where xxx is the length in
centimeters (50, 110, 170,
then the next length is 200
centimeters with 100
centimeter increments up to
1000).
Multiple uses:
LOAM-E88
DWDM In to DX
RCMM DX Out
LOAM-E88
DWDM Out to
OMD88 DWDM
In
LOAM-E88
DWDM Out
(simplex SC/PC
connector)
OMD88
DWDM In
(simplex
LC/UPC
connector)
OMD88 DWDM
Out
(simplex
LC/UPC
connector)
DX RCMM
DX In
(simplex
LC/UPC
connector)
255-0077-Cxxxx Single Mode fiber: Simplex
LC/UPC to simplex LC/UPC.
Where xxx is the length in
centimeters (50, 110, 170,
then the next length is 200
centimeters with 100
centimeter increments up to
1000).
Multiple uses:
OMD88 DWDM
Out to DX RCMM
DX In
Table 8.5 OMD88 Directionless Add/Drop Cables (Continued)
Connections
Tellabs Part
Number Construction When Used
Page 7-458 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 8.28 Routing Fiber Cable to the OMD88 Patch Panel (Degree D)
Note: Cable colors in this graphic are used to show the cable routing.
D
C
M
-
C
D
C
M
-
A
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
A
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
A
1

R
U

F
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
C
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
C
D
X

R
C
M
M
3
R
U

H
D

P
P
P
D
C
M
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
1
-
B
O
M
D
4
4
-
4
5
-
B
OMD88
duct with cover
L
O
A
M
-
E
8
8
BFAP
D
W
D
M

I
n
D
W
D
M

O
u
t
D
X

O
u
t
D
X

I
n
DWDM Out
D
W
D
M

I
n
RX
DWDM Out
DWDM In
TX
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
f
i
b
e
r

t
r
o
u
g
h
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-459
Figure 8.29 Directionless Add/Drop Terminal Connections
Note: The RDXM Directionless Kit (Tellabs part number C7100RDXM_KIT)
contains an OMD88, DX RCMM, and a LOAM-E88.
Fault
Power
OK to Pull: Red
Active: Green
Exp 7
In | Out
DWDM(88)
Express
Port
DX
In Out
Comm
DX
Do Not
Use
DWDM
In
LOAM-E88
DWDM
Fault
Power
OK to Pull:Red
Active:Green
Caution
Detach Cables
Before
Removing
Module
Sync
Fault
Power
OKto Pull
Active
(green)
(red)
TGTM-E
OUT
P
O
R
T
In
In
Line
O
u
t
COMM
In Out
OMD88
DWDM
(1 - 88)
RJ-45
RJ-45
LC/UPC
dual
LC/UPC
SC/UPC
DWDM In
SC/UPC
DWDM Out
Do Not
Use
DWDM
Out
DWDM
Out
Out
Out
In
In
Out
In
LC/UPC
DX Out
Transponder
connector types
vary.
For cables, refer
to Table 8.5,
page 7-456.
transponder OMD88 LOAM-E88 DX RCMM
Refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471 for Ethernet cable.
LC/UPC
DX In
LC/UPC
DWDM
In
*DX*
RCMM
Use
Do Not
Exp 6
In | Out
Exp 5
In | Out
Exp 4
In | Out
Exp 3
In | Out
Exp 2
In | Out
Exp 1
In | Out
Page 7-460 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the LOAM-E88
8.70 Route the optical cable between the LOAM-E88 and the OMD88 as
follows:
__ 2. Throughout this procedure refer to Table 8.5, page 7-456, Figure 8.28,
page 7-458, and Figure 8.29, page 7-459.
__ 3. Obtain a 255-0076-Cxxxx LC/UPC to SC/UPC cable assembly.
__ 4. Determine the cable length required from the OMD88 DWDM In
connector location to the LOAM-E88 DWDM Out connector location.
__ 5. Route the cable from the OMD88 DWDM In connector location to the
LOAM-E88 DWDM Out SC/UPC connector location.
__ 6. Remove the duplex clip from the duplex SC cable connector end.
__ 8. Remove the duplex clip from the duplex LC cable connector end.
local regulations.
Go to Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the DX RCMM,
page 7-460.
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the DX RCMM
8.71 Route the optical cable between the OMD88 and the DX RCMM as follows:
__ 3. Obtain a 255-0077-Cxxxx LC/UPC to LC/UPC cable assembly.
__ 4. Determine the cable length required from the OMD88 DWDM Out
connector location to the DX RCMM DX In connector location.
__ 5. Route the cable from the OMD88 DWDM Out connector location to the
DX RCMM DX In LC/UPC connector location.
__ 8. Remove the duplex clip from the other duplex LC cable connector end.
local regulations.
Go to Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the Transponder,
page 7-461.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-461
Routing Cabling Between the OMD88 and the Transponder
8.72 Route the optical cable between the OMD88 and the transponder as
follows:
__ 3. Transponder connector types vary. Obtain the appropriate cable:
- 255-0070-Cxxxx (duplex LC/UPC to duplex LC/UPC)
- 255-0072-Cxxxx (duplex LC/UPC to dual simplex SC/APC)
__ 4. Determine the cable length required from the OMD88 Rx/Tx connector
location to the transponder DWDM In and DWDM Out connector
location.
__ 5. Route the cable from the OMD88 Rx/Tx connector location to the
transponder DWDM In and DWDM Out connector location.
__ 6. If necessary, remove the duplex clip from the duplex cable connector
ends.
__ 7. Label the cable ends:
- the OMD88 Rx port is connected to the transponder DWDM Out
port
- the OMD88 Tx port is connected to the transponder DWDM In port
local regulations.
Go to Routing Cabling Between the DX RCMM and the LOAM-E88,
page 7-461.
Routing Cabling Between the DX RCMM and the LOAM-E88
8.73 Route the optical cable between the DX RCMM and the LOAM-E88 as
follows:
__ 3. Obtain a 255-0076-Cxxxx SC/UPC to LC/UPC cable assembly.
__ 4. Determine the cable length required from the DX RCMM DX Out
connector location to the LOAM-E88 DWDM In connector location.
__ 5. Route the cable from the DX RCMM DX Out connector location to the
LOAM-E88 DWDM In connector location.
__ 6. Remove the duplex clip from the duplex SC cable connector end.
Page 7-462 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
local regulations.
Installing Customer Terminal Cabling
8.74 These procedures are for installing customer termination cabling to the
transponder modules. Obtain the appropriate cables in the required lengths and
complete the following procedures. Also included in these procedures are steps to
connect cables for Line Side Protection.
Materials 8.75 Identify facility cables with connector types to match the transponders and
the facility patch panel. Transponders are equipped with SC/UPC or LC/UPC type
connectors. Table 8.6, page 7-462 shows a list of the appropriate cables for each
procedure. Also refer to Tellabs 7100/7100N System Engineering for a list of all
available Tellabs cables, or other transponder types.
Table 8.6 Cables for Cabling to the Customer Terminal
Connections Construction When Used
Tellabs Part
Number
Transponder
SFP
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
Transponder
Line Side port
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
82-Issue
OPSM module
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
HD PPP
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
for lengths measured in inches all HD PPP
applications
155.06XX
for lengths measured in meters 155.0183-XXXX
for lengths measured in
centimeters
255-0070-Cxxxx
1
255-0016-CXXXX
(bend
insensitive
2
)
81-Issue
OPSM module
(MPO/APC
connector)
rear of HD
PPP
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
only one cable length is offered
(6 fiber cable)
155.0436
81-Issue
OPSM module
(MPO/APC
connector)
Port Shelf
Patch Panel
(simplex
SC/UPC
connector)
only one cable length is offered
(6 fiber cable)
155.0170
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-463
Dressing the Cables __ 1. Follow all safety and anti-static precautions. Refer to Requirements
mark so that the premeasured (Rack#1) connector end remains free
Transponder
Line Side port
(duplex
SC/APC
connector)
HD PPP
(duplex
LC/UPC
connector)
for lengths measured in inches all HD PPP
applications
155.02XX
for lengths measured in
centimeters
255-0072-Cxxxx
1
255-0029-CXXXX
(bend
insensitive
1
)
Table 8.6 Cables for Cabling to the Customer Terminal
Connections Construction When Used
Tellabs Part
Number
Page 7-464 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
premeasured (Rack#2) connector end remains free from the fiber
procedure.
__ 13. Route the fiber to the FRONT of the rack spacer and through the
keyhole in the rack spacer to the shelf.
__ 15. Repeat Dressing the Cables, page 7-463 for each cable for modules
located on different racks.
constraints.
Installing Timing Cabling, page 7-467.
Cabling LAN and Communication Connections, page 7-470
Applying Identification Labels
8.77 This section provides the procedures for installing fiber identification labels
on the Tellabs 7100 OTS cables. Perform these procedures when appropriate,
either before or after installation, following your companys prescribed procedures.
Obtain the following materials and perform these steps:
__ Verify that the style of the fiber optic or shielded Ethernet connector
terminated on the module matches the style of the connector provided
on the cable.
__ An antistatic wrist strap or static-dissipating floor mat is required to
perform this procedure.
__ Refer to Tellabs 7100 System Engineering for a list of all available
Tellabs cables.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-465
procedures.
__ 2. Ensure that all connector dust covers are securely in place.
strap jack. Alternately, use an ESD foot strap and ESD protective
flooring. Be sure the ESD protective flooring is kept clean to ensure a
good discharge path.
__ 4. Label each end of the corresponding cable ends with information
leading to the opposite end termination point as illustrated in the
example below:
Labels at the LGX or fiber termination panel might read as follows:
Labels at the Tellabs 7100 termination point might read as follows:
Where:
AAAA = The module acronym (for example, SMTMU).
XX = The shelf location.
xx = The slot number, 1-19.
YY = The channel wavelength.
ZZZ.zz = The rack number.
__ 5. Repeat the labeling for each set of cables.
Warning:
Module AAAA, Shelf Location XX, Slot xx
Wavelength YY
to Tellabs 7100 OTS in RR ZZZ.zz
Module XXXX, Shelf Location XX, Slot xx
Wavelength YY
to LGX or Fiber Termination panel in RR ZZZ.zz.
Page 7-466 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
.
Note: Facility fiber and shielded Ethernet LAN cables should be of proper length
and pre terminated at both ends with the appropriate style of connector.
For example, if a push-on (SC style) female connector is provided on the
transponders, verify that the mating fiber cable is terminated with a
push-on male connector.
__ 6. When relay rack spacers (RRS) are used, store excess cable length
on the spacer with fiber management spools and route out to the
customer facilities.
__ 7. Repeat steps 4, page 7-465 through 6, page 7-466 for all other cables.
Warning:
Fiber cables can break internally. To prevent damage to internal fibers, make
sure the fiber cables do not get caught in the shelf fiber trough. Pinching or
twisting optical cables can break the internal fibers causing failure of light
transmission. Keep optical cables running parallel. Ensure that the fiber cable
bend radius is always more than 1 inch.
Installation 9. Installing Timing Cabling
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-467
9. Installing Timing Cabling
9.01 This section contains the recommended procedures for installing the
Tellabs 7100 OTS timing cables and wiring instructions for the wire wrap
termination. The BITS clock connects only to the 82.7100A/C-60 main shelf-1
(MS-1).
Engineering.
Note 2: The Installer tags and terminates the BITS clock cabling at the horizontal
distribution panel (HDP).
Connecting a Bits Clock to the Main Shelf
9.02 Perform this procedure to connect a bits clock to the 82.07100A/C-60 main
shelf.
Tools 9.03 The following tools and supplies are required:
__ wire-wrap tools
__ wire strippers
__ diagonal wire cutters
__ black electrical tape (Tellabs part number 73.0226)
__ clear tubing (Tellabs part number 46.0178)
__ single pair shielded cable red/white solid conductors (Tellabs part
number 50.2172)
__ single pair shielded cable black/white conductors (Tellabs part number
50.2173)
Action 9.04 Follow these steps to install the BITS cabling.
__ 1. For the primary BITS input connection, obtain a single pair shielded
cable with red and white 24 28 AWG solid conductor wire (Tellabs
part number 50.2172) to connect the BITS clock source to the Tellabs
7100 main shelf HDP.
__ 2. At the Tellabs 7100 cable end, use the Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the protective cover from the BITS clock wire wrap pins.
Retain the cover to replace it after completing all BITS clock
terminations. Refer to Figure 9.1, page 7-468.
9. Installing Timing Cabling Installation
Page 7-468 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Figure 9.1 Location of the BITS Clock Connectors on the HDP for the 7100A/C-60 Main Shelf
__ 3. Prepare the end of the Primary BITS clock cable for wire wrap
termination by removing approximately 1 inches (38 mm) of
jacketing, braided shield and metal foil shield material leaving the red
wire and the white wire intact.
__ 4. Wrap a piece of black electrical tape (Tellabs part number 73.0226)
approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm) in length over the end of the cable
such that the tape covers both the cable jacket material and the two
exposed wires. Refer to Figure 9.2, page 7-468
Figure 9.2 Taping the Primary BITS Clock Cable
__ 5. After preparing the Primary BITS clock cable for termination,
wire-wrap the red wire from the Primary BITS clock cable to BITS-A
input Tip.
__ 6. Wire-wrap the White Wire from the Primary BITS clock cable to
BITS-A input Ring.
__ 7. Terminate the opposite end of the Primary BITS clock cable to the
designated timing source (site clock source). Ensure that the Tip and
Ring connections match the Tellabs 7100 OTS connections and that
the shield wire is connected to chassis ground.
__ 8. Repeat steps 1, page 7-467 through 7, page 7-468 for the Secondary
BITS input connection
__ 9. After completing all BITS clock terminations, replace and secure in
place the plastic protective cover over the BITS wire-wrap connectors
on the main shelf.
HDP Passive Module Control & Timing HDP Modules A & B
BITS
A&B
Red Conductor
White Conductor
Black Electrical Tape
Timing Cable
Primary BITS Clock Cable
Installation 9. Installing Timing Cabling
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-469
Note: If connecting the BITS clock cable to the designated timing source (site
clock source) by using the wire wrap methods, prepare the timing source
end of the cable as shown in Figure 9.3, page 7-469 and Figure 9.4,
page 7-469.
Figure 9.3 Preparing the Timing Source Primary Cable
Figure 9.4 Preparing the Timing Source Secondary Cable
Bare Drain Wire
Red Conductor
White Conductor
Clear Tubing
Timing Cable
Primary BITS Clock Cable
Bare Drain Wire
Black Conductor
White Conductor
Clear Tubing
Timing Cable
Secondary BITS Clock Cable
10. Cabling LAN and Communication Connections Installation
Page 7-470 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
10. Cabling LAN and Communication Connections
10.01 The following section provides the procedures for LAN cable installation up
to and including the label identification and the positioning of the cables, otherwise
referred to as tag and drop, as well as for storage of the excess cable while
awaiting system acceptance testing. Optional 88-channel communication port
cabling procedures are also included.
10.02 The following procedures are available:
Routing DCN-to-GNE LAN Connections, page 7-471
Routing Spur-to-NE LAN Connections, page 7-473
Routing Managed NE-to-Tellabs 7100 NE Connections, page 7-476
Routing SW-3 LAN Connection, page 7-478
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD44 COMM Ports to RCMM-8D88s,
page 7-480
Routing LAN Cables from DCM COMM Ports to Input Amplifiers,
page 7-483
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD44 COMM Ports to OADM88s,
page 7-485
Routing LAN Cables from DCM COMM Ports to OADM88s,
page 7-488
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD88 COMM Port to DX RCMM,
page 7-491
Cable Overview
10.03 LAN cables are required to perform the connections for the management
system NE and managed elements.
10.04 To place an order for these cables or obtain procedural information for
establishing these cable connections, follow your company's prescribed
procedures for obtaining technical assistance or call Tellabs Technical Assistance
at 1.800.443.5555 (North America) or 1.630.798.7070 (outside North America).
10.05 Table 10.1, page 7-471 shows a list for cable types and their
corresponding Tellabs part numbers. Figure 10.1, page 7-471 shows the cable
connection methodology.
Installation 10. Cabling LAN and Communication Connections
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-471

Figure 10.1 RJ-45 Straight-Through Cable
Routing DCN-to-GNE LAN Connections
10.06 This section provides the procedures required to install a DCN-to-GNE
connection.
Requirements __ Prevent personal injury or equipment damage by consistently
Tools __ an antistatic wrist strap or static-dissipating floor mat
Materials __ RJ-45 shielded LAN cable (refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471)
Note: Before installing cables, verify the exact cable length required for the
procedure and verify with the cable on hand.
Action 10.07 Follow these steps to install shielded Ethernet LAN cables for
DCN-to-GNE cross-connect using an RJ-45 shielded LAN cable (refer to Table
10.1, page 7-471):
__ 1. Inspect all LAN cables and RJ-45 connectors for signs of physical
damage before installing the cables. Immediately report cable damage
using the applicable company procedures.
Table 10.1 Cable Types and Part Numbers
Tellabs Part
Number Cable Type Length
250-0076-F0xxx CatE5 Ethernet cable; for use when lengths
greater than 100 feet are required.
In feet, available in 10-foot increments,
where XXX = length in feet/10.
150.1700-XXX gray Cat 5E electrical LAN cable; gigabit
Ethernet electrical applications
1 foot to 30 feet long in 1 foot increments, 35
feet to 100 feet long in 5 foot increments,
110 feet to 300 feet long in 10 foot
increments
50.271XX gray Cat E5 electrical LAN cable; gigabit
Ethernet electrical applications
for use when lengths greater than 100 feet
are required. Available in 10-foot
increments, where XX equals cable length in
feet divided by 10
RJ-45
8 position male
RJ-45
8 position male
2
1
3
6
2
1
3
6
connector connector
pins 1 to 6 pins 1 to 6
Page 7-472 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C

protective flooring is kept clean to ensure an adequate discharge path.
__ 4. On the DCN side, determine the cable length required to route the
cable from the overhead cable trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to
the specific ports on the Tellabs 7100 Main Shelf HDP panel.
__ 5. From the RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connectors, measure out this
cable trough (or cable duct).
__ 7. Place the cable into the cable trough (or cable duct) at the entry guide
mark so that the pre measured (DCN) connector end remains free
from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent identification
labeling procedure.
__ 8. The DCN portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
identification purposes to reflect the far-end termination point. Refer to
Applying Identification Labels, page 7-464.
anticipation of Acceptance Testing procedures, the LAN cables must
be properly stored.
To prevent incidental damage, the RJ-45 end of the cable must be
completely removed from the office floor, and stored securely while
respecting the applicable cable bend radius constraints.
__ 10. Route the remaining portion of the LAN cable through the overhead
cable trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to the termination point at the
GNE.
Warning:
Warning:
LAN cables can be easily damaged. LAN cables should never be stored on the
floor or in a manner that exceeds the authorized cable bend radius.
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-473
__ 11. At the termination point (GNE cable side), determine the distance from
the overhead trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to the specific port on
the GNE main shelf HDP panel.
__ 12. Measure out the specified length of cable from the RJ-45 connectors
and temporarily mark this point as a guide for the exit point from the
guide marks into the overhead cable trough (or sub flooring cable
duct), according to all applicable local regulations.
__ 14. Position the GNE portion of cable into the exit point of the fiber trough
(or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark, so that the pre
measured (GNE) connector end remains free from the cable trough (or
cable duct) for the subsequent cable identification labeling procedure.
__ 15. The GNE portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
be properly stored.
Routing Spur-to-NE LAN Connections
10.08 This section provides the procedures required to install spur-to-NE
connections between peer NEs.
Action 10.09 Follow these steps to install shielded Ethernet LAN cables between a spur
and an NE using an RJ-45 shielded LAN cable (refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471):
Warning:
Page 7-474 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C

__ 4. On the spur side, determine the cable length required to route the
cable from the overhead cable trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to
the specific ports on the Tellabs 7100 OTS main shelf HDP panel.
mark so that the pre-measured (spur) connector end remains free from
the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent identification
labeling procedure.
__ 8. The spur portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
__ 9. Remove the RJ-45 end of the cable from the office floor and store it
securely while respecting the applicable cable bend radius
constraints.
rack.
Warning:
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-475
__ 11. At the termination point (rack), determine the distance from the
overhead trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to the specific port on the
rack HDP panel.
guide marks into the overhead cable trough (or sub flooring cable duct)
__ 14. Position the rack portion of cable into the exit point of the fiber trough
(or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark so that the connector
end of the pre-measured cable that is toward the rack remains free
from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent cable
__ 15. The rack portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
constraints.
Warning:
Page 7-476 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing Managed NE-to-Tellabs 7100 NE Connections
10.10 This section provides the procedures required to install managed
NE-to-Tellabs 7100 NE connections between peer NEs.
Action 10.11 Follow these steps to install shielded Ethernet LAN cables between a
managed NE and a Tellabs 7100 OTS NE located in distinct relay racks using an
RJ-45 shielded LAN cable (refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471):
damage before installing the cables.
Note: Immediately report cable damage using the applicable company
procedures.

__ 4. On the managed NE side, determine the cable length required to route
the cable from the overhead cable trough (or sub flooring cable duct)
to the specific ports on the Tellabs 7100 Main Shelf HDP panel.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-477
mark so that the pre measured (managed NE) connector end remains
free from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent
__ 8. The managed NE portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
tagged, for identification purposes to reflect the far-end termination
point. Refer to Applying Identification Labels, page 7-464.
constraints.
mainline NE.
__ 11. At the termination point (Tellabs 7100 OTS NE), determine the
distance from the overhead trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to the
specific port on the mainline NE HDP.
__ 14. Position the Tellabs 7100 OTS NE portion of cable into the exit point
of the fiber trough (or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark,
so that the pre measured (Tellabs 7100 OTS NE) connector end
remains free from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent
cable identification labeling procedure.
__ 15. The Tellabs 7100 OTS NE portion of cable must be properly labeled,
or tagged, for identification purposes to reflect the far-end
termination point. Refer to Applying Identification Labels, page 7-464.
constraints.
Warning:
Warning:
Page 7-478 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing SW-3 LAN Connection
10.12 This section provides the procedures required to install an IP over DCC
connection from an external router to the SW-3 port on the passive HDP.
Action 10.13 Follow these steps to install shielded Ethernet LAN cable for SW-3 using
an RJ-45 shielded LAN cable (refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471):
__ 1. Inspect the LAN cable and RJ-45 connectors for signs of physical

__ 4. Determine the cable length required to route the cable from the router
to the SW-3 port on the Tellabs 7100 Main Shelf HDP panel.
__ 5. From the SW-3 RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connector, measure out the
mark so that the pre measured (SW-3) connector end remains free
from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent identification
labeling procedure.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-479
__ 8. The SW-3 portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
be properly stored.
router.
__ 11. At the termination point (router), determine the distance from the
overhead trough (or sub flooring cable duct) to the SW-3 port on the
main shelf HDP panel.
__ 14. Position the router portion of cable into the exit point of the fiber trough
(or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark, so that the pre
measured (SW-3) connector end remains free from the cable trough
(or cable duct) for the subsequent cable identification labeling
procedure.
__ 15. The SW-3 portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged, for
be properly stored.
Warning:
Warning:
Page 7-480 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD44 COMM Ports to RCMM-8D88s
10.14 This section provides the optional procedures required to install an RJ-45
connectorized LAN cable between the RCMM-8D88 COMM ports and the
OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 COMM ports. Refer to Figure 10.2, page 7-480.
Figure 10.2 RCMM-8D88 to OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 Patch Panel Connections
Materials __ one RJ-45 shielded LAN cable per OMD44 module (refer to Table
10.1, page 7-471)
45
64
65
RCMM
Static
Sensitive
C
L
E
I C
O
D
E
P
R
O
D
U
C
T
C
O
D
E
REVCODE
MFGDATE
8D88
RCMM-8D88
OMD44-45
patch panel
88
Ports
DWDM
IN|OUT
Ports 45-
Ports 1-
IN|OUT
IN|OUT
OMD 1
OMD 45
DWDM #2
(45 to 88)
Data #2
Comm
Comm EXP 7
EXP 6
EXP 5
EXP 4
EXP 3
EXP 2
EXP 1
1-44
OMD 1
Comm
1
22
23
OMD44-1
patch panel
Rx Tx
44
DWDM #1
(1 to 44)
Data #1
RCMM-8D88
add/drop ports
from the
OMD44-x
patch panel
Ports
45-88
OMD 45
Comm
155.06xx 155.06xx
Cat 5E LAN cable
Cat 5E LAN cables
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-481
Action 10.15 Follow these steps to install the RJ-45 shielded LAN cable between the
RCMM-8D88 COMM ports and the OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 COMM ports (refer
to Table 10.1, page 7-471):

__ 4. Determine the cable length required to route the cable from the OMD
COMM port to the RCMM-8D88 COMM port.
__ 5. From the RCMM-8D88 COMM RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connector,
measure out the pre-determined length.
mark so that the pre measured (RCMM-8D88 COMM) connector end
__ 8. The RCMM-8D88 COMM portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
Warning:
Page 7-482 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 10. Route the remaining portion of the LAN cable to the termination point
on the OMD44 COMM port.
__ 11. At the termination point (OMD44 COMM port), determine the distance
to the RCMM-8D88 COMM port.
__ 14. Position the OMD44 COMM port portion of cable into the exit point of
the fiber trough (or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark, so
that the pre measured (RCMM-8D88 COMM) connector end remains
free from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent cable
__ 15. The OMD44 COMM portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
__ 17. Repeat this procedure for other OMD44 COMM ports.
Warning:
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-483
Routing LAN Cables from DCM COMM Ports to Input Amplifiers
connectorized LAN cable between the LIAM-E88 or LRAM-E88 input amplifier
DCM COMM port and the COMM port on the 82.71532-xxx, 82,71542-xxx, and
82.71552-xxx DCMs.
Note: For more information on DCMs, refer to the Dispersion Compensation
Modules (DCM) module practices.
(refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471):

__ 4. Determine the cable length required to route the cable from the DCM
COMM port to the input amplifier module.
__ 5. From the DCM COMM port RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connector,
Warning:
Page 7-484 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
mark so that the pre measured (DCM COMM port) connector end
__ 8. The DCM COMM port portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
__ 10. Route the remaining portion of the LAN cable to the input amplifier.
__ 11. At the termination point (input amplifier), determine the distance from
to the DCM COMM port.
guide marks, according to all applicable local regulations.
__ 14. Position the input amplifier portion of cable into the exit point of the
fiber trough (or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark, so that
the pre measured (DCM COMM port) connector end remains free from
the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent cable identification
labeling procedure.
__ 15. The input amplifier portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-485
__ 17. Repeat this procedure for each DCM COMM port
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD44 COMM Ports to OADM88s
connectorized LAN cable between the OADM88 COMM ports and the OMD44-1
and OMD44-45 COMM ports. Refer to Figure 10.3, page 7-485.
Figure 10.3 OADM88 to OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 Patch Panel Connections
Warning:
Caution
Detach Cables
Before
Removing
Module
B
A
R

C
O
D
E
8
1
.
7
1
3
3
7
Facility/OSC
Fault
Power
OK to Pull
Active
(green)
(red)
DCM
DWDM Line
In | Out
In | Out
OADM88-IR
DCM
Comm
OMD 45
COMM
OMD 1
COMM
Exp 1
Test
-22 dB
Exp2
Exp/Aux
Aux2
Aux 1
45
64
65
OADM88
OMD44-45
patch panel
88
Ports
DWDM #2
(45 to 88)
COMM #2
1-44
OMD 1
Comm
1
22
23
OMD44-1
patch panel
Rx Tx
44
DWDM #1
(1 to 44)
COMM #1
OADM88
add/drop ports
from the
OMD44-x
patch panel
Ports
45-88
OMD 45
Comm
155.06xx 155.06xx
Cat 5E LAN cable
Cat 5E LAN cables
duplex LC/UPC
Connector
duplex
LC/UPC
Connectors
DCM
Comm
Page 7-486 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
10.1, page 7-471)
OADM88 COMM ports and the OMD44-1 and OMD44-45 COMM ports (refer to
Table 10.1, page 7-471):

__ 4. Determine the cable length required to route the cable from the OMD
COMM port to the OADM88 COMM port.
__ 5. From the OADM88 COMM RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connector,
mark so that the pre measured (OADM88 COMM) connector end
__ 8. The OADM88 COMM portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-487
be properly stored.
to the RCMM-8D88 COMM port.
that the pre measured (OADM88 COMM) connector end remains free
from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent cable
__ 15. The OADM88 COMM portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
Warning:
Warning:
Page 7-488 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Routing LAN Cables from DCM COMM Ports to OADM88s
connectorized LAN cable between the OADM88 DCM COMM port and the COMM
port on the 82.71532-xxx, 82,71542-xxx, and 82.71552-xxx DCMs.
Note: For more information on DCMs, refer to the Dispersion Compensation
Modules (DCM) module practices.
OADM88 COMM port and the DCM COMM port (refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471):

__ 4. Determine the cable length required to route the cable from the DCM
COMM port to the OADM88. Refer to Figure 10.4, page 7-489.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-489
Figure 10.4 OADM88 DCM COMM Port Cabling
__ 5. From the DCM COMM port RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connector,
mark so that the pre measured (DCM COMM port) connector end
__ 8. The DCM COMM port portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
__ 10. Route the remaining portion of the LAN cable to the OADM88.
__ 11. At the termination point (OADM88), determine the distance from to the
DCM COMM port.
ACO
Lamp Test
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OADM88 BFM SPM
C-side DCM
A-side DCM
B-side DCM
BFM BFM OADM88 BFM SPM BFM OADM88 BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM BFM
Warning:
Page 7-490 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
guide marks, according to all applicable local regulations.
__ 14. Position the OADM88 portion of cable into the exit point of the fiber
trough (or sub flooring cable duct) at the exit guide mark, so that the
pre measured (DCM COMM port) connector end remains free from the
cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent cable identification
labeling procedure.
__ 15. The OADM88 portion of cable must be properly labeled, or tagged,
for identification purposes to reflect the far-end termination point.
Refer to Applying Identification Labels, page 7-464.
be properly stored.
__ 17. Repeat this procedure for each DCM COMM port
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-491
Routing LAN Cables to from OMD88 COMM Port to DX RCMM
connectorized LAN cable between the OMD88 Comm port (COMM) and the DX
RCMM Comm port (DX Comm). Refer to Figure 10.5, page 7-491.
Figure 10.5 Directionless Add/Drop Terminal Connections
Fault
Power
OK to Pull: Red
Active: Green
Exp 7
In | Out
DWDM(88)
Express
Port
DX
In Out
Comm
DX
Do Not
Use
DWDM
In
LOAM-E88
DWDM
Fault
Power
OK to Pull:Red
Active:Green
Caution
Detach Cables
Before
Removing
Module
Sync
Fault
Power
OKto Pull
Active
(green)
(red)
TGTM-E
OUT
P
O
R
T
In
In
Line
O
u
t
COMM
In Out
OMD88
DWDM
(1 - 88)
RJ-45
RJ-45
LC/UPC
dual
LC/UPC
SC/UPC
DWDM In
SC/UPC
DWDM Out
Do Not
Use
DWDM
Out
DWDM
Out
Out
Out
In
In
Out
In
LC/UPC
DX Out
transponder OMD88 LOAM-E88 DX RCMM
Refer to Table 10.1, page 7-471 for Ethernet cable.
LC/UPC
DX In
LC/UPC
DWDM
In
*DX*
RCMM
Use
Do Not
Exp 6
In | Out
Exp 5
In | Out
Exp 4
In | Out
Exp 3
In | Out
Exp 2
In | Out
Exp 1
In | Out
Comm port is
not used in this
configuration.
Page 7-492 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
10.1, page 7-471)
Action 10.23 Follow these steps to install the RJ-45 shielded LAN cable between the DX
RCMM DX COMM port and the OMD88 COMM port (refer to Table 10.1,
page 7-471):

__ 4. Determine the cable length required to route the cable from the
OMD88 COMM port to the DX RCMM DX COMM port.
__ 5. From the DX RCMM DX COMM RJ-45 shielded Ethernet connector,
mark so that the pre measured (DX RCMM DX COMM) connector end
__ 8. The DX RCMM DX COMM portion of cable must be properly labeled,
or tagged, for identification purposes to reflect the far-end
termination point. Refer to Applying Identification Labels, page 7-464.
Warning:
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-493
be properly stored.
to the DX RCMM DX COMM port.
that the pre measured (DX RCMM DX COMM) connector end remains
free from the cable trough (or cable duct) for the subsequent cable
__ 15. The OMD88 COMM portion of cable must be properly labeled, or
be properly stored.
Warning:
Warning:
11. Installing Optional Door Assemblies Installation
Page 7-494 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
11. Installing Optional Door Assemblies
11.01 As part of electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection, the Tellabs 7100
OTS NE is equipped with embedded EMI shielding. As such, the integration and
installation of shelf doors is now optional.
11.02 The Tellabs 7100 OTS shelf doors may be attached over the equipment
and relay rack spacers with fiber management spools to cover the equipment
shelves, HDPs or PDPs, fiber troughs, and fan trays.
11.03 There are several types of optional door assembly kits available for the
Tellabs 7100 OTS main shelf, port shelf, and HCSS. The main difference between
these door assemblies is the physical size of the doors. Refer to Materials,
page 7-494:
NEBS Shelf Door Kit for 7100A/B-60 shelves (Tellabs part number
81.71050C)
ETSI Shelf Door Kit for 7100C/D-60 shelves (Tellabs part number
81.71050B)
NEBS HCSS Door Assembly (Tellabs part number 82.71050A)
Note: Verify that the Tellabs part number for the door assembly kit, which was
shipped with the equipment, corresponds to your system requirements to
ensure that your System Engineer has ordered the correct part number
door assembly kit for the relay rack that you are installing.
__ optional Cable Label kit for inside of the door (Tellabs part number
180.0765), order one kit per door
__ NEBS Shelf Door kit (Tellabs part number 81.71050C)
__ ETSI Shelf Door kit (Tellabs part number 81.71050B)
__ NEBS HCSS Door Assembly (Tellabs part number 82.71050A)
Installation 11. Installing Optional Door Assemblies
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-495
Each optional door assembly kit contains the following parts:
__ onedoor panel (NEBS or ETSI)
__ twodoor hinges (NEBS or ETSI)
__ twodoor latch plates (NEBS or ETSI)
__ sixteenPhillips-head screws for attaching the hinges and latch
plates to the equipment shelf
Tools __ #1 Phillips-head screwdriver approximately 8 inches long
Action 11.05 Follow these steps to install the optional assembly door kits
__ 2. Locate the pre-drilled holes on the right hand side of the shelf. There
is a group of four holes for each latch plate. One group at the top of the
shelf and another at the bottom of the shelf. Using four Phillips-head
screws per latch plate, attach the latch plates to the equipment shelf.
When completed, there should be two latch plates attached to the right
hand side of the shelf.
__ 3. Locate the pre-drilled holes on the left hand side of the shelf. There is
a group of four holes for each hinge. One group at the top of the shelf
and another at the bottom of the shelf. Using four Phillips-head screws
per hinge, attach the hinges to the equipment shelf.
When completed, there should be two hinges attached to the left hand
side of the shelf. Refer to Figure 11.1, page 7-496.
Warning:
Tellabs recommends that, wherever possible, modules be removed from the
equipment shelf when the installation of optional door assembly kits is being
performed. However, as long as caution is used, the removal of the modules is
not mandatory, because this procedure can be done on a system carrying live
traffic without service interruption.
Warning:
11. Installing Optional Door Assemblies Installation
Page 7-496 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
__ 4. Verify that the hinge pins on the door are in the retracted position.
Figure 11.1, page 7-496 shows the inside of the EMI shielded door
and details the hinge and latch mechanisms.
Figure 11.1 Inside View of Shelf Door Showing Latch and Hinge Mechanisms
Hinges
Hinge
Latches
Installation 11. Installing Optional Door Assemblies
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-497
__ 5. Support the door with both hands and align it with the hinges on the
left side of the shelf and the inside facing you.
__ 6. Retract the spring-loaded hinges and release them into the hole in the
tabs that are located on the left side of the shelf. Refer to Figure 11.2,
page 7-497.
Figure 11.2 Installing the Shelf Door
__ 7. Verify that all Door Hinges and Latch Plates are properly attached and
all screws are securely tightened. Refer to Figure 11.2, page 7-497.
__ 8. Verify that all fiber cables are properly seated in the shelf fiber trough
and check the door for ease of closure and proper latching operation.
__ 9. Install optional Door label kits to the inside of the door at this time.
__ 10. To close the door, swing the door to the right and continue pushing
until it latches. To open the door, pull both release latches
simultaneously.
__ 11. Repeat steps 5, page 7-497 through 10, page 7-497 for all doors to be
equipped on the Tellabs 7100 OTS NE.
spring-loaded hinge pins
USER NOTES
TELLABS DOCUMENTATI ON
Installation Appendix A. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-499
Appendix A. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Services
A.01 This section briefly outlines specific services that Tellabs can provide to its
customers in the interest of ensuring optimal operating performances.
Service Overview
A.02 To ensure the seamless integration of Tellabs equipment into customer
networks, Tellabs offers a comprehensive range of high-quality customer support
services.
A.03 For pricing information on each of the following services, please contact
Tellabs Customer Service.
A.04 Customers may take advantage of any of Tellabs outstanding support ser-
vices, including site preparation, engineering, installation, and maintenance sup-
port.
Site Preparation Services
A.05 Experienced Tellabs Field Service Engineers (FSEs) are available to the
customer on-demand to accomplish the following site preparation services:
Fiber characterization
Full OTDR testing
Insertion loss testing
A.06 Tellabs site engineering services range from basic to advanced,
depending upon the array of applications, architecture and network configuration
envisaged by the customer.
Note: To ensure optimal network operation and cable performance, Tellabs
recommends the execution of advanced site preparation and engineering
services for any customer using or interested in using CWDM or DWDM
technologies.
Engineering Services
A.07 Tellabs System Deployment Team delivers the following engineering
services:
site survey generation via telephone or on-site visit
generation of central office (CO) blueprint drawings and detailed
specifications
online customer database updates (for example, ACORN, ERMA,
TIRKS, INFOBANK)
Appendix A. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Services Installation
Page 7-500 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
Installation Services
Note: All Tellabs installations are performed in compliance with Telcordia
Technologies, Inc. Generic Requirements, GR-1275-CORE.
A.08 A Tellabs-performed installation ensures the following customer benefits:
high-quality engineering and installation services provided by service
personnel who have manufacturers expertise
reduced administrative costs result from having a single point of
contact for both product purchase and installation
system installation records, if needed, for future troubleshooting or
system recovery
A.09 Tellabs System Deployment Services offers the following installation
services:
environment build-out
relay rack installation
AC or DC and frame ground connection to relay racks
fiber and LAN duct work installation
facility cable runs and termination
Supervised Installation
A.10 A supervised installation service is available to customers who elect not to
use Tellabs for complete product installation. Supervised installation provides the
benefits of manufacturer expertise, program management, and the assurance of a
properly installed system. The available services range from basic (supervision of
the installation process during critical phases only) to a complete management of
the entire installation process.
Support Services Pricing Information
A.11 For pricing information on any of these quality Tellabs services, follow your
company's prescribed procedures for obtaining technical assistance or call Tellabs
Technical Assistance at 1.800.443.5555 (North America) or 1.630.798.7070 (out-
side North America).
A.12 This section briefly outlines specific services that Tellabs can provide to its
customers in the interest of ensuring optimal OTS operating performances.
Installation Appendix A. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-501
Maintenance Services
A.13 Maintenance services are available to customers who elect to take advan-
tage of Tellabs expertise and industry recognized experience in the maintenance
and support of telecommunications equipment, systems and networks.
A.14 Tellabs maintenance program combines the benefits of manufacturer
expertise with the assurance of a properly maintained system to proactively guard
against costly system outages.
A.15 The available services range from basic maintenance (Silver Plan) to a
complete equipment maintenance (Gold Plan) up to a comprehensive manage-
ment of the customers entire network maintenance program (Platinum).
A.16 For more information about these and other outstanding Tellabs support
services, contact your Tellabs Customer representative or the appropriate cus-
tomer support number referenced previously.
USER NOTES
Installation Index
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-503
Index
Numerics
2mm, 3mm jacketed fiber cables 7-438
-48 Vdc battery supply 7-339, 7-355
88CHPP 7-282
A
AC power. See system wiring
alarm interface panel
alarm wiring 7-363
alarm wiring 7-334
external alarm systems 7-362
alarm interface panel 7-363
breaker frame alarm panel 7-367
anchor bolts
earthquake 7-42, 7-189
non-earthquake 7-42, 7-48, 7-189, 7-194
B
battery feed polarity and voltage 7-346, 7-361
battery supply 7-339, 7-355
bend radius
optical cable 7-409
BITS clock timing interfaces 7-467
blank fuse 7-345, 7-361
bolts
non-earthquake 7-42, 7-189
Booster Amplifier (BAMP) 7-328
breaker frame alarm panel
alarm wiring 7-367
measurements 7-12, 7-13, 7-15
space requirements 7-15
C
cable management
fiber guides 7-411, 7-415
fiber trough 7-411, 7-415
rack spacer with integrated fiber distribution
panel 7-414
cabling
2mm, 3mm jacketed fiber cables 7-438
LGX panel to transponders 7-433, 7-435, 7-436
Line side protection
port shelf patch panel 7-439, 7-443
OPSM
routing 7-419, 7-420
optical
bend radius constraints 7-409
cable management 7-414
central office -48 Vdc battery supply 7-339, 7-355
clock, timing source (BITS) 7-467
CO LAN connections, procedure 7-471
common equipment dimensions 7-5, 7-23, 7-178
connector types, cables
fiber interface 7-462
Co-Propagating Raman Amplifier 700 mW (CRA) 7-328
cover panel, rear spacer 7-139
door cover screws 7-166
duct mounting bracket 7-169
edge guards 7-161
end aisle application 7-140
growing NEs 7-142
end shield adapters 7-150
fiber cables 7-171, 7-322
fiber extension 7-168
fiber spools 7-164
installing 7-175, 7-177, 7-207
rack top fiber guide 7-163
radius control plates 7-160
requirements 7-142
top box 7-162, 7-172
top box front cover 7-173
cover panel kit
wire shield (180.0517) 7-139, 7-140
materials 7-147
cover panel kits
cover panel kits
end aisle (180.0517) 7-139
end aisle (180.0517) 7-140
materials 7-147
two rack (part number 180.0508)
materials 7-147
crates. See shipping crates
current and power specifications 7-346, 7-361
current specifications 7-346, 7-361
customer service
engineering and installation 7-499
engineering services 7-499
D
dispersion compensation modules (DCMs)
labeling 7-260
location in rack spacer 7-256
diverter, rear cover panels for spacer 7-163
door cover screw, rear cover panels for spacer 7-166
duct mounting bracket 7-144, 7-148
duct mounting bracket, rear cover panels for spacer 7-
169
Index Installation
Page 7-504 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
E
earthquake anchor bolts 7-42, 7-189
Edge guard grommet 7-145, 7-149
edge guards, rear cover panels for spacer 7-161
eight-degree SBOADM
shelf locations 7-380
electrical wiring 7-334
-48 Vdc office battery supply 7-339, 7-355
battery feed polarity and power
specifications 7-339, 7-355
optional AC power 7-369
relay rack frame to office ground 7-336
end shield adapter - bottom 7-144, 7-149
end shield adapter - middle 7-144, 7-148
rear cover panels for spacer 7-150
end shield adapter - top, with PEM nuts 7-144, 7-148
end shield adapter - top without PEM nuts 7-145, 7-149
end shield installation 7-116, 7-118
next to relay rack 7-116, 7-117, 7-118
engineering and installation services 7-499
engineering services 7-499
equipment
list of 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
Ethernet cables 7-471
Ethernet connections
CO LAN
procedure 7-471
extension
wire shield 7-130
F
fiber cables
2mm, 3mm jacketed 7-438
fiber cables, rear cover panels for spacer 7-171, 7-322
fiber cabling. See optical interface cabling
fiber extension, rear cover panels for spacer 7-168
fiber spools, rear cover panels for spacer 7-164
floor
preparation, equipment list 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
floor load 7-28, 7-183
floor mounting
bolts
non-earthquake 7-42, 7-48, 7-189, 7-194
floor preparation 7-28, 7-183
front edge guard, wire shield 7-175
front rack spacer top box 7-143, 7-147
fuse, blank (for OLA with unused port shelf) 7-345, 7-
361
fuse panel 7-326
fuses for max. number of shelves 7-345, 7-361
G
Generic Breaker Frame Alarm Panel 7-332
grounding 7-336
growing NEs, adjusting door panels for
end of aisle application 7-142
growth of NEs, fuses for max. number of shelves 7-345,
7-361
H
HCSS Electrical Interconnect (ESI) cables 7-80, 7-228
HCSS paired (ETSI) 7-228
HCSS paired (NEBS) 7-80
HCSS PDU (ETSI) 7-222
HCSS PDU (NEBS) 7-73
HCSS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 7-15
HCSS racks 7-18
HCSS rear rack base extender kit 7-62
High Capacity Switch Shelf (HCSS) 7-15, 7-16, 7-17, 7-
20
I
IFDP. See integrated fiber distribution panel
installation services. See engineering and installation
services
installing equipment
list of 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
supporting top of relay rack 7-51, 7-197
overhead support structure 7-52, 7-198
installing equipment relay racks
equipment relay rack layout 7-16, 7-42, 7-189
preparing for mounting 7-28, 7-183
equipment relay rack requirements 7-5, 7-23, 7-178
installing the relay rack framework 7-46, 7-192
unpacking equipment 7-23, 7-178
international
shipping crate
torque recommendations 7-22
K
kits, rear cover panel 7-139
edge guards 7-161
growing NEs 7-142
fiber spools 7-164
installing 7-175, 7-177, 7-207
Installation Index
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-505
requirements 7-142
top box 7-162, 7-172
kits, wire shield 7-124
extension 7-130
front edge guard 7-175
L
labeling
dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) 7-260
layout of relay rack, parts 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
Line side protection
cabling
port shelf patch panel 7-439, 7-443
list of equipment 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
M
main shelf current and power specifications 7-346, 7-
361
N
Network Interfaced Raman (NIR) 7-328
non-earthquake anchor bolts 7-42, 7-48, 7-189, 7-194
North America
shipping crate 7-24, 7-178
torque recommendation 7-22
O
OMD88 7-285
OPSM patch panel 7-273, 7-318
optical cables, install
amplifier cables
to internal DCM 7-431
optical interface cabling
band radius constraints 7-409
optical line amplifier (OLA) with unused port shelf, re-
quires blank fuse 7-345, 7-361
optical protection and synchronization module (OPSM)
cabling
routing 7-419, 7-420
P
Paired HCSS 7-80
paired HCSS (NEBS) 7-61
Paired HCSS ESI cables 7-93
panels, rear cover for spacer 7-139
edge guards 7-161
growing NEs 7-142
fiber spools 7-164
installing 7-175, 7-177, 7-207
tightening screws 7-177, 7-207
requirements 7-142
top box 7-172
7-162
part numbers 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
relay rack equipment 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
patch panel 7-289, 7-290, 7-291
OPSM 7-273, 7-318
port shelf current and power specifications 7-346, 7-361
port shelf patch panel
cabling for Line side protection 7-439, 7-443
power
specifications 7-346, 7-361
preparing for mounting
anchor bolts
nonearthquake 7-42, 7-189
protection
Y-Cable patch panel 7-287, 7-320
R
rack end aisle cover panel 7-145
rack fiber storage spool 7-143
rack spacer duct mounting 7-144, 7-148
rack spacer extension mounting 7-144, 7-148
rack spacer panel
location of dispersion compensation modules
(DCMs) 7-256
rack spacers
installing wire shield 7-128
installing wire shield extension 7-135
rack spacer top box 7-143, 7-147
rack spacer with integrated fiber distribution panel
rack top fiber guide (diverter) 7-143, 7-147
rack top fiber guide, rear cover panels for spacer 7-163
Rack Within a Rack (RWR) 7-299
radius control 7-143
radius control plates
rear cover panel 7-139
edge guards 7-161
growing NEs 7-142
Index Installation
Page 7-506 8/10 76.7144FP60/7, Rev C
fiber spools 7-164
installing 7-175, 7-177, 7-207
tightening screws 7-177, 7-207
requirements 7-142
top box 7-162, 7-172, 7-173
rear cover panels for spacer, installing 7-177, 7-207
rear rack cover panel 7-147
rear rack end aisle top box 7-145, 7-148
relay rack
parts 7-32, 7-186, 7-323
relay rack layout 7-16
anchor bolts 7-42, 7-189
relay rack requirements 7-5, 7-23, 7-178
unpacking 7-23, 7-178
relay rack dimensions
relay rack and common equipment 7-5, 7-23, 7-178
relay rack floor load 7-28, 7-183
relay rack grounding 7-336
relay rack installation
relay rack requirements 7-5, 7-23, 7-178
requirements
RJ-45 cables 7-471
RWR 7-299
S
SBOADM
shelf locations
first/second main shelves 7-380
shelf
measurements 7-12
shelf locations
first and second main shelves 7-380
shipping crates
international 7-24, 7-178
North American 7-24, 7-178
site planning
shelf measurements 7-12
space requirements
breaker frame alarm panel (BFAP) 7-15
site preparation services 7-499
spacer panel
rear cover panels 7-139
edge guards 7-161
growing NEs 7-142
fiber spools 7-164
installing 7-175, 7-177, 7-207
requirements 7-142
top box 7-162, 7-172, 7-173
wire shield 7-124
between two racks 7-128
next to third party equipment 7-126
wire shield extension 7-130
next to third party equipment 7-133, 7-135
system configurations 7-1, 7-2
system wiring 7-334
battery feed polarity and voltage 7-339, 7-355
relay rack frame of office ground 7-336
T
third party equipment
installing wire shield 7-126
installing wire shield extension 7-133
timing interface, BITS 7-467
top box
front cover panel 7-173
rear cover panel 7-172
top box, rear cover panels for spacer 7-162
torque
Installation Index
76.7144FP60/7, Rev C 8/10 Page 7-507
in Imperial for North America 7-22
in metric for International 7-22
torquing force 7-22
U
W
wire shield
end shield adapters for rear door panel 7-150
installing 7-124
between two rack spacers 7-128
wire shield extension 7-130
installing
between two rack spacers 7-135
wiring 7-334
relay rack frame to office ground 7-336
Y
Y-Cable patch panel 7-287, 7-289, 7-290, 7-291, 7-320
USER NOTES

Tellabs 7100 Installation

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Tellabs 7100 Installation

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Revision C, 8/10

Copyright 2010 Tellabs. All rights reserved.

7100 Optical Transport System

, ENHANCED AUDIO PLUS

, INTELLIGENT SERVICE EDGE

Upgrade, TELLABS. THE

Any other company or product names may be trademarks of their respective

Anda mungkin juga menyukai